manualshive.com logo in svg

Rohde & Schwarz FSV3000, User Manual

Share
Download
Rohde & Schwarz FSV3000 User Manual Download Page 19

Contents

R&S

®

FSVA3000/ R&S

®

FSV3000

19

User Manual 1178.8520.02 ─ 08

10.1

Alignment...................................................................................................................684

10.1.1

Basics on alignment.................................................................................................... 684

10.1.2

Alignment settings.......................................................................................................686

10.1.3

How to perform a self-test........................................................................................... 690

10.1.4

How to align the instrument.........................................................................................690

10.1.5

How to align the touchscreen......................................................................................691

10.2

Display settings.........................................................................................................691

10.2.1

Display settings........................................................................................................... 691

10.2.1.1

General display settings..............................................................................................691

10.2.1.2

Displayed items...........................................................................................................693

10.2.1.3

Display theme and colors............................................................................................696

10.2.1.4

External monitor settings.............................................................................................701

10.2.1.5

Touch(screen) settings................................................................................................ 702

10.2.2

How to configure the colors for display and printing................................................... 702

10.2.3

How to work with the soft front panels........................................................................ 703

10.3

Application starter.................................................................................................... 704

10.3.1

Application starter functions........................................................................................ 705

10.3.2

How to work with the application starter......................................................................709

10.4

Toolbar configuration............................................................................................... 710

10.5

Transducers...............................................................................................................712

10.5.1

Basics on transducer factors.......................................................................................712

10.5.2

Transducer settings.....................................................................................................714

10.5.2.1

Transducer management............................................................................................ 714

10.5.2.2

Transducer factors...................................................................................................... 717

10.5.3

Reference: transducer factor file format......................................................................720

10.5.4

How to configure the transducer................................................................................. 720

10.6

Frequency response correction (R&S

 

FSV/A-K544).............................................. 724

10.6.1

Basics on frequency response correction................................................................... 724

10.6.2

User-defined frequency response correction settings.................................................728

10.7

Reference frequency settings..................................................................................736

10.8

System configuration settings.................................................................................739

10.8.1

Hardware information..................................................................................................739

10.8.2

Licensing, versions and options.................................................................................. 740

Summary of Contents for FSV3000

Page 1: ...R S FSVA3000 R S FSV3000 Signal and Spectrum Analyzer User Manual 1178852002 Version 08 ÜãD2 ...

Page 2: ...V3 B114 enhanced computing power 1330 4910 02 R S FSV3 B40 1330 4103 02 R S FSV3 B200 1330 4132 02 R S FSV3 B400 1330 7154 02 R S FSV3 B1000 1346 3699 02 40 MHz 200 MHz 400 MHz 1 GHz analysis bandwidth extensions R S FSV3 K3 Power Sensor support 1346 3676 02 R S FSV3 K33 Security Write protection 1346 3360 02 R S FSV3 K54 EMI Measurements 1330 5068 02 R S FSV3 K553 External frontend support 1346 4...

Page 3: ...ledgment OSA 38 2 8 Application notes application cards white papers etc 39 3 Getting started 40 3 1 Key features 43 3 2 Preparing for use 43 3 2 1 Lifting and carrying 44 3 2 2 Unpacking and checking 44 3 2 3 Choosing the operating site 44 3 2 4 Setting up the R S FSV A 45 3 2 4 1 Placing the R S FSV A on a bench top 45 3 2 4 2 Mounting the R S FSV A in a rack 46 3 2 5 Connecting the AC power 46 ...

Page 4: ...ob 63 Navigation keys 63 Undo redo keys 63 3 3 1 8 Trigger input output 64 3 3 1 9 RF input 50 ohm 64 3 3 1 10 Probe 64 3 3 1 11 Ext mixer connector optional 64 3 3 1 12 Noise source control power sensor 65 3 3 1 13 AF out and volume R S FSV3 B3 65 3 3 1 14 Keypad 65 3 3 2 Rear panel view 66 3 3 2 1 AC power supply connection and main power switch 67 3 3 2 2 HDMI display port 67 3 3 2 3 LAN 67 3 3...

Page 5: ...4 7 Zooming into the display 84 3 4 8 Zooming into the display permanently 87 3 4 9 Saving settings 90 3 4 10 Printing and saving results 92 3 5 Operating the instrument 93 3 5 1 Understanding the display information 94 3 5 1 1 Channel bar 95 3 5 1 2 Window title bar 98 3 5 1 3 Marker information 99 3 5 1 4 Frequency and span information in diagram footer 100 3 5 1 5 Instrument and status informat...

Page 6: ...R S multiview 126 4 3 Selecting the applications 126 4 4 Running a sequence of measurements 129 4 4 1 The sequencer concept 129 4 4 2 Sequencer settings 131 4 4 3 How to set up the sequencer 131 5 Measurements and results 133 5 1 Auto measurements 134 5 2 Basic measurements 135 5 2 1 Basic measurement types 135 5 2 2 How to perform a basic sweep measurement 136 5 2 3 Measurement examples measuring...

Page 7: ...r results 157 5 3 3 Channel power basics 160 5 3 3 1 Measurement methods 160 5 3 3 2 Measurement repeatability 162 5 3 3 3 Recommended common measurement parameters 163 Sweep Time 164 Frequency span 165 Resolution bandwidth RBW 165 Video bandwidth VBW 166 Detector 166 trace averaging 167 Reference level 167 5 3 3 4 Measurement on multi standard radio MSR signals 167 5 3 4 Channel power configurati...

Page 8: ...edefined CP ACLR standards 211 5 3 10 Reference predefined ACLR user standard XML files 212 5 4 Carrier to noise measurements 214 5 4 1 About the measurement 214 5 4 2 Carrier to noise results 215 5 4 3 Carrier to noise configuration 215 5 4 4 How to determine the carrier to noise ratio 217 5 5 Occupied bandwidth measurement OBW 218 5 5 1 About the measurement 218 5 5 2 OBW results 220 5 5 3 OBW c...

Page 9: ...3 5 6 8 2 ASCII file export format spectrum emission mask 269 5 7 Spurious emissions measurement 270 5 7 1 About the measurement 270 5 7 2 Spurious emissions measurement results 271 5 7 3 Spurious emissions basics 272 5 7 3 1 Ranges and range settings 272 5 7 3 2 Limit lines in spurious measurements 273 5 7 4 Spurious emissions measurement configuration 274 5 7 4 1 Sweep list 274 5 7 4 2 Adjusting...

Page 10: ...power configuration 300 5 9 5 How to measure powers in the time domain 302 5 9 6 Measurement example 302 5 10 Harmonic distortion measurement 304 5 10 1 About the measurement 304 5 10 2 Harmonic distortion basics 305 5 10 3 Harmonic distortion results 307 5 10 4 Harmonic distortion configuration 308 5 10 5 How to determine the harmonic distortion 310 5 11 Third order intercept TOI measurement 310 ...

Page 11: ...on 334 5 13 3 8 Limit checks 335 5 13 4 EMI measurement configuration 335 5 13 4 1 EMI marker configuration 336 5 13 4 2 EMI final measurement configuration 339 5 13 4 3 LISN control settings 343 5 13 5 EMI result analysis 344 5 13 6 How to perform EMI measurements 345 5 13 7 Measurement example measuring radio frequency interference 347 5 13 8 Optimizing and troubleshooting EMI measurements 349 6...

Page 12: ...5 Normalization 375 Reference trace reference line and reference level 377 Coupling the frequencies 378 Displayed information and errors 380 6 2 4 3 External generator control settings 381 Interface configuration settings 381 Measurement settings 383 Source calibration functions 386 6 2 4 4 How to work with external generator control 389 How to calibrate a measurement setup using an external gener...

Page 13: ... 6 1 External frontend basics 424 6 2 6 2 External frontend settings 429 Global configuration settings 429 Frontend configuration settings 431 Diagnostics 434 Network configuration 435 6 2 6 3 How to use an external frontend 436 6 2 6 4 Troubleshooting external frontend control 437 Error messages 437 Problems with connection 439 Problems during operation 439 6 2 7 Output settings 440 6 2 8 IF Vide...

Page 14: ...ettings 463 6 5 1 1 Separating signals by selecting an appropriate resolution bandwidth 464 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the trace using the video bandwidth 465 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW 465 6 5 1 4 Coupling span and RBW 466 6 5 1 5 How data is measured the sweep type 466 6 5 1 6 Which data may pass filter types 468 6 5 1 7 How long the data is measured Sweep Time 468 6 5 1 8 How much data is measured swe...

Page 15: ...2 1 Background information the smartgrid principle 505 7 1 2 2 How to activate smartgrid mode 507 7 1 2 3 How to add a new result window 507 7 1 2 4 How to close a result window 508 7 1 2 5 How to arrange the result windows 508 7 2 Zoomed displays 509 7 2 1 Single zoom versus multiple zoom 509 7 2 2 Zoom functions 511 7 2 3 How to zoom into a diagram 513 7 3 Marker usage 516 7 3 1 Basics on marker...

Page 16: ...e a signal point in detail 554 7 3 5 2 How to use a fixed reference marker 555 7 3 5 3 How to output the demodulated signal accoustically 555 7 3 5 4 How to export a peak list 556 7 3 6 Measurement example measuring harmonics using marker functions 557 7 4 Display and limit lines 558 7 4 1 Display lines 559 7 4 1 1 Basics on display lines 559 7 4 1 2 Display line settings 559 7 4 1 3 Defining disp...

Page 17: ...4 7 5 2 3 How to display and configure a spectrogram 606 How to configure the color mapping 608 7 5 3 Trace math 610 7 6 Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation 612 7 6 1 Displaying a reference trace importing trace data 613 7 6 2 Trace data ex import 614 7 6 3 How to import traces 619 7 6 4 How to export trace data and numerical results 619 7 6 5 How to export a peak list 620 7...

Page 18: ... Import export functions 649 9 5 Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings 653 9 5 1 Print and screenshot settings 653 9 5 1 1 Print content settings 654 9 5 1 2 Print preview functions 656 9 5 1 3 Printer settings 658 9 5 1 4 Page setup 661 9 5 1 5 Print color settings 663 9 5 2 How to store or print screenshots of the display 664 9 5 3 Example for storing multiple measurem...

Page 19: ...How to work with the soft front panels 703 10 3 Application starter 704 10 3 1 Application starter functions 705 10 3 2 How to work with the application starter 709 10 4 Toolbar configuration 710 10 5 Transducers 712 10 5 1 Basics on transducer factors 712 10 5 2 Transducer settings 714 10 5 2 1 Transducer management 714 10 5 2 2 Transducer factors 717 10 5 3 Reference transducer factor file forma...

Page 20: ...10 10 3 Generator coupling 766 10 10 4 How to synchronize parameters 768 10 10 5 Example for a user defined parameter coupling 770 11 Network operation and remote control 773 11 1 Remote control interfaces and protocols 773 11 1 1 LAN interface 774 11 1 1 1 LAN web browser interface 775 11 2 Status reporting system 777 11 2 1 Hierarchy of status registers 777 11 2 2 Contents of the status register...

Page 21: ...3 How to determine the required SCPI command 800 11 5 4 How to create and export SCPI scripts 801 11 5 5 Example for a recorded SCPI script 804 11 6 Network and remote control settings 804 11 6 1 General network settings 805 11 6 2 Remote settings 807 11 6 3 Compatibility settings 810 11 6 4 LAN settings 814 11 6 5 HUMS settings 815 11 6 5 1 Basic settings 816 11 6 5 2 Protocol settings 817 11 6 5...

Page 22: ...o start and close the remote desktop 840 11 7 7 4 How to shut down the R S FSV A via remote operation 842 11 7 8 How to start a remote control session from a PC 842 11 7 9 How to return to manual operation 843 12 Remote commands 844 12 1 Conventions used in SCPI command descriptions 844 12 2 Common suffixes 845 12 3 Common commands 845 12 4 Selecting the operating mode and application 850 12 4 1 S...

Page 23: ...R measurement 918 Example configuring and performing an asymmetrical MSR ACLR measurement 920 12 5 4 Measuring the carrier to noise ratio 924 12 5 5 Measuring the occupied bandwidth 925 12 5 5 1 Configuring the measurement 925 12 5 5 2 Programming example OBW measurement 926 12 5 6 Measuring the spectrum emission mask 927 12 5 6 1 Managing measurement configurations 927 12 5 6 2 Controlling the me...

Page 24: ...ng results 984 12 5 8 7 Programming example measuring statistics 985 12 5 9 Measuring the time domain power 987 12 5 9 1 Configuring the measurement 987 12 5 9 2 Performing a time domain power measurement 990 12 5 9 3 Retrieving measurement results 991 Measuring the mean power 991 Measuring the peak power 992 Measuring the RMS power 993 Measuring the standard deviation 994 12 5 9 4 Programming exa...

Page 25: ...evaluation 1019 12 5 15 Measuring the pulse power 1020 12 5 15 1 Performing pulse power measurements 1021 12 5 15 2 Example performing a pulse power measurement 1024 12 6 Configuring the result display 1024 12 6 1 General window commands 1025 12 6 2 Working with windows in the display 1026 12 6 3 Examples configuring the result display 1033 12 6 3 1 Example 1 adding and arranging windows 1033 12 6...

Page 26: ...cy and span 1100 12 7 2 1 Defining the frequency range 1101 12 7 2 2 Configuring signal tracking 1105 12 7 3 Configuring bandwidth and sweep settings 1107 12 7 3 1 Configuring the bandwidth and filter 1107 12 7 3 2 Configuring the sweep 1110 12 7 4 Configuring the vertical axis amplitude scaling 1115 12 7 4 1 Amplitude settings 1115 12 7 4 2 Configuring the attenuation 1118 12 7 4 3 Configuring a ...

Page 27: ...with markers 1170 12 8 3 1 Setting up individual markers 1170 12 8 3 2 General marker settings 1177 12 8 3 3 Configuring and performing a marker search 1179 12 8 3 4 Positioning the marker 1183 Positioning normal markers 1183 Positioning delta markers 1186 12 8 3 5 Retrieving marker results 1189 12 8 3 6 Marker search spectrograms 1191 Using markers 1191 Using delta markers 1195 12 8 3 7 Fixed ref...

Page 28: ...1229 12 8 4 Configuring display lines 1230 12 8 5 Defining limit checks 1232 12 8 5 1 Configuring limit lines 1233 12 8 5 2 Managing limit lines 1242 12 8 5 3 Checking the results of a limit check 1245 12 8 5 4 Programming example using limit lines 1246 Example configuring limit lines 1246 Example performing a limit check 1248 12 9 Managing settings and results 1249 12 9 1 General data storage and...

Page 29: ...1326 12 10 7 Configuring the network and remote control 1327 12 10 8 Configuring HUMS 1331 12 10 9 Checking the system configuration 1337 12 10 10 Signal generator control commands 1346 12 10 11 Using service functions 1347 12 10 12 Remote commands for synchronizing parameters 1349 12 10 12 1 Predefined parameter coupling 1349 12 10 12 2 User defined parameter coupling 1356 12 10 12 3 Generator co...

Page 30: ...ted PXA models 1409 12 14 Deprecated commands 1411 12 15 Programming examples 1414 12 15 1 Programming example performing a basic frequency sweep 1415 12 15 2 Service request 1418 12 15 2 1 Initiate service request 1418 12 15 2 2 Waiting for the arrival of a service request 1420 12 15 2 3 Waiting without blocking the keyboard and mouse 1421 12 15 2 4 Service request routine 1422 12 15 2 5 Reading ...

Page 31: ... R S FSV3000 31 User Manual 1178 8520 02 08 15 Maintenance storage transport and disposal 1437 15 1 Cleaning 1437 15 2 Storage 1437 15 3 Transporting 1437 15 4 Disposal 1438 List of remote commands base unit 1439 Index 1464 ...

Page 32: ...Contents R S FSVA3000 R S FSV3000 32 User Manual 1178 8520 02 08 ...

Page 33: ...Instructions Products from the Rohde Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according to the highest technical standards To use the products safely follow the instructions provided here and in the product documentation Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits Intended use and limits are descri...

Page 34: ...can fall over and cause injury If you mount products in a rack ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and stability Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer Always install the prod ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely Secure the product so that it cannot fall off the rack Connecting to power The product is an overvoltage category II pro...

Page 35: ...ing is not waterproof Do not use liquid cleaning agents Meaning of safety labels Safety labels on the product warn against potential hazards Potential hazard Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage Electrical hazard Indicates live parts Risk of electric shock fire personal injury or even death Hot surface Do not touch Risk of skin burns Risk of fire Protective con...

Page 36: ...er Manual 1178 8520 02 08 NOTICE Potential risks of damage Could result in damage to the supported product or to other property 1 3 Korea certification class A 이 기기는 업무용 A급 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 Korea certification class A ...

Page 37: ...on of all instrument modes and functions It also provides an introduction to remote control a complete description of the remote control com mands with programming examples and information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages Includes the contents of the getting started manual Firmware application manual Contains the description of the specific functions of a firmware applicatio...

Page 38: ...the technical specifications of the R S FSV A It also lists the firmware applications and their order numbers and optional accessories The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char acteristics See www rohde schwarz com brochure datasheet FSV3000 www rohde schwarz com brochure datasheet FSVA3000 2 7 Release notes and open source acknowledgment OSA The release ...

Page 39: ...plication notes application cards white papers etc These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu lar topics See www rohde schwarz com application FSV3000 www rohde schwarz com application FSVA3000 Application notes application cards white papers etc ...

Page 40: ... 5 Connecting the AC power 46 3 2 6 Switching the instrument on and off 47 3 2 7 Connecting to LAN 48 3 2 8 Connecting a keyboard 49 3 2 9 Connecting an external monitor 49 3 2 10 Windows operating system 51 3 2 11 Logging on 52 3 2 12 Checking the supplied options 54 3 2 13 Performing a self alignment 54 3 2 14 Considerations for test setup 55 3 2 15 Protecting data using the secure user mode 55 ...

Page 41: ... 2 5 GPIB interface 68 3 3 2 6 Noise source control 68 3 3 2 7 Trigger 2 3 in out 68 3 3 2 8 REF input REF output 68 3 3 2 9 IF output 69 3 3 2 10 Video output 69 3 3 2 11 Aux port 69 3 3 2 12 Aux control 69 3 3 2 13 External generator control option R S FSV3 B10 70 3 3 2 14 OCXO option R S FSV3 B4 70 3 3 2 15 Labels on R S FSV A 70 3 3 2 16 Device ID 70 3 4 Trying out the instrument 71 3 4 1 Meas...

Page 42: ... Toolbar 102 3 5 2 2 Softkeys 105 3 5 2 3 Context menus 105 3 5 2 4 On screen keyboard 106 3 5 3 Entering data 107 3 5 3 1 Entering numeric parameters 107 3 5 3 2 Entering alphanumeric parameters 108 3 5 4 Touchscreen gestures 110 3 5 5 Displaying results 113 3 5 5 1 Activating and deactivating channels 113 3 5 5 2 Laying out the result display with the smartgrid 115 Background information the sma...

Page 43: ...000 are ideal for various measurement tasks for instance Functional check and repair in service and maintenance due to the excellent usa bility Measurements on 5G NR and other wireless standards with the optional measure ment applications for cellular and WLAN standards Production of components due to the high measurement speed Analysis of wideband modulated signals short events or the linearizati...

Page 44: ... site Specific operating conditions ensure proper operation and avoid damage to the prod uct and connected devices For information on environmental conditions such as ambi ent temperature and humidity see the data sheet See also Choosing the operating site on page 34 Electromagnetic compatibility classes The electromagnetic compatibility EMC class indicates where you can operate the product The EM...

Page 45: ... in or out With folded out feet do not place any thing on top or underneath the product 3 WARNING A stack of products can fall over and cause injury Never stack more than three products on top of each other Instead mount them in a rack Stack as follows It is best if all products have the same dimensions width and length The overall load on the lowest product must not exceed 500 N With smaller prod...

Page 46: ... rack brackets fit closely to the rack 4 Tighten all screws in the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1 2 Nm to secure the R S FSV A in the rack To unmount the R S FSV A from a rack 1 Loosen the screws at the rack brackets 2 Remove the R S FSV A from the rack 3 If placing the R S FSV A on a bench top again unmount the adapter kit from the R S FSV A Follow the instructions provided with the ...

Page 47: ...n I See Chapter 3 3 2 1 AC power supply connection and main power switch on page 67 The LED of the Power key is orange See Chapter 3 3 1 1 Power key on page 58 Note If the R S FSV A was disconnected from power before it was switched off regularly it automatically switches back on when the power is reconnected Using a LAN controlled power switch you can take advantage of this behavior to switch the...

Page 48: ... device and the test device e g to run a remote control program To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using the Remote Desktop application or a similar tool To connect external network devices e g printers To transfer data from a remote computer and back e g using network folders Network environment Before connecting the product to a local area network LAN consider the follow...

Page 49: ...r 3 3 2 16 Device ID on page 70 For more information on LAN configuration see the R S FSV A user manual 3 2 8 Connecting a keyboard The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected The default input lan guage is English US However you can also connect foreign language keyboards currently the following languages are supported for the R S FSV A German Swiss French Russian To configure the...

Page 50: ...n 2 the maximum screen resolution of the monitor is used In this case you can maximize the R S FSV A application window and see even more details You cannot change the monitor s screen resolution via the standard Windows configuration dialog box However you can restore the default instrument resolution 1280x800 on the monitor using the instrument function Setup Display Configure Monitor Screen Res...

Page 51: ...l additional software on the instrument however additional software can impair instrument function Thus run only programs that Rohde Schwarz has tested for compatibility with the instrument software The following program packages have been tested R S Power Viewer Plus virtual power meter for displaying results of the power sensor R S NRPxx install only this component Symantec Endpoint Security vir...

Page 52: ...yboard The Start menu and the Windows taskbar are displayed The Windows taskbar also provides quick access to commonly used programs for example Paint or WordPad IECWIN the auxiliary remote control tool provided free of charge and installed by Rohde Schwarz is also available from the taskbar or Start menu For details on the IECWIN tool see the Network and Remote Control chapter of the R S FSV A us...

Page 53: ...nge the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time via Start Settings Account SignIn Options Password Change Auto login When shipped the instrument automatically logs on the default Instrument user to Windows 10 using the default password This function is active until an administrator explicitly deactivates it or changes the password Changing the password and use of auto login function Note t...

Page 54: ... the auto login function on page 832 3 2 12 Checking the supplied options The instrument can be equipped with both hardware and firmware options To check whether the installed options correspond to the options indicated on the delivery note proceed as follows 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the System Config softkey 3 Switch to the Versions Options tab in the System Configuration dialog box A list w...

Page 55: ...tic interference EMI Electromagnetic interference EMI can affect the measurement results To suppress electromagnetic radiation during operation Use high quality shielded cables for example double shielded RF and LAN cables Always terminate open cable ends Ensure that connected external devices comply with EMC regulations Signal input and output levels Information on signal levels is provided in th...

Page 56: ... However when the instrument s power is switched off all data in this memory is cleared Thus in secure user mode the instrument always starts in a defined fixed state when switched on To store data such as measurement results permanently it must be stored to an exter nal storage device such as a memory stick Limited storage space The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restri...

Page 57: ...words for all user accounts to improve system security Although it is possible to continue without changing the pass words it is strongly recommended that you do so You can change the password in Windows 10 for any user at any time via Start Settings Account SignIn Options Password Change To deactivate the secure user mode the SecureUser must log off and a user with administrator rights must log o...

Page 58: ...ction keys 6 Removable SSD slot 7 Navigation controls 8 Probe connector 9 Trigger 1 In Out connector 10 RF Input 50 Ω connector 11 Noise Source Power Sensor connector 12 Ext Mixer IF In connector and LO Out IF In connector require option R S FSV3 B21 not yet availa ble 13 Headphones connector AF Out and volume control requires option R S FSV3 B3 14 Keypad 3 3 1 1 Power key The power key is on the ...

Page 59: ...s e g Reference frequency external internal noise source Date time display configuration LAN interface Self alignment Firmware update and enabling of options Information about instrument configuration incl firmware version and System error messages Service support functions self test etc Print Provides print and screenshot functions File Provides data management functions such as saving and recall...

Page 60: ... application 9 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display Any user interface elements that react to a click by a mouse pointer also react to a tap on the screen and vice versa Using touchscreen gestures you can perform the fol lowing tasks among others see also Chapter 3 4 Trying out the instrument on page 71 Changing a setting Changing the display Moving a marker...

Page 61: ...reamplifier option RF Preamplifier R S FSV3 B24 Auto Set Enables automatic settings for level frequency or sweep type Mode BW Sets the resolution bandwidth and the Video bandwidth Sweep Sets the sweep time and the number of measurement points Selects continuous measurement or single measurement Trace Configures the measured data acquisition and the analysis of the mea surement data Trigger Sets th...

Page 62: ...APD and cumulative complementary distribution function CCDF Third order intercept point TOI AM modulation depth AM Mod Depth Meas Config Used to define measurement configuration Lines Configures display lines and limit lines Input Output Displays softkeys for In Out functions Measurement start functions Run Single Starts a single new measurement Single Sweep Mode Run Cont Starts a continuous measu...

Page 63: ... numeric entries increments Arrow Up or decrements Arrow Down the instrument parameter at a defined step width In a list scrolls forward and backward through the list entries In a table moves the selection bar vertically In windows or dialog boxes with a vertical scroll bar moves the scroll bar Arrow Left Arrow Right Keys The arrow left or arrow right keys do the following In an alphanumeric edit ...

Page 64: ...allowed values see the data sheet The RF input can be coupled to the DUT by alternating current AC or direct current DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default set ting to prevent damage to the instrument However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input vol tages manually For details refer to the...

Page 65: ... is provided to the AF Out connector Connect headphones equipped with a miniature jack plug to the AF Out female con nector Set the output voltage using the Volume control above the female connector See also Connecting headphones on page 35 3 3 1 14 Keypad The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters including the corresponding units see also Chapter 3 5 3 2 Entering alphanumeric parameters...

Page 66: ...etes the character to the left of the cursor Enter key Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries The new value is accepted With other entries this key can be used instead of the Hz dB unit key In a dialog box selects the default or focused element 3 3 2 Rear panel view This figure shows the rear panel view of the R S FSV A The individual elements are described in more detail in the subsequent s...

Page 67: ... switch function Position 1 The instrument can be started via the Power key on the front panel The optional OCXO reference frequency is warmed up Position O The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply For details refer to Connecting to power on page 34 and Chapter 3 2 5 Connecting the AC power on page 46 3 3 2 2 HDMI display port You can connect an external monitor or other disp...

Page 68: ...ires option R S FSV3 B28V Conventional noise sources require a voltage of 28 V to be switched on and 0 V to be switched off The output supports a maximum load of 100 mA For smart noise sources use the Lemosa Noise source control power sensor connec tor For details on noise source control see Noise Source Control on page 440 3 3 2 7 Trigger 2 3 in out The additional female BNC Trigger 2 In Out conn...

Page 69: ...utput 2 640 MHz 10 dBm To provide a 640 MHz reference signal from the R S FSV A to another device requires option R S FSV3 K703 3 3 2 9 IF output The female BNC connector can be used to output the intermediate frequency IF 3 3 2 10 Video output The female BNC connector can be used to provide video output 1 V 3 3 2 11 Aux port A 9 pole SUB D male connector used to provide low voltage TTL control si...

Page 70: ... MHz connector Warm up time for OCXO When the instrument is switched on the OCXO requires an extended warm up time see data sheet 3 3 2 15 Labels on R S FSV A Labels on the casing inform about Personal safety see Meaning of safety labels on page 35 Product and environment safety see Table 3 5 Identification of the product see Chapter 3 3 2 16 Device ID on page 70 Table 3 5 Labels regarding R S FSV...

Page 71: ...Chapter 3 2 Preparing for use on page 43 For these first measurements you use the internal calibration signal so you do not need any additional signal source or instruments Try out the following Measuring a basic signal 71 Displaying a spectrogram 73 Activating additional measurement channels 75 Performing sequential measurements 80 Setting and moving a marker 81 Displaying a marker peak list 83 Z...

Page 72: ... instrument requires an initial warmup time after switching it on A mes sage in the status bar Instrument warming up indicates that the operating temper ature has not yet been reached Wait until this message is no longer displayed before you start a measurement To optimize the display To optimize the display for the calibration signal we will adjust the main measurement settings 1 Set the center f...

Page 73: ...ersus frequency spectrum display the R S FSV A also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequen cies 1 Tap ...

Page 74: ...e display to add an additional window instead Figure 3 6 Adding a Spectrogram to the display Drop the icon 4 Close the SmartGrid mode by tapping the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar You see the spectrogram compared to the standard spectrum display Since the calibration signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e vertically The l...

Page 75: ...igurations in parallel and then switch between the channels auto matically to perform the measurements sequentially We will demonstrate this feature by activating additional measurement channels for a different frequency range a zero span measurement and an I Q analysis To activate additional measurement channels 1 Press the Mode key on the front panel 2 On the New Channel tab of the Signal Spectr...

Page 76: ... 76 User Manual 1178 8520 02 08 Figure 3 8 Adding a new measurement channel 3 Change the frequency range for this spectrum display In the Frequency dialog box set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span to 1 GHz Trying out the instrument ...

Page 77: ...rger span 4 Repeat the previous steps to activate a third Spectrum window Change the frequency range for this spectrum display In the Frequency dialog box set the center frequency to 64 MHz and tap Zero Span As the calibration signal does not vary over time the level versus time diagram dis plays a straight line Trying out the instrument ...

Page 78: ...0 Time domain display of the calibration signal 5 Create a new channel for I Q analysis a Press the Mode key b Tap the IQ Analyzer button to activate a channel for the I Q Analyzer applica tion c Tap the Display Config softkey to activate the SmartGrid mode Trying out the instrument ...

Page 79: ...Inserting a Real Imag diagram for I Q analysis e Close the SmartGrid mode The IQ Analyzer channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active channels is provided in the MultiView tab This tab is always displayed and cannot be closed Tap the MultiView tab Trying out the instrument ...

Page 80: ...e the measurements configured in the active channels can be performed sequentially that means one after the other automatically either once or continuously 1 Tap the Sequencer icon in the toolbar 2 Toggle the Sequencer softkey in the Sequencer menu to On A continuous sequence is started i e each channel measurement is performed one after the other until the Sequencer is stopped Trying out the inst...

Page 81: ...common use is to determine a peak which is the default setting when you activate a marker We will set a marker on the peak in our first Spectrum measurement 1 In the MultiView tab double tap the Spectrum window frequency sweep with spectrogram display to return to the Spectrum channel 2 Tap the spectrum display to set the focus on that window 3 Press the Split Maximize key on the front panel to ma...

Page 82: ...ed and automatically set to the maximum of trace 1 The marker position and value is indicated in the diagram area as M1 1 6 Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram Trying out the instrument ...

Page 83: ...p for which we will determine the peaks 3 Tap the SmartGrid icon in the toolbar to activate SmartGrid mode 4 Drag the Marker Peak List icon from the evaluation bar to the lower half of the display to add a new window for the peak list 5 Close the SmartGrid mode 6 To obtain a more conclusive peak list that does not contain noise peaks for exam ple define a threshold that is higher than the noise fl...

Page 84: ...he defined threshold Figure 3 14 Marker Peak List 3 4 7 Zooming into the display To analyze the areas around the peak levels in more detail we will zoom into the top 3 peaks 1 Tap the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar The icon is highlighted orange to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active 2 Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area A whit...

Page 85: ... due to the insufficient number of sweep points The missing sweep points for the zoomed display are interpolated which provides poor results To optimize the results we will increase the number of sweep points from the default 1001 to 32001 a Press the Sweep key on the front panel b Tap the Sweep Config softkey in the Sweep menu c In the Sweep Points field enter 32001 d Press the RUN SINGLE key on ...

Page 86: ...cise 4 Tap the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around markers M4 M5 and M6 Figure 3 18 Multiple zoom windows 5 Tap the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around marker M8 6 To increase the size of the third zoom window drag the splitter between the win dows to the left or right or up or down Trying out the instrument ...

Page 87: ...from Chapter 3 4 7 Zooming into the display on page 84 were only graphical changes to the display Now we would like to change the measurement settings such that the zoomed result is maintained permanently We will demonstrate this in the Spectrum channel 1 Tap the Spectrum tab 2 Select Marker A peak marker M1 is inserted at the detected peak Trying out the instrument ...

Page 88: ...y 4 Place two fingers on the diagram to the left and right of the marker and stretch them apart The area around the marker is enlarged in the result display 5 When the area has the size you require remove your fingers from the display The displayed span and the number of displayed sweep points is smaller than before all other measurement settings remain unchanged Trying out the instrument ...

Page 89: ...ct Adapt Measurement to Zoom selected diagram The span of the measurement is changed and due to the automatic coupling of the span to the sweep time RBW and VBW those values are also changed The num ber of sweep points is restored to the default 1001 The range of the trace is the same as in the graphical zoom However due to the smaller RBW filter the peak is narrower Trying out the instrument ...

Page 90: ...ment settings to a file 1 Tap the Save icon in the toolbar 2 Press the keyboard key on the front panel to display the online keyboard as you will have to enter text in the next step 3 In the Save dialog box tap the File Name field and enter MyMultiViewSetup using the keyboard Keep the default File Type setting Instrument with all Channels to store the con figuration of all channels Trying out the ...

Page 91: ...To load stored instrument settings You can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file 1 Press the PRESET button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards 2 Tap the Load icon in the toolbar 3 In the Load dialog box select the MyMultiViewSetup dfl file in the default directory C R_S instr...

Page 92: ... To export the trace data 1 Press the TRACE key on the front panel 2 Tap the Trace Config softkey 3 Tap the Trace Export tab 4 Tap the Export Trace to ASCII File button 5 Enter the file name MyMultiViewResults The trace data is stored to MyMultiViewResults DAT To create a screenshot of the display 1 Tap the Print immediately icon in the toolbar A screenshot of the current display is created Note t...

Page 93: ...erate and control it from a remote PC Various methods for remote control are supported Connecting the instrument to a LAN network Using the web browser interface in a LAN network Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in the R S FSV A user manual Understanding the display infor...

Page 94: ... marker information 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement application 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display Hiding elements in the display You can hide some of the elements in the display for example the status bar or chan nel bar to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Setup Display Displayed Items For ...

Page 95: ...at a glance In the MultiView tab each individual window contains its own channel bar with an additional button Tap this button or double tap in any window to switch to the corresponding channel display quickly Icons in the channel bar The yellow star icon on the tab label sometimes referred to as a dirty flag indi cates that invalid or inconsistent data is displayed that is the trace no longer mat...

Page 96: ...r of the bullet turns red if the sweep time is set below the value for automatic coupling In addition the UNCAL flag is shown In this case the sweep time must be increased For FFT sweeps an estimated duration for data capture and processing is indicated behind the sweep time in the channel bar Meas Time AQT Measurement acquisition time calculated from analysis bandwidth and number of samples for s...

Page 97: ...pes of information are displayed if applicable Table 3 7 Common settings displayed in the channel bar SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode Sweep Count The current signal count for measurement tasks that involve a specific number of subse quent sweeps see Sweep Count setting in Sweep settings in the User Manual TRG Trigger source for details see Trigger settings in the User Manual EXT External...

Page 98: ...ith their default name If that name already exists a sequential number is added You can change the name of the measurement channel by double tapping the name in the channel bar and entering a new name For an overview of default names see INSTrument LIST on page 852 Note Channel name restrictions Channel names can have a maximum of 31 charac ters and must be compatible with the Windows conventions ...

Page 99: ... enabled See Smoothing on page 588 Norm NCor Correction data is not used 3 5 1 3 Marker information Marker information is provided either in the diagram grid or in a separate marker table depending on the configuration Marker information in diagram grid Within the diagram grid the x axis and y axis positions of the last two markers or delta markers that were set are displayed if available as well ...

Page 100: ...ated with the following abbreviations FXD Fixed reference marker PHNoise Phase noise measurement CNT Signal count TRK Signal tracking NOIse Noise measurement MDepth AM modulation depth TOI Third order intercept measurement 3 5 1 4 Frequency and span information in diagram footer The information in the diagram footer beneath the diagram depends on the current application measurement and result disp...

Page 101: ...d measurement The following information is displayed Instrument status The instrument is configured for operation with an external reference Progress The progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar In the MultiView tab the progress bar indicates the status of the currently selected measurement not the measurement a Sequencer is currently performing for example Date and time Th...

Page 102: ...played as the status bar in the MultiView tab always displays the information for the currently selected channel only For a description of possible errors see the R S FSV A user manual 3 5 2 Accessing the functionality All tasks necessary to operate the instrument can be performed using this user inter face Apart from instrument specific keys all other keys that correspond to an external keyboard ...

Page 103: ...rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area the selected diagram is replaced by a new diagram with adapted measurement settings which dis plays the selected extract of the trace Also provides a context menu to determine the firmware behavior for touch gestures Level Lock Default The reference level and thus the attenuation remains unchanged during touch gestures on the sc...

Page 104: ...d activates SmartGrid mode to configure the screen layout Sequencer opens the Sequencer menu to perform consecutive measurements SCPI Recorder opens a dialog to record SCPI commands during operation Event based actions manager opens a dialog to configure actions based on specific events For details see Chapter 7 7 Event based actions on page 621 Application starter opens a dialog to start an exter...

Page 105: ...lor Meaning Orange Associated dialog box is open Blue Associated function is active for toggle keys currently active state Gray Instrument function is temporarily not available due to a specific setting or missing option You can hide the softkey display e g when using remote control to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Setup Display Displayed Items See the User Manual for detail...

Page 106: ...ications the context menu contains functions for the selected item These functions correspond to the functions also provided for the item in softkey menus This is useful for example when the softkey display is hidden Figure 3 23 Context menu for channel bar setting 3 5 2 4 On screen keyboard The on screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument with out having to connect...

Page 107: ... rotary knob acts like the ENTER key when it is pressed Using a connected external keyboard Transparent dialog boxes You can change the transparency of the dialog boxes to see the results in the windows behind the dialog box Thus you can see the effects that the changes you make to the settings have on the results immediately To change the transparency select the transparency icon at the top of th...

Page 108: ...nded data entry mode 2 Use the left and right arrow keys to scroll through the individual digits of the indica ted value 3 Change the required digit using the up and down arrow keys or the rotary knob to scroll through the values 0 to 9 The new value is applied immediately without further confirmation Note If you enter a digit using the keypad the entire value is overwritten as in nor mal data ent...

Page 109: ...ue provided by this key press the key again until your desired value is displayed 4 With every key stroke the next possible value of this key is displayed If all possi ble values have been displayed the series starts with the first value again For information on the series refer to Table 3 12 5 To change from capital to small letters and vice versa press the sign key 6 When you have chosen the des...

Page 110: ...ou to interact with the software using various finger gestures on the screen The basic gestures supported by the software and most applications are described here Further actions using the same gestures may be possible Tapping Touch the screen quickly usually on a specific element You can tap most elements on the screen in particular any elements you can also click on with a mouse pointer Figure 3...

Page 111: ...o fingers Move two fingers together on the display pinch or move two fingers apart on the dis play spread When you pinch two fingers in the display you decrease the size of the currently dis played area showing the surrounding areas previously out of view When you spread two fingers in the display you increase the size of the currently dis played area showing more details You can pinch or spread y...

Page 112: ... scaling or the min and max power val ues for relative scaling Dragging horizontally in a time domain display changes the trigger offset value if available not in free run Spreading or pinching a spectrum display changes the center frequency and span horizontal or reference level and range vertical or a combination of these set tings diagonal Spreading or pinching a time domain display changes the...

Page 113: ...al mouse operation by clicking in the table s scrollbar repeatedly In touch operation you would scroll through the table by dragging the table up and down with your finger 3 5 5 Displaying results The R S FSV A provides several instrument applications for different analysis tasks and different types of signals e g 3G FDD I Q analysis or basic spectrum analysis For each application a new measuremen...

Page 114: ...the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided To start a new channel 1 Select the Mode key 2 In the Mode dialog box select the required application on the New Channel tab A new tab is displayed for the new channel Remote command INSTrument CREate NEW on page 851 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate on page 850 To change the application in an active channel 1 Select the tab of ...

Page 115: ...ng basic features Windows can be arranged in columns or in rows or in a combination of both Windows can be arranged in up to four rows and four columns Windows are moved simply by dragging them to a new position on the screen pos sibly changing the layout of the other windows as well All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis played as icons in the evaluation b...

Page 116: ...n were dropped at the current position The frames indicate the possible destinations of the new window with respect to the existing windows above below right left or replacement as illustrated in Figure 3 29 If an existing win dow would be replaced the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade Positioning the window The screen can be divided into up to four rows Each row can be split into u...

Page 117: ...splay configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode In SmartGrid mode the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display When the Smart Grid mode is deactivated again the previous softkey menu display is restored To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar Select the Display Config button in the configuration Overview Select t...

Page 118: ...rrange the result windows on page 118 for more information on positioning the window Remote command LAYout ADD WINDow on page 1026 LAYout WINDow n ADD on page 1031 How to close a result window To close a window activate SmartGrid mode and select the Delete icon for the window Remote command LAYout REMove WINDow on page 1028 LAYout WINDow n REMove on page 1032 How to arrange the result windows 1 Se...

Page 119: ...ge the size of neighboring win dows The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode To change the size of two neighboring windows drag the splitter between the win dows in either direction 3 5 5 4 Switching between a split and maximized window display To get an overview of the results displaying several windows at the same time may be helpful However the individual windows may become rather smal...

Page 120: ...ging the display update rate Activating or deactivating the touch sensitivity of the screen Zooming into the diagram 3 5 6 Getting help If any questions or problems concerning the R S FSV A arise an extensive online help system is provided on the instrument and can be consulted at any time The help system is context sensitive and provides information specifically for the current opera tion or sett...

Page 121: ...xt sensitive help is available to display a help topic for a screen element not currently focused 1 Select the Help pointer icon on the toolbar The pointer changes its shape to a and an arrow 2 Select the screen element to change the focus A topic containing information about the selected now focused screen element is displayed Operating the instrument ...

Page 122: ... same application can be activated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same applica tion Each channel is displayed in a separate tab on the screen The maximum number of measurement channels may be limited by the available memory on the instrument 4 1 Available applications Access MODE Spectrogram application Spectrogram measurements are not a separate applicati...

Page 123: ...equires an instrument equipped with the 3GPP User Equipment Measurements option R S FSV3 K73 This application provides test mea surements for W CDMA uplink signals mobile signals according to the test specifica tion For details see the R S FSV3 K72 K73 User Manual Remote command INST SEL MWCD see INSTrument SELect on page 853 5G NR The 5G NR application requires an instrument equipped with one of ...

Page 124: ... and display functions for I Q data For details see the R S FSV3 I Q Analyzer User Manual Remote command INST SEL IQ see INSTrument SELect on page 853 LTE The LTE application requires an instrument equipped with one of the LTE Measure ments options R S FSV3 K10x These applications provide LTE measurements For details see the user manuals for the LTE downlink and uplink measurement appli cation Rem...

Page 125: ... The Transient Analysis application requires an instrument equipped with the Transient Analysis option R S FSV3 K60 This application provides measurements and evalua tions for Transient Analysis For details see the R S FSV3 K60 User Manual Remote command INST SEL TA see INSTrument SELect on page 853 Vector Signal Analysis VSA The VSA application requires an instrument equipped with the Vector Sign...

Page 126: ...nal tab MultiView provides an overview of all currently active channels at a glance In the MultiView tab each individual window contains its own channel bar with an additional button Select this button to switch to the corresponding channel display quickly Remote command DISPlay FORMat on page 1025 4 3 Selecting the applications Access MODE Selecting the applications ...

Page 127: ...ication until a license is returned Per option you only require a single license for any number of channels For more information see Chapter 10 8 2 Licensing versions and options on page 740 Switching between applications When you switch to a new application a set of parameters is passed on from the cur rent application to the new one center frequency and frequency offset reference level and refer...

Page 128: ...ected on this tab are started in a new measurement channel i e a new tab in the display Remote command INSTrument CREate NEW on page 851 INSTrument SELect on page 853 Replace Current Channel Selecting an application The applications selected on this tab are started in the currently displayed measure ment channel replacing the current application Remote command INSTrument CREate REPLace on page 851...

Page 129: ... s are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs For each individual measurement the sweep count is considered Thus each mea surement may consist of several sweeps The currently active measurement is indica ted by a symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as the measure ments are performed Sequential operation itself is independen...

Page 130: ...yzer For Continuous Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer For Channel defined Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer 5x Spectrum 2 x Spectrum 3 5x Spectrum 2 x Spectrum 3 Run Single Run Cont and Single Sweep Sweep...

Page 131: ...EQuencer on page 856 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 855 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 854 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue During an active Sequencer process the selected mode softkey is highlighted orange Single Sequence Each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active channels...

Page 132: ...g mode softkey or press the Run Single or Run Cont key The measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped The result displays in the individual channels are updated as the measurements are performed To stop the sequencer To stop the Sequencer temporarily press the highlighted Run Single or Run Cont ...

Page 133: ...tion menu is dis played The measurement configuration menu can be displayed at any time by press ing the MEAS CONFIG key The easiest way to configure measurements is using the configuration Overview see Chapter 6 1 Configuration overview on page 350 In addition to the measurement specific parameters the general parameters can be configured as usual see Chapter 6 Common measurement settings on page...

Page 134: ... confirm the selection the settings are configured in compliance with the standard automatically The progress of the auto measurement is indicated in a message box Supported measurements Auto measurements are available for the following measurement types Frequency Sweep Zero Span Occupied bandwidth measurement OBW Channel power and adjacent channel power ACLR measurement Spectrum emission mask SEM...

Page 135: ...of the basic input signal characteristics If no other measurement function is selected or if all measurement functions are switched off the R S FSV A performs a basic frequency or time sweep After a preset a frequency sweep is performed Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurement e g via the Overview see Chapter 6 Common measurement settings on page 350 5 2 1 Basic measuremen...

Page 136: ... functions e g markers may work slightly differently and some may not be available If so this will be indicated in the function descriptions see Chapter 7 Common analysis and display functions on page 502 Note Auto measurement Use the Auto All function to determine the required mea surement parameters automatically The following settings are determined Center frequency RBW determined signal bandwi...

Page 137: ... 5 Define how the results are evaluated for display Trace dialog box see Chap ter 7 5 1 2 Trace settings on page 586 6 If necessary configure the vertical axis of the display Amplitude dialog box see Chapter 6 4 Amplitude and vertical axis configuration on page 453 7 To start the measurement select one of the following RUN SINGLE key Single Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu The defined number of swe...

Page 138: ...higher than 30 dBm 1 W insert a power attenuator before the RF input of the analyzer 3 Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R S FSV A Measuring the level and frequency using markers 138 Measuring the signal frequency using the signal counter 140 5 2 3 1 Measuring the level and frequency using markers The level and frequency of a sinusoidal signal can be measured eas...

Page 139: ...kHz The resolution of the trace is now approximately 10 Hz 10 kHz span 1001 trace points thus the precision of the marker frequency display increases to approxi mately 5 Hz Setting the reference level The reference level is the level at the upper limit of the diagram To achieve the widest dynamic range possible for a spectrum measurement use the entire level span of the R S FSV A In other words th...

Page 140: ...unt marker on page 533 In the following example the frequency of the generator at 128 MHz is shown using the marker Prerequisite Precise frequency measurements require a precise reference frequency Therefore an external reference frequency from the signal generator is used Connect the signal generator s Ref OUT connector to the analyzer s Ref IN connector 1 Select PRESET to reset the instrument 2 ...

Page 141: ...se of the R S FSV A The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure the selected RF attenuation the selected reference level the selected resolution and video band width and the detector For details see Chapter 6 4 1 2 RF attenuation on page 454 Chapter 6 4 1 1 Reference level on page 453 Chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating signals by selecting an appropriate resolution band widt...

Page 142: ... the Traces configuration dialog set the Trace Mode to Average see Trace Mode on page 587 The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged To perform averaging the R S FSV A automatically switches on the sample detector The RF signal there fore can be more clearly distinguished from noise Figure 5 2 RF sine wave signal with low S N ratio with an averaged trace Basic measurements ...

Page 143: ...arly Figure 5 3 RF sine wave signal with low S N ratio with a smaller video bandwidth 7 By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10 the noise is reduced by 10 dB Set the RBW to 100 kHz The displayed noise is reduced by approximately 10 dB The signal therefore emerges from noise by about 10 dB Compared to the previous setting the video bandwidth has remained the same i e it has increased...

Page 144: ...d is determined by the resolution bandwidth Selecting a resolu tion bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components i e they are displayed as a single component see also Chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating signals by selecting an appropriate resolution bandwidth on page 464 Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is small...

Page 145: ... 128 015 MHz 3 Set the frequency span to 300 kHz 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz Note Larger video bandwidths The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz in order to make the level drop in the center of the two signals clearly visible At larger video bandwidths the video voltage that results from envelope detection is not suffi ciently suppressed This produces add...

Page 146: ...gnals Matching generator and R S FSV A frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator frequencies match the frequency display of the R S FSV A exactly To achieve exact matching the frequencies of the generators and the R S FSV A must be synchronized 5 Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz It is no longer possible to clearly distinguish the two ge...

Page 147: ...tion bandwidth to 1 kHz The two generator signals are shown with high resolution However the sweep time becomes longer At smaller bandwidths the noise display decreases simulta neously 10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of 10 Figure 5 8 Measurement of two equally leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band width 1 kHz which is significantly smaller than ...

Page 148: ...ement routines that output the mod ulation depth numerically in percent directly Figure 5 9 Test setup Table 5 3 Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 128 MHz Level 30 dBm Modulation 50 AM 10 kHz AF 1 Select PRESET to reset the instrument 2 Set the center frequency to 128 MHz 3 Set the frequency span to 50 kHz 4 Select MEAS AM Modulation Depth to activate the modulation depth mea suremen...

Page 149: ... FSV A rectifies the RF input signal that is removes the negative parts and displays it as a magnitude spectrum The rectification also demodulates AM modulated signals The AF voltage can be displayed in zero span if the modulation sidebands fall within the resolution bandwidth Displaying the AF of an AM modulated signal Zero Span Figure 5 11 Test setup Table 5 4 Signal generator settings e g R S S...

Page 150: ...o Volt AMPT Amplitude Config Unit V 8 Define triggering in response to the AF signal using the video trigger to produce a static image a Press the TRIG key b Select Video c Set the Trg Gate Level to 50 The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the entire measurement diagram The R S FSV A displays the 1 kHz AF signal as a static image in zero span Figure 5 12 Measurement of the AF ...

Page 151: ...se as well as the timing and duration of the TDMA burst and rise and fall times of the burst are important Measuring the power characteristic of burst signals 151 Measuring the signal to noise ratio of burst signals 155 5 2 6 1 Measuring the power characteristic of burst signals To measure power in zero span the R S FSV A offers easy to use functions that mea sure the power over a predefined time ...

Page 152: ...h the absolute level for the trigger threshold in the measurement diagram 9 Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span a Press the MEAS key b Select Time Domain Power c Select Time Dom Power Config d Set the Limits state to On e Select the Left Limit input field f By turning the rotary knob clockwise move the vertical line S1 to the start of the burst g Select...

Page 153: ... Table 5 6 Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 890 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM one timeslot activated The measurement is based on the example Measuring the power of a GSM burst dur ing the activation phase on page 151 1 Switch off the power measurement a Press the MEAS key b Select Zero Span 2 Increase the time resolution by setting the sweep time to 100 µs SWEEP Sweep Time Manual 3...

Page 154: ...50 µs The R S FSV A displays the rising edge of the GSM burst Figure 5 16 Rising edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution 4 Move the falling edge of the burst to the center of the display To do so switch the trigger Slope to Falling TRIG Trigger Gate Config The R S FSV A displays the falling edge of the GSM burst Figure 5 17 Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time r...

Page 155: ...reset the instrument 2 Set the center frequency to 890 MHz 3 Set the frequency span to 0 Hz 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz 5 Set the reference level to 0 dBm level of the signal generator 6 Set the sweep time to 2 ms SWEEP Sweep Time Manual The R S FSV A shows the GSM burst continuously across the display 7 Use the trigger source Video and the trigger slope Rising to trigger on the rising...

Page 156: ... measured in the deactivation phase Figure 5 19 Measurement of the signal to noise ratio of a GSM burst signal in zero span 10 Note down the power result for the measured noise indicated by the TD Pow RMS result in the marker table Subtract the measured noise power from the burst power to obtain the signal to noise ratio of the burst signal 5 3 Channel power and adjacent channel power ACLR measure...

Page 157: ...ternal power measurement rou tines in a signal analyzer normally use these correction factors to determine the signal power from IF envelope measurements These factors apply if and only if the assump tion of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct Apart from this common method the R S FSV A also has a true power detector i e an RMS detector It displays the power of the test signal within the ...

Page 158: ...ned you must specify the channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values refer By default it is the TX channel with the maximum power Table 5 8 Measurements performed depending on the number of adjacent channels Number of adj chan Measurement results 0 Channel powers 1 Channel powers Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel 2 Channel powers Power of the upper and lower adjacent ch...

Page 159: ...ge 180 Offset Offset of the channel to the TX channel configured channel spacing see Channel Bandwidth on page 180 Power Lower Upper The measured power values for the TX and lower and upper adjacent channels The powers of the transmission channels are output in dBm or dBm Hz or in dBc relative to the specified reference TX channel Retrieving Results via Remote Control All or specific channel power...

Page 160: ...with sev eral carrier channels also known as transmission or TX channels is also possible and is referred to as a multicarrier ACLR measurement There are two possible methods for measuring channel and adjacent channel power with a signal analyzer IBW method Integration BandWidth method Fast ACLR Zero span method i e using a channel filter IBW method When measuring the channel power the R S FSV A i...

Page 161: ...channel power or ACLR calculation To decrease the measurement times the R S FSV A offers a Fast ACLR mode In Fast ACLR mode the power of the frequency range between the channels of interest is not measured because it is not required for channel power or ACLR calculation The measurement time per channel is set with the sweep time It is equal to the selected measurement time divided by the selected ...

Page 162: ...els and a sweep time of 100 ms This measurement requires a measure ment time per channel of 20 ms To calculate the power in one channel the analyzer considers the following number of effective samples sweep time in channel selected resolution bandwidth For example for a sweep time of 100 ms the analyzer considers 30 kHz 4 19 MHz 100 ms 10 kHz 7 samples Whereas in Fast ACLR mode it considers 100 ms...

Page 163: ...nts in the adjacent channels as a function of sweep time The standard deviation of measurement results is calculated from 100 consecutive measurements Consider the scaling when you compare power values Figure 5 23 Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on CDMA2000 signals in the fast ACLR mode 5 3 3 3 Recommended common measurement parameters The following sections provide recommenda...

Page 164: ...ciprocal of the measured bandwidth The number of A D converter values N used to calculate the power is defined by the Sweep Time The time per trace pixel for power measurements is directly propor tional to the selected Sweep Time If the sample detector is used it is best to select the smallest Sweep Time possible for a given span and resolution bandwidth The minimum time is obtained if the setting...

Page 165: ...ing 2 x transmission channel bandwidth measurement margin For adjacent channel power measurements the Adjust Settings function sets the fre quency span as a function of the following parameters Number of transmission channels Transmission channel spacing Adjacent channel spacing Bandwidth of one of adjacent channels ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmission channels No of t...

Page 166: ... trace average mode Power to ensure correct power measurements see Average Mode on page 589 Note that in power measurements this setting affects the VBW regard less of whether or not a trace is actually averaged The video bandwidth for the defined channel settings can be optimized Use the Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box see Opt...

Page 167: ... box see Average Mode on page 589 Reference level To achieve an optimum dynamic range set the reference level so that the signal is as close to the reference level as possible without forcing an overload message However if the signal to noise ratio becomes too small the dynamic range is also limited The measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly smaller than the signal b...

Page 168: ...can now also be asymmetrical that is channels in the lower and upper gaps are not identical For example in Figure 5 25 the gap between sub blocks A and B contains one lower channel AB Gap1L but two upper channels AB Gap1U AB Gap2U Furthermore the gaps between different sub blocks need not be identical For example the gap between sub blocks A and B contains 3 gap channels while the gap between sub ...

Page 169: ... assigned a different technology used to prede fine the required bandwidth Gap channels and CACLR If two or more sub blocks are defined the power in the gaps between the sub blocks must also be measured Gap channels are defined using bandwidths and spacings relative to the outer edges of the surrounding sub blocks If the upper and lower gap channels are symmetrical only two gap channels must be co...

Page 170: ...elation to the power of the two closest transmission channels to either side of the gap The CACLR power for the gap channels is indicated in the Result Summary In addition the ACLR power for the individual gap channels is indicated in the Result Summary The ACLR power of the lower gap channels refers to the TX channel to the left of the gap The ACLR power of the upper gap channels refers to the TX...

Page 171: ...st Tx channel in sub block B that uses the LTE 5 MHz bandwidth technology Adjacent and alternate channels are displayed as in common ACLR measurements Gap channels are indicated using the following syntax The names of the surrounding sub blocks e g AB for the gap between sub blocks A and B The channel name Gap1 or Gap2 L for lower or U for upper For example ABGap1L indicates the first lower gap ch...

Page 172: ...y for asymmetrical channel definition Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer sb RESult GACLr or CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer sb RESult MACM see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 862 Restrictions and dependencies As the signal structure in multi standard radio signals can vary considerably you can define the channels very flexibly for the ACLR measurement with the R S...

Page 173: ...Config Both Channel Power CP and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR measurements are available If the Multi Standard Radio standard is selected see Standard on page 174 the ACLR Setup dialog box is replaced by the MSR ACLR Setup dialog box See Chap ter 5 3 5 MSR ACLR configuration on page 182 for a description of these settings Channel power and adjacent channel power ACLR measurement ...

Page 174: ...eneral CP ACLR measurement settings General measurement settings are defined in the ACLR Setup dialog in the General Settings tab Standard 174 Predefined Standards 175 User Standards 175 Number of channels Tx Adj 176 Reference Channel 176 Noise Cancellation 176 Fast ACLR 177 Selected Trace 177 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode 177 Channel power level and density Power Unit 177 Power Mode 178 ...

Page 175: ...S FSV A User standards created on an R S FSV A however are not necessa rily compatible to the analyzers of the R S FSP family and may not work there The following parameter definitions are saved in a user defined standard Number of adjacent channels Channel bandwidth of transmission Tx adjacent Adj and alternate Alt chan nels Channel spacings Weighting filters Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth ...

Page 176: ...CPairs on page 869 Reference Channel The measured power values in the adjacent channels can be displayed relative to the transmission channel If more than one Tx channel is defined define which one is used as a reference channel Tx Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel Max Power Tx Chan nel The tr...

Page 177: ...t time sweep time number of channels Remote command SENSe POWer HSPeed on page 882 Selected Trace The CP ACLR measurement can be performed on any active trace Remote command SENSe POWer TRACe on page 866 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode The powers of the adjacent channels are output in dBm or dBm Hz absolute values or in dBc relative to the specified reference Tx channel Abs The absolute pow...

Page 178: ...adjacent channels are defined the currently measured channel power can be used as a fixed reference value for subsequent channel power measurements When you select this button the channel power currently measured on the Tx channel is stored as a fixed reference power In the following channel power measurements the power is indicated relative to the fixed reference power The reference value is dis ...

Page 179: ...ll the channel settings to configure the channel power or ACLR measurement You can define the channel settings for all channels independent of the defined number of used Tx or adjacent channels see Number of channels Tx Adj on page 176 For details on setting up channels see Chapter 5 3 6 2 How to set up the channels on page 200 In addition to the specific channel settings the general settings Stan...

Page 180: ...T channels Thus only enter one value if all adjacent channels have the same bandwidth Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch on page 869 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth ACHannel on page 869 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth ALTernate ch on page 869 Channel Spacings Channel spacings are normally defined by the transmission standard but can be changed If the spacings are not equal the ...

Page 181: ... ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch on page 871 Limit Check During an ACLR measurement the power values can be checked whether they exceed user defined or standard defined limits A relative or absolute limit can be defined or both Both limit types are considered regardless whether the measured lev els are absolute or relative values The check of both limit values can be activated independently If any a...

Page 182: ...ate ch on page 872 Channel Names In the R S FSV A s display carrier channels are labeled Tx by default the first neigh boring channel is labeled Adj adjacent channel all others are labeled Alt alter nate channels You can define user specific channel names for each channel which are displayed in the result diagram and result table Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel on page 870 SENSe ...

Page 183: ... 3 5 1 General MSR ACLR measurement settings Access Overview Select Measurement Channel Power ACLR CP ACLR Standard Standard Multi Standard Radio CP ACLR Config MSR General Settings tab Standard 184 Predefined Standards 184 User Standards 184 Number of Sub Blocks 185 Reference Channel 185 Noise Cancellation 185 Selected Trace 186 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode 186 Channel power level and d...

Page 184: ...ds see Chapter 5 3 9 Reference predefined CP ACLR standards on page 211 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 867 User Standards Standard Access CP ACLR Config General Settings tab Manage User Standards Note User standards created on an analyzer of the R S FSP family are compatible to the R S FSV A User standards created on an R S FSV A however are not necessa rily c...

Page 185: ...hannel is defined define which one is used as a reference channel Tx Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel Max Power Tx Chan nel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel Default Lowest Highest Channel The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference c...

Page 186: ...lues or in dBc relative to the specified reference Tx channel Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dBµV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 916 Channel power level and density Power Unit By default the channel power i...

Page 187: ...tings Frequency span on page 165 Resolution bandwidth RBW on page 165 Video bandwidth VBW on page 166 Detector on page 166 trace averaging on page 167 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 865 Symmetrical Adjacent Setup If enabled the upper and lower adjacent and alternate channels are defined symmetri cally This is the default behavior If disabled the upper and lower channels can be ...

Page 188: ...s see Chapter 5 3 3 4 Measurement on multi standard radio MSR signals on page 167 For details on setting up channels see Chapter 5 3 6 3 How to configure an MSR ACLR measurement on page 201 The Tx channel settings for the individual sub blocks are configured in individual sub tabs of the Tx Channel Settings tab Sub Block Definition 189 Sub Block Center Freq 189 RF Bandwidth 189 Number of Tx Channe...

Page 189: ...m is 18 Tx channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb TXCHannel COUNt on page 887 Tx Channel Definition As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions the Tx channels are defined at absolute frequencies rather than by a spacing relative to the common center fre quency Each transmit channel can be assigned a different technology used to prede fine the required bandwidth The Tx channel se...

Page 190: ... defined independently of the others automatic bandwidth configu ration for subsequent channels as in common ACLR measurements is not performed The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb BANDwidth CHANnel ch on page 884 Weighting Filters Tx Channel Definition Weighting filters allow you to determine the influence of ind...

Page 191: ...asurement on page 201 Number of Adjacent Channels Adj Count 191 Adjacent Channel Definition 192 Adjacent Channel Spacings 192 Adjacent Channel Bandwidths 192 Weighting Filters 192 Limit Checking 193 Number of Adjacent Channels Adj Count Defines the number of adjacent channels above and below the Tx channel block in an MSR signal You must define the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent ch...

Page 192: ...n the first sub block The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last Tx channel in the last sub block For details see Chapter 5 3 6 3 How to configure an MSR ACLR measurement on page 201 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 870 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch on page 871 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing UACHannel on page 887 SENSe POWer ACHann...

Page 193: ...nd marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table Note that in addition to activating limit checking for individual channels limit checking must also be activated globally for the MSR ACLR measurement see Limit Checking on page 187 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe on page 881 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe on page 876 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel...

Page 194: ...ion Figure 5 32 Asymmetrical manual gap channel configuration For details on MSR signals see Chapter 5 3 3 4 Measurement on multi standard radio MSR signals on page 167 For details on setting up channels see Chapter 5 3 6 3 How to configure an MSR ACLR measurement on page 201 Channel power and adjacent channel power ACLR measurement ...

Page 195: ...each gap If enabled the configured gap channels are always evaluated regardless of the gap size Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel GAP gap MODE on page 891 Gap Channel Definition Between two sub blocks in an MSR signal two gaps are defined a lower gap and an upper gap Each gap in turn can contain two channels the gap channels By default Auto gap mode see Gap Mode on page 195 the channels in the u...

Page 196: ... Definition Defines which gap channels are active in the specified gap for asymmetrical manual configuration of gap channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel GCHannel STATe GAP gap MANual LOWer on page 908 SENSe POWer ACHannel GCHannel STATe GAP gap MANual UPPer on page 909 Gap Channel Spacing Gap Channel Definition Gap channel spacings are normally predefined by the MSR standard but can be cha...

Page 197: ...t bandwidth is set automatically for the selected technology The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display if the gap is not too narrow see Channel display for MSR signals on page 171 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP gap AUTO on page 895 For manual asymmetrical configuration SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP gap MANual LOWer on page 905 SENSe POWer A...

Page 198: ... the measured levels are absolute or relative values The check of both limit values can be activated independently Furthermore relative limits can be defined and activated individually for ACLR or CACLR power levels If any active limit value is exceeded the measured value is displayed in red and marked by a preceding asterisk in the result table Note that in addition to activating limit checking f...

Page 199: ...e POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate ch on page 870 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME UACHannel on page 911 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME UALTernate ch on page 911 5 3 6 How to perform channel power measurements The following step by step instructions demonstrate the most common tasks when per forming channel power measurements For remote operation see Chapter 12 5 3 10 Programming examples for channel power measu...

Page 200: ...defined con figuration see To load a user defined configuration on page 203 5 3 6 2 How to set up the channels Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges Usually the power levels in one or more carrier Tx channels and possibly the adja cent channels are of interest Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined When a measurement...

Page 201: ...tiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value The lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Only enter one value for equal channel spacing Example Defining channel spacing In the default setting the adjacent channels have the following spacing 20 kHz ADJ 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 Set the spacing of the first adjacent channel ADJ to 40 kHz For all othe...

Page 202: ...rst sub block For asymmetrical channels define the upper adjacent channel spacing as the distance from the center frequency of the last transmission channel in the last sub block The bandwidth If necessary a weighting filter Optionally define and activate relative or absolute limits or both against which the power levels of the channel are to be checked 9 Select the Gap Channels tab to configure t...

Page 203: ...ver are not necessarily compatible to the analyzers of the R S FSP family and may not work there To store a user defined configuration 1 In the Ch Power menu select the CP ACLR Config softkey to display the ACLR Setup dialog box 2 Configure the measurement as required see also Chapter 5 3 6 2 How to set up the channels on page 200 3 In the General Settings tab select the Manage User Standards butt...

Page 204: ... indicated relative to the fixed reference power 4 Repeat this for any number of measurements 5 To start a new measurement without the fixed reference temporarily define a sec ond channel or preset the instrument 5 3 7 Measurement examples The R S FSV A has test routines for simple channel and adjacent channel power measurements These routines give quick results without any complex or tedious set ...

Page 205: ...n the upper part of the screen the numeric values of the results and the channel configuration in the lower part of the screen The various channels are represented by vertical lines on the graph The frequency span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and detector are selected automatically to give correct results To obtain stable results especially in the adjacent channels 30 kHz bandwidth which a...

Page 206: ...Test setup Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 1950 MHz Level 4 dBm Modulation 3GPP W CDMA Reverse Link Procedure 1 Preset the R S FSV A 2 Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz 3 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Mea surement dialog box 4 Set the W CDMA 3GPP REV standard for adjacent channel power measurement in the ACLR Setup dialog box Channel power an...

Page 207: ...reference level for the power in the transmission channel to obtain the maximum dynamic range The fol lowing figure shows the result of the measurement Figure 5 36 Measuring the relative adjacent channel power on a W CDMA uplink signal The R S FSV A measures the power of the individual channels A root raised cosine filter with the parameters α 0 22 and chip rate 3 84 Mcps receive filter for W CDMA...

Page 208: ...e mixer level is set in 1 dB steps with the 1 dB RF attenuator Thus the optimum range spreads from 10 dBm to 14 dBm To set the attenuation parameter manually the following method is recommended Set the RF attenuation so that the mixer level measured channel power RF attenuation is between 10 dBm and 14 dBm This method is automated with the Auto Level function Especially in remote control mode e g ...

Page 209: ... are discrete spurious signals in the channel Test setup Leave the RF input of the R S FSV A open circuited or terminate it with 50 Ω Procedure 1 Preset the R S FSV A 2 Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz 3 To obtain maximum sensitivity set RF attenuation to 0 dB and the reference level to 40 dBm 4 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Mea surement ...

Page 210: ...t require the larger dynamic range see Optimization on page 475 Reduce the Sweep Time and thus the amount of data to be captured and calcu lated however consider the requirements regarding the standard deviation To improve the stability of the measured results increase the Sweep Time which also leads to more averaging steps Instead of trace averaging use an RMS detector with a higher Sweep Time to...

Page 211: ... remote command parameters Standard Remote parameter None NONE Multi Standard Radio MSR 5G NR DL FR1 20MHz F1D20nr5g 5G NR DL FR1 100MHz F1D100nr5g 5G NR UL FR1 20MHz F1U20nr5g 5G NR UL FR1 100MHz F1U100nr5g 5G NR DL FR2 100MHz F2D100nr5g 5G NR DL FR2 200MHz F2D200nr5g 5G NR UL FR2 100MHz F2U100nr5g 5G NR UL FR2 200MHz F2U200nr5g LTE20 LTE20 L20S LTE15 LTE15 L15S LTE10 LTE10 L10S LTE5 LTE5 L05S LT...

Page 212: ... transmission chan nel The definition of the adjacent channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA 2000 is different These standards define the adjacent channel spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel This defini tion is also used by the R S FSV A for the standards marked with an asterisk 5 3 10 Reference predefined ACLR user standard XML fi...

Page 213: ...DL_20MHZ XML LTE UL LTE UL LTE_UL_5MHZ XML LTE UL LTE_UL_10MHZ XML LTE UL LTE_UL_15MHZ XML LTE UL LTE_UL_20MHZ XML WLAN WLAN 802_11ac 802_11ac_20MHZ XML WLAN 802_11ac 802_11ac_40MHZ XML WLAN 802_11ac 802_11ac_80MHZ XML WLAN 802_11ac 802_11ac_160MHZ XML To load a stored measurement configuration in the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup dialog box select the Manage User Standards button to disp...

Page 214: ...ctor is activated The carrier to noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain span 0 Measurement process Depending on whether the carrier is inside or outside the analyzed channel the mea surement process for the carrier to noise ratio varies The carrier is outside the analyzed channel In this case it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the chann...

Page 215: ...ated in the diagram Remote command You can also query the determined carrier to noise ratio via the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN or CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN0 see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 862 5 4 3 Carrier to noise configuration Access Overview Select Measurement C N C N0 Carrier Noise Config Both a carrier to noise ratio C N and a carrier to noise ratio in...

Page 216: ...34 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 12 5 4 Measuring the carrier to noise ratio on page 924 C N 216 C N0 217 Channel Bandwidth 217 Adjust Settings 217 C N Switches the measurement of the carrier noise ratio on or off If no marker is active marker 1 is activated The measurement is performed on the trace that marker 1 is assigned to To shift marker 1 and ...

Page 217: ...ettings Enables the RMS detector and adjusts the span to the selected channel bandwidth according to 4 x channel bandwidth measurement margin The adjustment is performed once if necessary the setting can be changed later on Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 865 5 4 4 How to determine the carrier to noise ratio The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to determine th...

Page 218: ...ow to determine the occupied bandwidth 223 Measurement example 224 5 5 1 About the measurement The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing a defined percentage of the total transmitted power A percentage between 10 and 99 9 can be set Measurement principle The bandwidth containing 99 of the signal power is to be determined for example The algorithm first calculates the total powe...

Page 219: ... instructions see How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits on page 223 Prerequisites To ensure correct power measurement especially for noise signals and to obtain the correct occupied bandwidth the following prerequisites and settings are necessary Only the signal to be measured is displayed in the window or search limits are defined to include only one carrier signa...

Page 220: ...f the occupied bandwidth calculated using the temporary OBW markers T1 and T2 This frequency is indicated as a function result Occ Bw Centroid in the marker table Frequency offset The offset of the calculated centroid frequency to the defined center frequency of the R S FSV A is indicated as a function result Occ Bw Freq Offset in the marker table Remote command The determined occupied bandwidth c...

Page 221: ... limits as defined for marker search see Search Limits on page 527 However only the left and right limits are consid ered Auto measurement Use the Auto All function to determine the required measurement parameters automat ically The following settings are determined Center frequency Span determined signal bandwidth plus 40 RBW Span 1000 Sweep time Sweep_time min 10 For pulsed signals gating parame...

Page 222: ...sion channel For multicarrier measurements this setting is irrelevant Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch on page 869 Adjust Settings Optimizes the instrument settings for the measurement of the occupied bandwidth according to the specified channel bandwidth This function is only useful for single carrier measurements All instrument settings relevant for power measurement with...

Page 223: ...OBW for a single signal 1 Press the MEAS key or select Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select the OBW measurement function The measurement is started immediately with the default settings 3 Select the OBW Config softkey The Occupied Bandwidth configuration dialog box is displayed 4 Define the percentage of power Power Bandwidth that defines the bandwidth to be determined 5 If necessary change...

Page 224: ...m is measured A programming example demonstrating an OBW measurement in a remote environ ment is provided in Chapter 12 5 5 2 Programming example OBW measurement on page 926 1 Preset the R S FSV A 2 Set the Center Frequency to 800 MHz 3 Set the Reference Level to 10 dBm 4 Press the MEAS key or select Select Measurement in the Overview 5 Select the OBW measurement function 6 Select the OBW Config s...

Page 225: ... can include gaps or overlap and define separate masks Radio signals using multiple standards can also be analyzed SEM measurement configurations can be saved to an XML file which can then be exported to another application or loaded on the R S FSV A again later Some prede fined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected standard To improve the performance ...

Page 226: ...asurements with more than one sub block In these measurements each sub block has its own power class definitions In this case the power class is not indicated in the graphical result displays Example For example in Figure 5 39 31 P 39 is indicated as the used power class is defined from 31 to 39 Figure 5 39 Spectrum Emission Mask result displays In addition to the graphical results of the SEM meas...

Page 227: ...s Absolute peak power level within the range Power Rel Peak power level within the range relative to the Tx Power ΔLimit Deviation of the peak power level from the limit line You can define in which detail the data is displayed in the result summary in the List Evaluation settings see Chapter 5 6 5 7 List evaluation results configuration on page 255 By default one peak per range is displayed Howev...

Page 228: ...is Results for SEM with multiple sub blocks In the Spectrum application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see Chapter 5 6 4 5 SEM with multiple sub blocks Multi SEM on page 236 for details Up to 8 sub blocks with 7 gaps can be defined For each sub block and each gap the results described above are provided individually in the result summary Figure 5 41 SEM...

Page 229: ...r list can be queried using TRAC DATA LIST see TRACe n DATA on page 1162 5 6 4 SEM basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in SEM measure ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings Ranges and range settings 229 Limit lines in SEM measurements 231 Fast SEM measurements 234 Multi standard radio MSR SEM measurements 235 SEM wi...

Page 230: ...level results in the result sum mary is also calculated for this reference range You can define whether the power used for reference is the peak power level or the integrated power of the reference range In the Sweep List the reference range is highlighted in blue and cannot be deleted Rules The following rules apply to ranges The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz The individual ranges must not ove...

Page 231: ...range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the ref erence range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges Symmetrical ranges fulfill the conditions required for Fast SEM mode see Chap ter 5 6 4 3 Fast SEM measurements on page 234 Power classes If the signal power level to...

Page 232: ...he settings in the Sweep List Several types of limit checks are possible Table 5 10 Limit check types Limit check type Pass fail criteria Limit line definition Absolute Absolute power levels must not exceed limit line Defined by the Abs Limit Start Abs Limit Stop values for each range Relative Power deviations relative to the TX channel power must not exceed limit line Defined by the Rel Limit Sta...

Page 233: ...he range depending on the carrier power Common relative limit lines are calculated once for the defined start and end points and maintain a constant slope If the relative limit value function is used in combination with the Abs and Rel or Abs or Rel limit check types an additional condition is considered for the limit check see Table 5 10 Limit check results in the result summary For each range th...

Page 234: ...st on page 240 Filter Type RBW VBW Sweep Time Mode Reference Level RF Attenuation Mode RF Attenuation Preamplifier Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mode is activated in the sweep list see Chapter 5 6 5 1 Sweep List on page 240 or using a remote command Activating the mode for one range automat ically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb HSPeed on page 93...

Page 235: ... radio MSR measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on signals with multiple carriers using different digital standards MSR measurements are descri bed in the specification 3GPP TS 37 141 Various typical combinations of standards for base station tests are described e g LTE FDD and W CDMA carriers By performing an MSR SEM measurement you can determine if or how the different carriers affect eac...

Page 236: ...that can even include other carrier ranges but are not configured for the SEM measurement For each sub block you define The center frequency of the reference range of the sub block center frequencies must be defined in ascending order for sub blocks A B C The reference range note that although individual ranges of different sub blocks can overlap reference ranges for different sub blocks cannot th...

Page 237: ... determines the behavior of the limit check Limit calculation for individual ranges For each range a function can be defined that determines the behavior of the limit check if there are multiple limit lines NONE In reference ranges no limit check is performed Reference ranges always use the function NONE For other ranges see the combinations for overlapping ranges below SUM sum of the two limit li...

Page 238: ...weep time In the range with the higher RBW the following offset is applied to the limit line 10 log RBWlarge RBWsmall Table 5 11 Limit lines in overlapping ranges crossing the mid frequency Initial situation overlapping ranges Range 4 None Range 5 None overlap and cross the mid frequency between sub blocks 1 and 2 Result Subranges 4a and 5a are created left and right of the mid frequency For subra...

Page 239: ...ttings Auto measurement Use the Auto All function to determine the required measurement parameters automat ically The following settings are determined Center frequency Span determined signal bandwidth plus 40 SEM standard according to estimated signal bandwidth For pulsed signals gating parameters After the parameters have been determined automatically you must confirm the SEM standard selection ...

Page 240: ...mselves must be configured in the Sub Block tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask configura tion dialog box see Chapter 5 6 5 2 Multi sem sub block settings on page 246 The following settings are available in individual tabs of the Spectrum Emission Mask configuration dialog box Sweep List 240 Multi sem sub block settings 246 Reference range 247 Power classes 249 MSR settings 250 Standard files 253 Li...

Page 241: ...vel 243 RF Att Mode 243 RF Attenuation 243 Preamp 243 Transducer Factor 243 Limit Check n 244 Abs Limit Start Stop n 244 Rel Limit Start Stop n 244 Multi Limit Calc n 245 Min Sweep Points 245 Insert before Range Insert after Range 245 Delete Range 245 Symmetrical Setup 245 Range Start Range Stop Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range Spectrum emission mask SEM measurement ...

Page 242: ...ls see Chap ter 5 6 4 3 Fast SEM measurements on page 234 Note If you deactivate Fast SEM mode while Symmetrical Setup mode is on Symmetrical Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If you activate Fast SEM mode while Symmetrical Setup mode is on not all range settings can be configured symmetrically automatically Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb HSPeed on page 931 Filter Type Sets the filte...

Page 243: ...tes the auto mode for RF attenuation For details on attenuation see Chapter 6 4 1 2 RF attenuation on page 454 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 935 RF Attenuation Sets the attenuation value for the range For details on attenuation see Chapter 6 4 1 3 Scaling on page 455 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation on page 935 Preamp Switches...

Page 244: ...ENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li ABSolute STARt on page 936 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li ABSolute STOP on page 937 Rel Limit Start Stop n Sets a relative limit value for the n th power class at the start or stop frequency of the range dBc By default this value is a fixed relative limit i e no function is defined To define a function for the relative limit select the input field for Rel ...

Page 245: ...essary to fulfill all minimum sweep point requirements in all ranges the global Sweep Points setting is increased By default each range is supplied with a minimum of one sweep point For details see Sweep points on page 231 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri POINts MINimum VALue on page 942 Insert before Range Insert after Range Inserts a new range to the left before or to the right after o...

Page 246: ...ings Access Overview Select Measurement Spectrum Emission Mask Sub Blocks In the Spectrum application application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see Chapter 5 6 4 5 SEM with multiple sub blocks Multi SEM on page 236 Sub blocks are a set of multiple ranges around a defined center frequency carrier By default a single sub block is assumed If more than one...

Page 247: ...5 6 5 6 Standard files on page 253 and Chapter 5 6 5 5 MSR settings on page 250 Note that either a standard or an MSR setting can be selected if one is selected the other is disabled Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STANdard on page 928 Chapter 12 5 6 3 Configuring a multi sem measurement on page 929 Edit Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box to...

Page 248: ...d Additional settings can be configured for this method See also IBW method on page 160 Peak Power Determines the peak power within the reference range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe on page 946 Channel Power Settings If the Power Reference Type Channel Power was selected additional parameters can be configured Tx Bandwidth Channel Power Settings Defines the bandwidth used for measuring t...

Page 249: ...which you can then assign to sweep list ranges For details see Power classes on page 231 Used Power Classes 249 PMin PMax 250 Sweep List 250 Adding or Removing a Power Class 250 Used Power Classes Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement Limits can be defined only for used power classes It is only possible to select either one specific power class or all the defined power...

Page 250: ...li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MINimum on page 951 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MAXimum on page 950 Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box and focuses the Limit Check setting for the corresponding power class 1 4 in the refer ence range see Limit Check n on page 244 Adding or Removing a Power Class Adds a new power class at the end of the list ...

Page 251: ...253 Band Category Defines the band category for MSR measurements i e the combination of available carriers to measure BC1 LTE FDD and W CDMA BC2 LTE FDD W CDMA and GSM EDGE BC3 LTE TDD and TD SCDMA Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BCATegory on page 953 Base Station Class Defines the class of the base station according to its sending range This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits a...

Page 252: ...F Bandwidth Defines the relevant RF bandwidth span required to measure all available carriers in MSR SEM measurements Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR RFBWidth on page 957 Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge For particular measurement setups the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges These settings are only available for Band Category 2 GSM Edge Present A GSM EDGE carrier ...

Page 253: ...verview Select Measurement Spectrum Emission Mask Stan dard Files You can save the current measurement settings as a user defined standard XML file or load stored measurement settings Furthermore you can delete an existing settings file For details see Chapter 5 6 6 1 How to manage SEM settings files on page 260 Standard files for sub blocks Multi SEM measurements If more than one sub blocks are d...

Page 254: ...storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Chapter 3 2 15 Protecting data using the secure user mode on page 55 Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 1251 File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbe...

Page 255: ...Standard Files on page 255 Restore Standard Files Restores the standards predefined by Rohde Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery The XML files from the C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSV3000 version sem_backup folder are copied to the C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSV3000 version sem_std folder Note that this function overwrites customized standards that have the same name as predefined stan...

Page 256: ...62 Show Peaks If activated all peaks that have been detected during an active SEM measurement are marked with blue squares in the Spectrum diagram Remote command CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch PSHow on page 959 Margin Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check you can define a margin or threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the result summary Only peaks that ...

Page 257: ...sks For signals with multiple carriers also in non contiguous ranges an SEM measure ment with multiple sub blocks can be configured For multi standard radio SEM measurements configuration for specified scenarios can be done automatically The following tasks are described To select an SEM measurement on page 257 To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard on page 257 To configure a user d...

Page 258: ...automatically according to the input level measured in the reference range 4 Select the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box 5 Insert the required ranges using the Insert before Range and Insert after Range buttons which refer to the currently selected range the reference range by default If the signal trace is symmetric to the center frequency activate the Sym Setup option to m...

Page 259: ...ement setup see Band Category on page 251 3 Define the bandwidth that contains all relevant carrier signals to be measured 4 For measurements with GSM EDGE LTE FDD and W CDMA carriers BC2 define whether a GSM EDGE or an LTE FDD carrier or both are located at the edge of the bandwidth 5 Select the Apply to SEM button The sweep list is configured according to the MSR specification with the required ...

Page 260: ...ngs files SEM measurement settings can be saved to an XML file which can then be exported to another application or loaded on the R S FSV A again later Some predefined XML files are provided that contain ranges and parameters according to the selected stan dard All XML files are stored under C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSV3000 version sem_std For details on the file format of the SEM settings fi...

Page 261: ... settings files are available for selection on the R S FSV A 5 6 6 2 How to save SEM result files The Result Summary from an SEM measurement can be saved to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis for example For details on the file format of the SEM export file see Chapter 5 6 8 2 ASCII file export format spectrum emission mask on page 269 1 Configure and perform ...

Page 262: ...enter frequency Level Test model SigGen 1 3GPP FDD 900 MHz 0 dBm 1 16 SigGen 2 EUTRA LTE 906 5 MHz 0 dBm 1_1_5MHz Setting up the measurement 1 Preset the R S FSV A 2 Set the center frequency to 903 25 MHz 3 Set the reference level to 10 dBm with an offset of to 30 dB 4 Press the MEAS key or select Select Measurement in the Overview 5 Select the SEM measurement function 6 Select the Sub Blocks soft...

Page 263: ...the format of the SEM settings and result files Format description of SEM XML files 263 ASCII file export format spectrum emission mask 269 5 6 8 1 Format description of SEM XML files The SEM XML files offer a quick way to change the measurement settings A set of predefined XML files for different standards is already provided You can also create and use your own XML files Alternatively edit the s...

Page 264: ...he Range element The BaseFormat element It carries information about basic settings In this element only the ReferencePower child node has any effects on the measurement itself The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask standard on the measurement screen The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in Table 5 12 Example In the ...

Page 265: ...y or check the structure as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the Range element are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element They must be inserted where noted They are separated here simply to provide a better overview Also no example values are given here to allow a ...

Page 266: ...andwidth Type FilterType VBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Detector Detector Detector Sweep Mode SweepMode Time SweepTime Amplitude ReferenceLevel Unit dBm Value Value RFAttenuation Mode Auto Unit dB Value Value Preamplifier State State Amplitude MeasPointsMin 1 MeasPointsMin CalcRuleMulti Sum CalcRuleMulti Range Table 5 12 Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Child Node Attribute Value Para...

Page 267: ...er in dBm The stop power must be equal to the start power of the next power class The StopPower value of the last range is 200 Yes Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Yes DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute Relative Absolute and Rel ative Absolute or Relative Yes Table 5 14 Attributes and child nodes of the Range element normal ranges Child node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand Index 0 19 Indices are...

Page 268: ...dBm Yes Start Value numeric_value Power limit at start fre quency Yes Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc dBr dB Sets the unit of the start value Stop Value numeric_value Power limit at stop fre quency Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc dBr dB Sets the unit of the stop value LimitFailMode Absolute Relative Absolute and Rel ative Absolute or Relative If used it has to be identical to DefaultLimitFailMode No RBW Bandwidth bandwid...

Page 269: ...t as described below The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup File contents Explanation File header Type FSVA3 26 Model Version 1 00 Firmware version Date 31 Mar 17 Storage date of data set Mode ANALYZER SEM Operating mode and measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis settings Freq Offset 0 000000 Hz Span 25500000 000000 Hz x ...

Page 270: ...tive value means above the limit limit fail pass 0 fail 1 2 2515000 12750000 30000 13257632500 43 8447 22747802734 0 33028793334960938 49 66971206 6650391 FAIL 5 7 Spurious emissions measurement Spurious Emissions measurements monitor unwanted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier About the measurement 270 Spurious emissions measurement results 271 Spurious emis...

Page 271: ...ed to evaluate the measured powers and limit check results see also Chapter 5 7 3 2 Limit lines in spurious measurements on page 273 The details of the evaluation list can be configured The following information is provided in the evaluation list for each range Column Description Range Low Frequency range start for the range the peak value belongs to Range Up Frequency range end for the range the ...

Page 272: ...on basic terms and principles used in Spurious Emis sions measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required config uration settings Ranges and range settings 272 Limit lines in spurious measurements 273 5 7 3 1 Ranges and range settings Conditions for ranges The following rules apply to ranges The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz The individual ranges must not overlap but ca...

Page 273: ...he Sweep List and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit line definition In the Sweep List you can define a limit line that varies its level according to the specified frequency ranges A distinguished limit line is automatically defined according to the current Sweep List settings every time the settings change This limit line is labeled _SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_ xxx where xxx is an ind...

Page 274: ...sted For details see Chapter 5 7 4 3 List evaluation on page 278 5 7 4 Spurious emissions measurement configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Spurious Emissions The spurious emissions measurement is started immediately with the default settings The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 12 5 7 Measuring spurious emissions on page 962 Sweep list 274 Adjus...

Page 275: ...p Points 277 Stop After Sweep 277 Transducer 277 Limit Check 278 Abs Limit Start Abs Limit Stop 278 Insert before Range Insert after Range 278 Delete Range 278 Range Start Range Stop Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range You can define a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges In this case the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined...

Page 276: ...this range For details on the VBW see Chapter 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the trace using the video bandwidth on page 465 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri BANDwidth VIDeo on page 964 Sweep Time Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time For details on the sweep time mode see Chapter 6 5 1 7 How long the data is mea sured Sweep Time on page 468 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri SWEep T...

Page 277: ...he preamplifier on or off For details on the preamplifier see Preamplifier on page 459 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut GAIN STATe on page 968 Sweep Points Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range For details on sweep points see Chapter 6 5 1 8 How much data is measured sweep points and sweep count on page 469 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri POINts VALue on page 970 Stop ...

Page 278: ...ge 969 Insert before Range Insert after Range Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range before or to the right after The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 30 Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range The range numbers are updated accordingly 5 7 4 2 Adjusting the X Axis to the ran...

Page 279: ...s If activated all peaks that have been detected during an active list evaluation are marked with blue squares in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow on page 973 Margin A margin functionality is not available for the limit check However you can define a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list Only peaks that exceed the margin value are displa...

Page 280: ...nd storage location in the file selection dialog box that is dis played when you select the Save function For details see How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List on page 281 Remote command MMEMory STORe n LIST on page 1276 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 1250 5 7 5 How to perform a spurious emissions measurement The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform spurio...

Page 281: ...set Details to On 8 Start a sweep The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the evaluation list If activated the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the diagram 9 To save the evaluation list export the results to a file as described in How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List on page 281 How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation Lis...

Page 282: ...ersion 1 00 Firmware version Date 31 Mar 11 Storage date of data set Mode ANALYZER SPURIOUS Operating mode and measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis settings Freq Offset 0 000000 Hz Span 26499982000 000000 Hz x Axis LIN Start 9000 000000 Hz Stop 8000000000 000000 Hz Level Offset 0 000000 dB Y axis settings Ref Position 100 000000 y Axis LOG Level Range 100 000000 dB Trace s...

Page 283: ...and CCDF basics gated triggering 286 APD and CCDF configuration 288 How to perform an APD or CCDF measurement 294 Examples 295 Optimizing and troubleshooting the measurement 298 5 8 1 About the measurements The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the Amplitude Probability Distribution function APD During a selectable measurement time all occurring ampli tude values are assigned to...

Page 284: ...sion and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter design criterion The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or logarithmically as the peak level minus the average level of the signal To reduce power consumption and cut costs transmitters are not designed for the largest power...

Page 285: ...ion CCDF The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent The level above the mean power is plotted along the x axis of the graph The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y axis A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian dis...

Page 286: ... position Diagram Scaling The scaling for both the x axis and y axis of the statistics diagram can be configured In particular you can restrict the range of amplitudes to be evaluated and the probabili ties to be displayed Remote commands CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t on page 984 CALCulate n STATistics RESult res on page 985 5 8 4 APD and CCDF basics gated triggering Statistic measurements on pu...

Page 287: ...Measurements and results R S FSVA3000 R S FSV3000 287 User Manual 1178 8520 02 08 Statistical measurements APD CCDF ...

Page 288: ...onfiguration consists of the following settings Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value see Reference Level on page 456 Basic settings 288 Gate range definition for APD and CCDF 290 Scaling for statistics diagrams 291 5 8 5 1 Basic settings Access Overview Select Measurement APD CCDF APD Config CCDF Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks a...

Page 289: ...ements that are taken into account for the statis tics For statistics measurements with the R S FSV A the number of samples to be mea sured is defined instead of the sweep time Since only statistically independent sam ples contribute to statistics the sweep or measurement time is calculated automatically and displayed in the channel bar Meas Time The samples are statistically inde pendent if the t...

Page 290: ...evel to the current input signal Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 982 5 8 5 2 Gate range definition for APD and CCDF Access Overview Select Measurement APD CCDF APD Config CCDF Config Edit Gate Ranges You can configure gate ranges for gated triggering in statistical measurements For background information on defining gate ranges see Chapter 5 8 4 APD and CCDF basics ga...

Page 291: ...ATe TRACe t PERiod on page 979 Range x Use Activates tracing of the defined range during a gated measurement Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STATe gr on page 980 Range x Start Stop Defines the start and stop points of the range within the tracing period Make sure the value for the stopping time is smaller than the length of the period Note You can define the time values with a greater num...

Page 292: ... 293 Adjust Settings 294 X Axis Defines the scaling settings for signal level values Ref Level X Axis Defines the reference level for the signal levels in the currently active unit dBm dBµV etc For the APD function this value corresponds to the right diagram border For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x axis is scaled relatively to the measure...

Page 293: ...centage or absolute The default value is absolute scaling Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 983 Y Max Y Min Y Axis Defines the upper max and lower min limit of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The mini mum value must be in the range 1E 9 Y Min 0 1 The distance between Y Max and Y Min must be at le...

Page 294: ...ranges For pulsed signals the transmission intervals should not be included in the statistical evaluation Thus you must define gate ranges to be included in the measurement 1 Press the MEAS Config key then select the APD Config or CCDF Config soft key The APD APD or CCDF dialog box is displayed 2 Select the Edit Gate Ranges button 3 Define the time period for which the input signal is to be analyz...

Page 295: ...r the useful part of the signal between t3 and t4 The period of the GSM signal is 4 61536 ms t1 External positive trigger slope t2 Begin of burst after 25 µs t3 Begin of useful part to be used for statistics after 40 µs t4 End of useful part to be used for statistics after 578 µs t5 End of burst after 602 µs The instrument has to be configured as follows Trigger Offset t2 t1 25 µs now the gate ran...

Page 296: ...ng to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a white noise signal The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be determined A programming example demonstrating a statistics measurement in a remote environ ment is provided in Chapter 12 5 8 7 Programming example measuring statistics on page 985 1 Preset the R S FSV A 2 Set the reference level to 60 dBm The R S FSV A s ...

Page 297: ...3000 297 User Manual 1178 8520 02 08 Figure 5 47 Amplitude probability distribution of white noise 4 Now select the CCDF measurement function from the Select Measurement dia log box Figure 5 48 CCDF of white noise Statistical measurements APD CCDF ...

Page 298: ...gate 5 9 Time domain power measurement The Time Domain Power measurement determines the power of a signal in the time domain A time domain power measurement is only possible for zero span About the measurement 298 Time domain power results 298 Time domain power basics range definition using limit lines 299 Time domain power configuration 300 How to measure powers in the time domain 302 Measurement...

Page 299: ...The measured values are updated after each sweep or aver aged over a user defined number of sweeps trace averaging The results can also be queried using the remote commands described in Chap ter 12 5 9 Measuring the time domain power on page 987 5 9 3 Time domain power basics range definition using limit lines The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be restri...

Page 300: ...an be measured by using a measurement as a reference value and then varying the measurement range In order to get stable measurement results for a limited evaluation range usually a trig ger is required 5 9 4 Time domain power configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Time Domain Power Time Dom Power Config Time domain power measurement ...

Page 301: ...d trace or a segment thereof The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calcula ted Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean value The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at the same time Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe on page 990 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak RESult on page 993 CALCulate ...

Page 302: ...re the power in the time domain 1 Select the MEAS key 2 From the Select Measurement dialog box select the Time Domain Power mea surement function 3 Select the type of power measurement results to be determined by selecting the corresponding softkeys 4 To restrict the power evaluation range define limits a Select the Time Dom Power Config softkey to display the Time Domain Power configuration dialo...

Page 303: ... μs 5 Set the trigger source to IF Power 6 Define a trigger offset of 50 μs 7 Select the Time Domain Power measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box 8 In the Time Domain Power configuration dialog box set all four results to On 9 Set the Limit State to On 10 Define the left limit at 326 μs and the right limit at 538 μs This range corresponds to the useful part of the GSM burst T...

Page 304: ...VCO In addition the total harmonic distortion THD is calculated For measurements in the frequency domain the Harmonic Distortion measurement starts with an automatic search for the first harmonic peak within the set frequency range The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted accordingly For measurements in zero span the center frequency remains unchanged The H...

Page 305: ...ticularly critical regarding high power transmitters such as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere with other radio services Harmonic distortion can be determined as the level of the individual components or as the root mean square of all components together the total harmonic distortion THD The THD is set in relation to the power of the fundamental frequency center fre quency Obtaina...

Page 306: ... attenuation The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is P1 2 PI S H I 2 The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer The harmonic of the measured DUT should if sufficiently averaged by means of a video filter be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due to the input noise is less than 1 dB Ru...

Page 307: ... analyzer contribute to the har monic the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller High sensitivity harmonics measurements If harmonics have very small levels the resolution bandwidth required to measure them must be reduced considerably The sweep time is therefore also increased con siderably In this case the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the R S FSV A ...

Page 308: ...Remote commands The results can also be queried using remote commands The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the general center frequency com mand SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 1102 THD CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion on page 999 List of harmonics CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST on page 999 5 10 4 Harmonic distortion configuration Access Overview Select M...

Page 309: ...is setting is identical to the normal sweep time for zero span see also Sweep Time on page 472 Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 1114 Harmonic RBW Auto Enables disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth for Normal 3dB Gaussian and 5 Pole filter types The automatic adjustment is carried out according to RBWn RBW1 n If RBWn is not available the next higher value is used...

Page 310: ... box 2 Define the number of harmonics to be determined using the Number of Harmon ics softkey 3 Perform a sweep The trace for the determined harmonics are displayed in the diagram separated by red display lines The measured power for each harmonic in relation to the funda mental is indicated in the result table 4 If the signal changes significantly during or after the harmonics measurement use the...

Page 311: ...easure the third order intercept point TOI a two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R S FSV A input Marker 1 and marker 2 both normal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products The R S FSV A calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference between the first 2 markers and the markers 3 ...

Page 312: ...xing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal PU1 and signal PU2 fi1 2 fu1 fu2 1 fi2 2 fu2 fu1 2 Dependency on level of useful signals The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals If the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB which means that the spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and useful sig...

Page 313: ...ulation products of the third order increase three times as quickly as the useful signals The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect It cannot be measured directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two port output power Calculation method However the intercept point can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacing aD3 at...

Page 314: ...tain the range that is required Since phase noise decreases as the carrier offset increases its influence decreases with increasing fre quency offset from the useful signals The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation free dynamic range as a function of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer signal level set RF attenuation at different useful signal offsets Figure 5 5...

Page 315: ...p arately using a small span The measurement time will be reduced in particular if the offset of the useful signals is large To find signals reliably when frequency span is small it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the R S FSV A 5 11 3 TOI results As a result of the TOI measurement the following values are displayed in the marker area of the diagram Label Description TOI Third order i...

Page 316: ...g the remote commands CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult on page 1002 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MAXimum on page 1002 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MINimum on page 1003 5 11 4 TOI configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Third Order Intercept TOI Config Third order intercept TOI measurement ...

Page 317: ...he TOI is then recalculated according to the new marker values To reset all marker positions automatically use the Search Signals function Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 1177 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 1174 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative on page 1190 Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signals and recalculates the TOI according to the measured values Rem...

Page 318: ...tion A programming example demonstrating a TOI measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 12 5 11 2 Programming example measuring the TOI on page 1003 Test setup Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Device Level Frequency Signal generator 1 4 dBm 799 6 MHz Signal generator 2 4 dBm 800 4 MHz Setting up the measurement 1 Preset the R S FSV A 2 Set the center frequency to 800 MHz and...

Page 319: ...eful signals and the intermodulation products It is then displayed on the screen The third order intercept TOI is displayed in the marker information 2 The level of a signal analyzer s intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer When the RF attenuation is added the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased With an a...

Page 320: ... carrier amplitude So for MDepth 0 5 for example the carrier amplitude varies by 50 above and below its unmodulated level and for MDepth 1 0 it varies by 100 When this measurement is activated marker 1 is set to the peak level which is consid ered to be the carrier level Delta markers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace The markers ca...

Page 321: ...AM modulation depth in percent M1 Maximum of the signal carrier level D2 Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier D3 Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier Remote command The AM modulation depth can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth RESult t on page 1005 5 12 3 AM modulation depth configuration Access Overview Select Measurement AM Mod...

Page 322: ...th is then recalculated accord ing to the new marker values To reset all marker positions automatically use the Search Signals function Note Moving the marker positions manually When the position of delta marker 2 is changed delta marker 3 is moved symmetrically with respect to the reference marker 1 Delta marker 3 on the other hand can be moved for fine adjustment independently of marker 2 Marker...

Page 323: ... remote operation see Chapter 12 5 12 2 Example measuring the AM modulation depth on page 1005 1 Apply a modulated carrier signal to the R S FSV A input 2 On the R S FSV A press the MEAS key 3 Select the AM Modulation Depth measurement function from the Select Mea surement dialog box The calculated AM Modulation Depth is indicated in the marker information The markers required for calculation are ...

Page 324: ...est antenna or the rotation of the DUT Covering all test setups with one of the slow EMI weighting detectors over the required frequency range can lead to very long measurement times Splitting the measurement procedure into several stages however can eliminate this problem The first stage is a peak search used to get a rough idea about the location of peak levels that can indicate interference ove...

Page 325: ...he peak delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines The active marker levels and positions are displayed in the Marker Table The marker results are also displayed in the Result Summary in addition the Marker Table contains the marker results for those markers for which no final EMI test is per formed Final test results Result Summary The results of the final EMI tests at the activ...

Page 326: ...ded here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings Resolution bandwidth and filter types 326 Detectors and dwell time 327 Frequency resolution sweep points and scaling 331 Controlling V Networks LISN 332 Using transducer factors 333 Initial measurement peak search 333 Final measurement at the marker position 334 Limit checks 335 5 13 3 1 Resolution bandwidth and filter typ...

Page 327: ...Restrictions for the R S FSV A using CISPR detectors Using the CISPR filter specific detectors Quasipeak CISPR Average RMS Average are available for EMI measurements However if any of the CISPR detectors are used as trace detectors the following detectors cannot be used as trace detectors for other traces in the same display Negative peak Auto peak Sample If you select a CISPR detector for a trace...

Page 328: ...nmodulated signals minimum time required by the detector Pulsed signals the time must be long enough to capture several complete pulses at least 10 The time is determined by the lowest modulation frequency to be averaged RMS detector The RMS detector displays the root mean square RMS value over the specified dwell time The integration time is the specified dwell time The RMS detector is already av...

Page 329: ... before starting the measurement CISPR Average detector CISPR filter only The CISPR Average detector displays a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16 1 1 The average value according to CISPR 16 1 1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the specified dwell time The CISPR Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter The CISPR Average...

Page 330: ...orner frequency and the Average detector for pulse repetition frequencies below the corner frequency It thus achieves a pulse response curve with the following characteristics 10 dB decade above the corner frequency 20 dB decade below the corner frequency The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument The RMS Average detector is on...

Page 331: ...asurements often cover a large frequency range be sure to define an adequate number of sweep points especially when performing the measurement on a logarithmic axis As on a linear axis the distance from one sweep point to the next is calculated graphically on a logarithmic axis and is not based on the frequency itself Thus the frequency resolution between two sweep points deteriorates with higher ...

Page 332: ...o control a line impedance stabilization network LISN directly Thus you can determine the interference caused by power supplies and cables This feature requires the optional additional interfaces R S FSV3 B5 You can connect the LISN to the user port of the R S FSV A Control cables for the various LISNs are available as accessories The R S FSV A then controls which phase of the LISN is to be tested...

Page 333: ...initial peak search is to find signals with a high interference level quickly The peak search is performed with a fast detector like the peak or average detector The initial peak search is the basis for a possible refined measurement of interferences with the detectors specific to EMI measurements The results of the initial peak search are shown in the Marker Table see Chap ter 5 13 2 EMI measurem...

Page 334: ...nother trace using the peak detector by assigning another marker to that trace For this marker frequency per form a refined measurement using the quasi peak detector 5 13 3 7 Final measurement at the marker position Finding peaks with the help of an initial marker peak search reduces data to be evalu ated and thus measurement time A final measurement with a special EMI detector can then refine the...

Page 335: ...imit lines in combination with EMI measurements the marker levels from the initial measurement are compared to the limit line values The result of the limit line check is displayed in the diagram as usual In the EMI Result Summary the limit check is based on the results of the final test Since the marker can be determined using a different detector than the final test results the two limit check r...

Page 336: ...ector 338 Select Marker 338 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 1176 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 1173 Marker Position X value Defines the position...

Page 337: ...ker values Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m MREFerence on page 1173 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the initial marker is changed the linked marker follows to the same posi tion on the x axis Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure th...

Page 338: ...s detected during the dwell time The Quasi Peak detector is only available for the CISPR filter and not for an RBW of 1 MHz CISPR Aver age Determines a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16 1 1 The average value according to CISPR 16 1 1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the speci fied dwell time The CISPR Average detector is only availab...

Page 339: ...Culate n MARKer m STATe on page 1176 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 1173 5 13 4 2 EMI final measurement configuration The final EMI measurement can be performed with different settings than the initial peak search These settings are described here Electromagnetic interference EMI measurement ...

Page 340: ...active If you select a CISPR trace detector the filter type is automatically also set to CISPR An active CISPR filter is indicated in the channel info next to the RBW information For details see Chap ter 5 13 3 1 Resolution bandwidth and filter types on page 326 The RBW filter configured in the bandwidth settings is identical to the filter configured in the EMI configuration Remote command SENSe B...

Page 341: ... Time Sets the dwell time for the EMI marker measurement For more information see Chapter 5 13 3 2 Detectors and dwell time on page 327 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELl on page 1008 Final Test Detector Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency This setting is only available if the EMI R S FSV3 K54 measurement option is instal led ...

Page 342: ...linear and logarithmic scaling for the frequency axis Logarithmic scaling is only available if R S FSV3 K54 is installed and only for fstop 1 4 fstart By default the frequency axis has linear scaling Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis however is common for measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhan ces the resolution of the lower frequencies On the other hand high frequencies get ...

Page 343: ...option For more information see Chapter 5 13 3 4 Controlling V Networks LISN on page 332 LISN Type 343 Phase 343 150 kHz Highpass 344 LISN Type Selects the network type and activates output to the network via the user port of the R S FSV A The network type determines the supported phases see Table 5 18 Off disables LISN control and output Remote command INPut ip LISN TYPE on page 1010 Phase Select...

Page 344: ...positions are demodulated for the defined dwell time You can listen to the results during the mea surement using headphones or the internal speaker This feature requires the optional audio demodulator R S FSV3 B3 For more information see Chapter 7 3 4 7 Demodulating marker values and providing audio output marker demodulation on page 547 Limit lines General limit line functionality is provided by ...

Page 345: ... dB bandwidth 7 Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final measurement 8 To obtain an overview of peak values in the input signal during the initial measure ment activate the Auto Peak Search As soon as a sweep is started the R S FSV A looks for the strongest peaks in the frequency range you are measuring and positions one of the active markers on those peaks...

Page 346: ...lation folder of the instru ment File extension LIN Compatible to the current EMI measurement settings c Select the Check Traces setting for a limit line in the overview d Select the trace numbers to be included in the limit check You can assign the same limit line to several traces 15 The default unit dBm is not suitable for EMI measurements Define a suitable unit for the measured values or selec...

Page 347: ...te environment is provided in Chapter 12 5 13 8 Programming example EMI measurement on page 1013 Preparing the measurement 1 Select PRESET The R S FSV A restores the default settings 2 Define the frequency range of the measurement a Select FREQ b Select Start Frequency c Enter a frequency of 150 kHz d Select Stop Frequency e Enter a frequency of 1 GHz The R S FSV A scales the horizontal axis accor...

Page 348: ...kers a Select the Marker Config b Activate six normal markers c Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1 Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2 d For each of these markers select the CISPR AV detector to be used for the Final Test i e the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker positions 2 Select a limit line to check the marker results against a Select Lines and then the Lines Config then select the Lines Config ta...

Page 349: ...wing methods to optimize the measurement Number of sweep points The resolution bandwidth should cover at least one sweep point more is better If this condition is not met signals or interferences could be missed during refined measure ment of narrowband interferers See Chapter 5 13 3 3 Frequency resolution sweep points and scaling on page 331 If the distance between two sweep points is larger than...

Page 350: ...d span configuration 446 Amplitude and vertical axis configuration 453 Bandwidth filter and sweep configuration 463 Trigger and gate configuration 480 Adjusting settings automatically 498 6 1 Configuration overview Access all menus Each channel provides an overview of the most important currently defined settings and access to the most important configuration dialog boxes for the particular mea su...

Page 351: ...is sions measurement configuration on page 274 7 Optionally Outputs See Chapter 6 2 7 Output settings on page 440 8 Analysis See Chapter 7 Common analysis and display functions on page 502 9 Display See Chapter 7 1 Result display configuration on page 502 To configure settings Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the channel tab t...

Page 352: ...s of devices to be tested without interfering with the signal The R S FSV A base unit and some optional applications support input from probes Active modular probes can be connected to the RF Input connector on the R S FSV A using an R S RT ZA9 adapter Thus you can perform frequency sweeps on data from all active probes directly on the RF input up to the maximum frequency of the probe and analyzer...

Page 353: ...ings select the Input connector RF Probe Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the R S FSV A The detected information on the probe is displayed in the Probes tab of the Input dialog box To determine whether the probe has been connected properly and recognized by the R S FSV A use the SENSe PROBe pb SETup STATe remote control com mand Impedance and attenuation The measured signa...

Page 354: ...ive and negative input terminal CM Mode Common mode input voltage Vcm Mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs ground The R S FSV A supports all probe modes The mode is configured in the Chap ter 6 2 2 2 Probe settings on page 360 Offset compensation The R S RT ZM probes feature a comprehensive offset compensation function The compensation of DC components directly at the p...

Page 355: ...gger on several devices is useful to synchronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R S FSV A Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R S FSV A is provided by an external device the trigger signal source must be connected to the R S FSV A and the trigger source must be defined as External in the R S...

Page 356: ...t IF and video output is only available in the time domain zero span For I Q data only IF output is available IF output is not available if any of the following conditions apply The sample rate is larger than 200 MHz upsampling 6 2 2 Input source settings Access Overview Input Input Source The input source determines which data the R S FSV A analyzes The default input source for the R S FSV A is R...

Page 357: ...T OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ip ATTenuation PROTection RESet Radio Frequency...

Page 358: ...d 50Ω Default no conversion takes place 75Ω The 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the selected Pad Type Series R default or MLP Minimum Loss Pad User The 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a user defined impe dance value according to the selected Pad Type Series R default or MLP Minimum Loss Pad Remote command INPut ip IMPedance on page 1038 INPu...

Page 359: ... page 1038 Preselector Adjust Activates or deactivates the preselector adjustment This function is only available for instrument modelsR S FSV A43 50 67 85 for fre quency sweeps in the Spectrum application Generally sweeps exceeding a certain span use different signal paths to measure the required spectrum To minimize the hysteresis impact of the YIG preselector at the transition frequencies you c...

Page 360: ...be if any is displayed For more information on using probes with an R S FSV A see Chapter 6 2 1 1 Using probes on page 352 For general information on the R S RT probes see the device manuals Name 360 Serial Number 360 Part Number 361 Type 361 Mode 361 Common Mode Offset Diff Mode Offset P Offset N Offset 361 Attenuation 361 Microbutton Action 362 Name Probe name Remote command SENSe PROBe pb SETup...

Page 361: ...e command SENSe PROBe pb SETup PMODe on page 1073 Common Mode Offset Diff Mode Offset P Offset N Offset Sets the offset for the probe depending on the used mode CM and DM mode both use the Common Mode Offset The setting is only available if a differential R S RT ZD or modular R S RT ZM probe is connected to the R S FSV A If the probe is disconnected the offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Note I...

Page 362: ...he R S FSV A can also analyze data from a connected power sensor The use of power sensors requires option R S FSV3 K9 Basics on power sensors 362 Power sensor settings 364 How to work with a power sensor 368 6 2 3 1 Basics on power sensors For precise power measurement up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the instrument via the power sensor interface on the front panel or the USB connectors B...

Page 363: ...ensors can be connected to the Power Sensor interface directly and no further cables are required They can then be configured as an external power sensor trigger Figure 6 2 Connecting a power sensor using the POWER SENSOR interface The R S FSV A receives an external trigger signal when the defined trigger level is measured by the power sensor Power measurement results are provided as usual The Gat...

Page 364: ...s Value Update 365 Select 365 Zeroing Power Sensor 365 Frequency Manual 366 Frequency Coupling 366 Unit Scale 366 Meas Time Average 366 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref 366 Reference Value 366 Use Ref Level Offset 367 Sensor Level Offset 367 Average Count Number of Readings 367 Duty Cycle 367 Using the power sensor as an external trigger 367 External Trigger Level 368 Hyst...

Page 365: ...ted State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configura tion dialog one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the select...

Page 366: ...me or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results Short Stationary signals with high power 40dBm because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates Normal Signals with lower po...

Page 367: ...rmed The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particularly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement Remote command SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt on page 1091 Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for...

Page 368: ...ass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDoff on page 1095 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the s...

Page 369: ...e frequency manually select Frequency Manual and enter a fre quency b To determine the frequency automatically select Frequency Coupling and then either Center to use the center frequency or Marker to use the fre quency defined by marker 1 6 Select the unit for the power result display 7 Select the measurement time for which the average is calculated or define the number of readings to average To ...

Page 370: ...lete A corresponding message is displayed How to configure a power sensor as an external PSE trigger The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure a power sensor to be used as an external power sensor trigger To configure a power sensor as an external power sensor PSE trigger 1 Connect a compatible power sensor to the Power Sensor interface on the front panel of the R S FSV ...

Page 371: ...r This process is referred to as external generator control The generator in this setup is referred to as a tracking generator A measurement with a tracking generator is useful to measure any effects on the power level caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance The known effects can then be removed from the mea surement results in order to obta...

Page 372: ...ator Control option Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates because the fre quency stepping of the R S FSV A is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For details see Coupling the frequencies on page 378 In Figure 6 3 the TTL connection is illustrated using an R S SMU generator for exam ple R S SMU rear Analyzer rear BNC Trigger BNC Blank Fig...

Page 373: ...ds the transmission characteristics of a two port network The external generator is used as a signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT The input of the R S FSV A is fed from the output of the DUT A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables Figure 6 6 Test setup for transmission measurement Refle...

Page 374: ...Refer ence For more information on external references see Chapter 10 7 Reference frequency settings on page 736 Connection errors If no external generator is connected if the connection address is not correct or the generator is not ready for operation an error message is displayed e g Ext Genera tor TCPIP Handshake Error see Displayed information and errors on page 380 Overview of supported gene...

Page 375: ...the measurement results from the controlled external generator including the inherent distortions can be used as a reference trace to calibrate the measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R S FSV A to the signal generator The R S FSV A sends a predefined list of fre quencies to the signal generator see also Coupling the frequencies o...

Page 376: ...e set sweep limits cor responds to a doubling of the span Differences in level settings between the reference trace and the current instrument settings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpola tion of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or...

Page 377: ... A as a reference trace For each measured sweep point the offset to the expected values is determined If nor malization is activated the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current measurement results to compensate for the inherent distortions Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the External Generator Source Calibration sett...

Page 378: ...rator Automatic coupling If automatic coupling is used the output frequency of the generator source frequency is calculated as follows Offset Analyzer Generator F ator Deno Numerator F F min Equation 6 1 Output frequency of the generator Where FGenerator output frequency of the generator FAnalyzer current frequency at the RF input of the R S FSV A Numerator multiplication factor for FAnalyzer Deno...

Page 379: ...rts the sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the R S FSV A and the generator using the TTL handshake line TRIGGER The R S FSV A can only measure a value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates because the frequency stepping of the R S FSV A is directly coupled with th...

Page 380: ...o difference between reference setting and measurement APX approximation Normalization on Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control Message Description Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error Ext Generator TTL Handshake Error Connection t...

Page 381: ... displayed in the status line Overloading can be avoided as follows Reducing the output level of the external generator Source Power on page 384 in External Generator Measurement Configuration Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 6 2 4 3 External generator control settings Access INPUT OUPUT External Generator Config The External Generator settings are available if ...

Page 382: ...or setup file to use For an overview of supported generators see Overview of supported generators on page 374 For information on generator setup files see Generator setup files on page 375 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator gen TYPE on page 1080 Interface Type of interface connection used For details on which signal generators support which interfaces see the documenta tion of the...

Page 383: ...V A with the generator default internal Remote command SOURce si EXTernal gen ROSCillator SOURce on page 1080 Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read only mode in an editor Although the existing setup files are displayed in read only mode in the editor they can be saved under a different name using File SaveAs Be careful however to adhere...

Page 384: ...of an external generator Remote command SOURce si EXTernal gen STATe on page 1079 Source Power The output power of the external generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SOURce si EXTernal gen POWer LEVel on page 1078 Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator Values from 200 dB to 200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed The d...

Page 385: ...OURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 1076 Manual Source Frequency Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator Remote command SOURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency on page 1076 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset With automatic frequency coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of...

Page 386: ...nd the start value defined for the R S FSV A Result Frequency Stop For reference only The stop frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R S FSV A Source calibration functions Access INPUT OUPUT External Generator Config Source Calibration tab The calibration functions of the external generator are available only if external ...

Page 387: ...tion Calibrate Reflection Open Starts an open circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both reflection type calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the refer ence trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two cali bration measurements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 1083 Selects t...

Page 388: ...axis range The top of the diagram is 100 the bottom is 0 By default the 0 dB line is displayed at the top of the diagram 100 This setting is only available if normalization is on see Normalization state on page 387 The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However this reference line only affects the...

Page 389: ...t the signal generator output to the RF input connector of the R S FSV A 3 If the signal generator supports TTL synchronization connect the signal generator to the optional Aux Control port 4 If the measurement setup does not require the full span of the R S FSV A change the Frequency Start and Frequency Stop values FREQ key Frequency Config softkey 5 Press the INPUT OUTPUT key and select External...

Page 390: ...Position The measurement setup is now calibrated Subsequent measurement results are normalized so that any unwanted effects from the cables and connectors are removed To define a new generator setup file 1 Press the INPUT OUTPUT key and select External Generator Config 2 In the Interface Configuration subtab select a generator type that has similar characteristics frequency and power ranges 3 Sele...

Page 391: ...ion this effect can be reflected in the display of the normalized trace on the R S FSV A Thus the measured trace and the normalized trace are not so far apart in the display so that you can zoom into the normalized trace without cropping the measurement trace Prerequisite a calibration has been performed for the original measurement setup except for the component causing an additional gain or atte...

Page 392: ...2 Connect the signal generator output to the RF input connector of the R S FSV A 3 Adapt the measurement range of the R S FSV A to the filter to be tested In this measurement define the following settings a Press the FREQ key select Frequency Config and enter Frequency Start 100 MHz b Enter Frequency Stop 300 MHz 4 Press the INPUT OUTPUT key and select External Generator Config 5 In the Interface ...

Page 393: ... all effects from the generator the analyzer and the connecting cables from subsequent measurements with the band elimination filter The reference line is displayed at 0 dB at the top of the diagram 100 Figure 6 9 Normalized measurement results after calibration Measuring the effects of the DUT After calibration we can insert the band elimination filter our DUT in the measurement setup 1 Connect t...

Page 394: ...mination filter results 3 Shift the reference line from the top of the diagram to the middle of the diagram by changing the position of the reference point 0 0 dB to 50 In the Source Calibration tab enter Position 50 At the same time the range of the displayed y axis moves from 100 0 dB to 0 dB to 50 dB to 50 dB Figure 6 11 Reference line shifted to middle of diagram 50 Data input and output ...

Page 395: ...s we will compensate these effects in the result display on the R S FSV A by moving the reference line 1 Connect a 3 dB attenuator between the band elimination filter output and the RF input connector on the R S FSV A The measurement results are now 3 dB lower Figure 6 12 Measurement results with additional attenuator 2 In the Source Calibration tab enter Reference Value 3 dB The reference line is...

Page 396: ...as been shifted you can zoom into the measured trace to determine the offsets to the reference line which represent the effects of the band elimination filter in the measurement setup Change the y axis scaling to 1 dB div or the range to 10 dB a Press the AMPT key then select Scale Config Range b Enter 10 dB Figure 6 14 Reference line with measurement results using larger scale Data input and outp...

Page 397: ...over the required frequency range of the input sig nal at a high cost a single very accurate filter is used Therefore the input signal must be converted to the frequencies covered by the single accurate filter This is done by a mixer which converts and multiplies the frequency of the input signal with the help of the local oscillator LO The result is a higher and lower intermediate frequency IF Th...

Page 398: ...requires By default the pre defined range is used How ever you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the defined start and stop frequencies by the maximum possible values RF Overrange option Additional ranges If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one harmonic the band must be split An adjacent partially overlapping frequency ...

Page 399: ...it current The current is defined in the Bias Settings or set to the value of the conversion loss table See Bias Value on page 413 and Bias on page 416 The voltage U0 at the output of the operational amplifier can be set in the range 3 3 V to 3 3 V An open circuit voltage Ubias of 0 75 V to 0 75 V is obtained accordingly at the output of the voltage divider A short circuit current of Ishort U0 260...

Page 400: ...ure 6 15 Figure 6 15 Conversion loss outside the band s frequency range Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R S FSV A Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conversion loss Table Settings tab of the Exter nal Mixer Configuration dialog box See Managing ...

Page 401: ... INSTR USER cvl backup directory A validation check is then performed on the selected table to ensure that it complies with the settings In particular the following is checked The assigned band name The harmonic order The mixer type The table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the frequency range for the band Reference level The maximum possible reference level depends on the max...

Page 402: ...d to 1 for acl files To each side of the specific frequency 21 reference val ues are defined with an offset of 25 MHz to 1025 MHz Thus correction levels are measured with a spacing of 50 MHz Example For example for the level measured at the frequency 50 GHz 43 correction levels are defined 21 for the frequencies 48 075 GHz 49 125 GHz 49 175 GHz 49 975 GHz 1 for the frequency 50 GHz 21 for the freq...

Page 403: ...quency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance The Auto ID function is now also available for Spectrum emission mask SEM mea surement and Spurious emissions measurement using an external mixer Signal ID function Two sweeps are performed alternately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on ...

Page 404: ... sweep lower side band sweep Function Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Signal ID Signal ID upper side band Signal ID lower side band Auto ID Auto ID Signal ID Auto ID Signal ID upper side band Signal ID lower side band Auto ID Tolerance for the comparison of test sweep and reference Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep the conver sion loss of the mixer may differ from that o...

Page 405: ...ne the frequency range containing a blanked signal in detail using a small span e g an image frequency response part of the signal may nevertheless be displayed This happens when the displayed components of a blanked signal have a level differ ence which is smaller than the user defined threshold when compared with the noise floor These components are therefore not blanked out An unwanted signal w...

Page 406: ... orders The signal recorded in the test sweep was generated by mixing with the 3rd order harmonic Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is compressed by a factor of 2 3 The signal recorded in the reference sweep was generated by mixing with the fundamental of the LO signal Since the frequency axis scaling is based on ...

Page 407: ...Special conversion loss tables in b5g or b2g files cannot be edited within the R S FSV A firmware they can only be imported and deleted See External mixers and large bandwidth extension options on page 401 Mixer settings 407 Basic settings 411 Managing conversion loss tables 413 Creating and editing conversion loss tables 415 Mixer settings Access INPUT OUTPUT External Mixer Config Mixer Settings ...

Page 408: ...l mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 409 Remote command SENSe MIXer x STATe on page 1055 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 Range 2 on page 410 For de...

Page 409: ...requency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 Range 2 on page 410 Remote command SENSe MIXer x HARMonic BAND on page 1059 RF Overrange Sometimes the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger fre quency range than the band requires By default the pre defined range is used How ever you can take advantage of the extended frequency...

Page 410: ...d for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 410 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer x HARMonic TYPE on page 1061 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows...

Page 411: ...le tab For details on conversion loss tables see Conversion loss tables on page 400 For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 414 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer x LOSS LOW on page 1063 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer x LOSS TABLe LOW on page 1062 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer x LOSS HIGH on page 1062 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer x LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 1062 Basic ...

Page 412: ...er the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identi...

Page 413: ...55 Write to CVL table Bias Value Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion Loss Table for the range If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected See Conversion Loss on page 410 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 1064 Managing conversion loss tables Access INPUT OUTPUT External Mixer Config Conversion Loss Table I...

Page 414: ...ctory They can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion Loss on page 410 Note Before copying any files to the C R_S INSTR USER cvl directory the R S FSV A firmware moves any existing user defined cvl tables to a backup subdirectory To use a user defined cvl table later select the file in the C R_S INSTR USER cvl backup directory Note Measurements using bandwidth exten...

Page 415: ...tables Access INPUT OUTPUT External Mixer Config Conversion Loss Table New Table Edit Table Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries File Name 416 Comment 416 Band 416 Harmonic Order 416 Bias 416 Mixer Name 417 Mixer S N 417 Mixer Type 417 Position Value 417 Da...

Page 416: ... checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 12 4 on page 1059 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 1064 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range to which the table applies This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigne...

Page 417: ...values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select an empty space in the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are interpolated Lin ear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it contains more than two re...

Page 418: ... in the C R_S INSTR USER cvl directory of the instrument 6 2 5 3 How to work with external mixers The required tasks to work with external mixers are described step by step To connect a three port mixer on page 418 To connect a two port mixer on page 419 To activate and configure the external mixer on page 419 To define a new conversion loss table on page 420 To shift the conversion loss values on...

Page 419: ...xer The nominal LO level is 15 5 dBm Because of the diplexer contained in the R S FSV A the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer 2 Feed the signal to be measured to the RF input of the external mixer To activate and configure the external mixer 1 Select INPUT Input Source Config External Mixer ON to activate the external mixer for the current appli...

Page 420: ... check when the table is imported 5 Define the reference values for the frequency dependant conversion loss a Select Insert Value to add a new row in the table b Enter the first reference frequency c Enter the corresponding conversion loss value The conversion loss function is updated and displayed in the preview diagram in the dialog box d Repeat these steps to define up to 50 reference values 6 ...

Page 421: ... using a 2 port mixer for the V band The mixer used is a double diode mixer The example of operation is described in the following steps To set up the measurement on page 421 To activate and configure the external mixer on page 422 To take into account the cable loss in the IF path on page 422 To set up the measurement LO OUT IF IN IF IN LO IF RF External Mixer RF INPUT Multiplier Figure 6 19 Exte...

Page 422: ... signal identification using the Auto ID function see also Automatic signal identification on page 403 8 Select Basic Settings Auto ID On to activate automatic signal identification 9 Adapt the tolerance limit by selecting Basic Settings Auto ID Threshold The tol erance limit is set to 5 dB in this example To take into account the cable loss in the IF path On performing level correction the conver...

Page 423: ... LO OUT IF IN IF IN LO IF RF External Mixer RF INPUT Figure 6 20 3 port external mixer test setup 1 Connect the LO port of the external mixer to the LO OUT IF IN connector of the R S FSV A 2 Connect the IF port of the external mixer to the IF IN connector of the R S FSV A 3 Apply a 5G modulated signal with a carrier frequency of 58 GHz to the RF input of the mixer To activate the large analysis ba...

Page 424: ...0112_MAG_4_B5000_3G5 B5G conversion loss table which you imported previously No further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parameters Now you can analyze the broadband signal with an analysis bandwidth of 5 GHz 6 2 6 External frontend control R S FSV3 K553 If the External Frontend Control option R S FSV3 K553 is installed you can control measurements with the R S ...

Page 425: ...between the frontend and the R S FSV A is not as vulnerable to distortion effects and power loss Furthermore since the IF cable is usually part of the fixed setup any existing frequency response can be calculated in advance The R S FSV A can then adapt the actual measurement results automatically A typical application is a test involving a DUT placed in an RF shield box The external frontend is co...

Page 426: ...F B Figure 6 22 Typical setup for multiple instruments connected to one external frontend Exclusive use during specific tasks For specific tasks the external frontend is blocked exclusively for one connected instrument In particular When updating the frontend firmware During initial connection of an instrument to the frontend when the device data is exchanged If such a task is performed while anot...

Page 427: ...e connected frontend for example the available frequency range reference level and attenuation If no frontend is configured yet the configuration set tings become available The channel bar indicates Inp ExtFe In a second step the configured frontend is connected Due to the two step process the frontend can be deactivated temporarily for use by another connected instrument for example if the fronte...

Page 428: ...s always 50 Ω Only external triggers I Q power triggers and periodic time triggers are suppor ted as trigger sources Depending on the bandwidth extension options available on the R S FSV A the maximum I Q bandwidth is 1 GHz If global activation of the external frontend is on but the connection state of the configured frontend is off the R S FSV A application is temporarily on hold It is set up for...

Page 429: ...ings are only available if the external frontend control option R S FSV3 K553 is installed on the R S FSV A They are only available for I Q based applications such as the I Q Analyzer application Global configuration settings 429 Frontend configuration settings 431 Diagnostics 434 Network configuration 435 Global configuration settings Access Overview Input Input Source Config Input Source Externa...

Page 430: ...is set to On It can take up to 10 seconds to determine that LAN connection failed If disabled the connection to the frontend is deactivated temporarily A running mea surement is aborted the measurement results are indicated as invalid The measure ment settings for the R S FSV A remain untouched Remote command SENSe EFRontend fe CONNection STATe on page 1040 SENSe EFRontend fe CONNection CSTate on ...

Page 431: ...re update immediately or abort the connection process and update the firmware on the frontend later In this case the frontend is not available for use with the R S FSV A until you perform the update Remote command SENSe EFRontend fe FWUPdate on page 1048 Frontend configuration settings Access Overview Input Input Source Config Input Source External Frontend Frontend Config In the frontend configur...

Page 432: ...ile 433 Frequency Band Configuration Defines the intermediate frequency output range of the external frontend The used Intermediate Frequency and the resulting Frequency Band that can be ana lyzed on the R S FSV A are indicated for reference The selected frequency band configuration is also indicated in the channel bar FE50DTR type frontends can be used by an analyzer and a signal generator simult...

Page 433: ...00 make sure that the used inter mediate frequency is above 7 5 GHz For FE50DTR type frontends that are used by an analyzer and a signal generator simultaneously make sure that the used intermediate frequency is identical on both instruments Remote command SENSe EFRontend fe FREQuency IFRequency on page 1044 Correction State Activates correction of the IF signal due to cable loss from the frontend...

Page 434: ...ftest 434 Abort Selftest 434 Selftest Results 434 Start Selftest Performs a self test on the frontend to compare the current performance and charac teristic values with the specified values for the frontend Remote command SENSe EFRontend fe SELFtest on page 1048 Abort Selftest Aborts a running self test Remote command SENSe EFRontend fe SELFtest on page 1048 Selftest Results Indicates the results ...

Page 435: ...gs 436 IP Address Defines the IP address of the external frontend If the DHCP server is used DHCP On the setting is read only Remote command SENSe EFRontend fe NETWork on page 1045 Subnet Mask Defines the subnet mask of the external frontend If the DHCP server is used DHCP On this setting is read only Remote command SENSe EFRontend fe NETWork on page 1045 DHCP Switches between DHCP server availabl...

Page 436: ... On the Global Config tab enable general use of the external frontend for the application On The connection settings become available 5 Select the Type of connected frontend 6 Enter the IP address or computer name of the connected frontend The information is indicated on the electronic label on the side panel of the frontend After you enter the IP address the Connection State setting becomes avail...

Page 437: ...6 2 6 4 Troubleshooting external frontend control If problems arise during external frontend control try the following measures to opti mize the connection or setup Error messages If errors occur status messages in the external frontend configuration dialog box and in the status bar of the display inform you about them Query the error message queue using the remote command SYST ERR to determine if...

Page 438: ...ice select the correct external frontend type in the configuration dialog box and reconnect External Frontend x LAN Connection Lost LAN Connection Lost 314 LAN Connection Lost The connection to the external frontend has been lost The analyzer attempts to reconnect periodically Wait for the Connecting message External Frontend x Firmware Update Failed Firmware Update Failed 315 Firmware Update Fail...

Page 439: ...e external frontend check the status bar or error queue of the R S FSV A for error messages see also Error messages on page 437 If no messages are available check the LAN and POWER status LEDs on the external frontend Permanent red lights indicate an error usually hardware problems e g if the fans are off In this case the instrument is automatically put in a safe error state to avoid damage A LAN ...

Page 440: ...ings Access Input Output Output The R S FSV A can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R S FSV A Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters Providing trigger signals as output is described in Chapter 6 2 10 Trigger input output settings on page 443 Providing audio output is described in Chapter 6 2 9 Audio output on page 441 Noise...

Page 441: ...b Defines the type of signal available at the IF and Video output connectors of the R S FSV A For restrictions and additional information see Chapter 6 2 1 3 IF and video signal output on page 356 IF Output State 441 IF Out Frequency 441 Video Output State 441 IF Output State Enables or disables output of the measured IF value at the IF output connector Remote command OUTPut up IF STATe on page 10...

Page 442: ...lated audio signal is output to the AF Out headphones con nector on the front panel of the R S FSV A This connector is only available if the R S FSV3 B3 option is installed Remote command SYSTem SPEaker STATe on page 1099 Type Defines the demodulation mode for output AM FM PM The default setting is AM Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation SELect on page 1220 Squelch Activates o...

Page 443: ...SENSe DEMod SQUelch LEVel on page 1220 Audio Output Volume Sets the volume of the built in loudspeaker for demodulated signals This setting is used for all applications The setting is available in the time domain in Spectrum mode and in Analog Demodu lation mode This connector is only available if the R S FSV3 B3 option is installed The volume is defined as a percentage of the maximum possible vol...

Page 444: ...ont panel Trigger 3 Defines the usage of the variable Trigger 3 Input Output connector on the rear panel Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R S FSV A Trigger input parameters are available in the Trig ger dialog box Output The R S FSV A sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available...

Page 445: ...constant high signal is output to the connector until you select the Send Trigger function Then a low pulse is provided Remote command OUTPut up TRIGger tp LEVel on page 1135 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 1 2 Defines the duration of the pulse pulse width sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut up TRIGger tp PULSe LENGth on page 1136 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 1 2 S...

Page 446: ... con stant output Level setting compare the graphic on the Send Trigger button 6 Connect a device that will receive the trigger signal to the configured Trigger 2 Input Output connector 7 Start a measurement and wait for an internal trigger or select the Send Trigger button The configured trigger is output to the connector 6 3 Frequency and span configuration The frequency and span settings define...

Page 447: ...rrow keys you can move the center frequency in discrete steps through the available frequency range The step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased is defined by the Center Frequency Stepsize The Center Frequency Stepsize also defines the step size by which the value is increased or decreased when you use the rotary knob to change the center frequency however the rotary knob ...

Page 448: ...48 Span 449 Start Stop 449 Full Span 449 Zero Span 449 Last Span 449 Center Frequency Stepsize 450 Frequency Offset 450 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span Frequency and span configuration ...

Page 449: ...art fmax spanmin fmin spanmin fstop fmax fmin fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 1105 SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 1105 Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R S FSV A specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 1105 Zero Span Sets the sp...

Page 450: ...field Marker This setting is only available if a marker is active Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 1103 S...

Page 451: ...the center frequency remains unchanged The search bandwidth and the threshold value are shown in the diagram by red lines which are labeled as TRK Signal Tracking Access Overview Frequency Signal Tracking tab Defines the settings for signal tracking These settings are only available for spans 0 For more details see Chapter 6 3 3 Keeping the center frequency stable signal tracking on page 451 If ac...

Page 452: ...y Config softkey 2 Define the frequency range using one of the following methods Define the Center Frequency and Span Define the Start Frequency and Stop Frequency To perform a measurement in the time domain define the Center Frequency and select the Zero Span button To perform a measurement over the entire available frequency range select the Full Span button To return to the previously set frequ...

Page 453: ... status display Internally the reference level is also used to determine the optimum hardware settings for the R S FSV A The defined reference level should correspond with the maximum expected RF input level When determining the expected input level consider that the power from all input sig nals contribute to the total power The reference level must be higher than the total power from all signals...

Page 454: ...The initial reference level is 2 dBm with no offset Both the displayed reference level and the internal reference level are 2 dBm 2 An offset of 3 dB is defined The displayed reference level is adjusted to 5 dBm The internal reference level remains at 2 dBm 5 dBm displayed ref level 3 dB offset 2 dBm 3 Now the user decreases the reference level to 1 dBm The displayed reference level is adjusted to...

Page 455: ... Scaling In a linear display the measurement values are distributed linearly throughout the grid That means the entire range of measured values is divided by the number of rows in the grid 10 and each row corresponds to 1 10 of the total range Linear scaling is use ful to determine precise levels for a small range of values However if large and small values appear in the same display it is difficu...

Page 456: ...External Frontend Connection State on page 430 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 7 4 1 Amplitude settings on page 1115 Reference Level 456 Shifting the Display Offset 457 Unit 457 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 458 RF Attenuation 458 Attenuation Mode Value 458 Using Electronic Attenuation 459 Input Settings 459 Preamplifier 459...

Page 457: ...fset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R S FSV A so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results are shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal re...

Page 458: ...the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R S FSV A If necessary you can optimize the reference level further Decrease the attenuation level manually to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decrease the reference level in the same way You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time...

Page 459: ...tio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation can be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible The electronic attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps If the electronic attenuation is on the mechanica...

Page 460: ...SV A can correct the results by removing the inherent noise of the analyzer which increases the dynamic range In this case a reference measurement of the inherent noise of the analyzer is carried out The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency r...

Page 461: ...el position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in 0 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Values from 120 to 600 are available Larger values are useful for small scales such as a power range of 10 dB or 20 dB and low signal levels for example 60 dB below the reference level In this case large reference level position values allow you t...

Page 462: ...ng in percentages from 0 to 100 Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SPACing on page 1124 DIS...

Page 463: ...eference list of available RRC and Channel filters 478 6 5 1 Impact of the bandwidth filter and sweep settings The bandwidth filter and sweep settings are closely related and interdependent The values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth depend on the selected filter type In addition these settings have an impact on other measurement parame ters The following equation shows the i...

Page 464: ...recisely in the center of the two signals Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the level drop larger which thus makes the individual signals clearer The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth 1 Hz If the bandwidth is increased the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth Increasing the bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by ap...

Page 465: ... achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Nor mally if the RMS detector is used the Sweep Time should be increased to get more stable traces If an average detector is used the video bandwidth in the hardware is only bypassed if the video filter is set to Auto mode Use this mode to avoid duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW The video bandwid...

Page 466: ...sample signal levels over time at a defined frequency and transform the data to a spectrum by Fast Fourier Transformation FFT Although this measurement method requires additional calculations it can provide results much faster than the frequency sweep in particular for small RBWs Which sweep mode is appropriate for the current measurement depends on the span RBW VBW and Sweep Time settings By defa...

Page 467: ...the narrower the subspan the more steps are required to cover the entire span thus increasing analysis and calculation time To optimize the sweep rate the widest possible subspan depending on the RBW is used For an optimal sweep rate it is recommended that you set the Sweep Time to Auto as well For general purpose measurements an Auto mode is available which provides a compromise between a large d...

Page 468: ...me and thus the longer the Sweep Time must be All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters Normal 3dB Gaussian filters are set by default Some communication standards require different filters For a list of available filter types see Chapter 6 5 3 Reference list of available RRC and Channel filters on page 478 Normal 3 dB Gaussian filters Gaussian filters provide a good compromise b...

Page 469: ...a points and thus the accuracy of the analyzed results However these data points are all stored on the instrument occupying a large amount of memory and each sweep point increases the overall measurement time The number of sweeps to be performed in single sweep mode is defined by the Sweep Count Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count...

Page 470: ...dth filter and sweep settings Access Overview Bandwidth The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 7 3 Configuring bandwidth and sweep settings on page 1107 How to perform a basic sweep measurement is described in Chapter 5 2 2 How to perform a basic sweep measurement on page 136 Figure 6 23 Bandwidth dialog box for RF measurements Bandwidth filter and sweep...

Page 471: ...pan RBW 473 RBW VBW 473 Filter Type 473 Default Coupling 474 Sweep Average Count 474 Sweep Points 474 Optimization 475 Sweep Type 475 FFT Subspans 476 Single Sweep Run Single 476 Continuous Sweep Run Cont 476 Continue Single Sweep 477 Spectrogram Frames 477 Select Frame 477 Continue Frame 477 Frame Count 478 Clear Spectrogram 478 Bandwidth filter and sweep configuration ...

Page 472: ...fines the video bandwidth automatically or manually For more information see Chapter 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the trace using the video band width on page 465 Auto The video bandwidth is coupled to the resolution bandwidth If the resolution bandwidth is changed the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted Manual For manual mode define the bandwidth value The available video bandwidths are specified in t...

Page 473: ...an resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range from 1 to 10000 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio on page 1108 RBW VBW Sets the coupling ratio between the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth This setting is only effective if VBW is set to auto mode For more information see Chapter 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW on page 465 Sine 1 1 Video Bandwidth Resolution Bandwidth Th...

Page 474: ...formation see Chapter 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW on page 465 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO on page 1108 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO on page 1110 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 1114 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is appli...

Page 475: ...ntrol range for the A D converter It is recommended that you set the Sweep Time to Auto to optimize the sweep rate Auto Uses a medium sized subspan to obtain a compromise between a large dynamic range and a fast sweep rate The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is deactivated Note set the reference level accordingly to optimize the control range for the A D converter Note FFT ...

Page 476: ...ps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel However the sweep mode only takes effect the next time the S...

Page 477: ...measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate n CONMeas on page 860 Spectrogram Frames These settings are only available if spectrogram display is active For more information see Chapter 7 5 2 3 How to display and c...

Page 478: ...on page 1153 Clear Spectrogram Spectrogram Frames Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate on page 1152 6 5 3 Reference list of available RRC and Channel filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are availa ble see the...

Page 479: ... kHz CFILter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFILter 16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFILter 21 kHz CFILter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 kHz CFILter APCO 25 P2 30 kHz CFILter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFILter 100 kHz CFILter 150 kHz CFILter FM Radio 192 kHz CFILter PHS 200 kHz CFILter GSM 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFILter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA RF ID 14333 1 MHz...

Page 480: ...the important part or parts of the signal for example bursts Triggering 480 Gating 492 6 6 1 Triggering 6 6 1 1 Triggered measurements In a basic measurement with default settings the sweep is started immediately How ever sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled for example a signal level is exceeded or in certain time intervals For these cases you ca...

Page 481: ...ut Output connec tors on the instrument A signal from a power sensor see Using a power sensor as an external power trigger on page 363 For details on the available trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 486 Trigger offset An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements pre trigger offset Pr...

Page 482: ...level T T T Trigger hysteresis T Trigger on rising edge Trigger on falling edge Figure 6 25 Effects of the trigger hysteresis See Hysteresis on page 490 Trigger drop out time If a modulated signal is instable and produces occasional drop outs during a burst you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again This is called the drop out ...

Page 483: ...ast for the duration of the drop out time as defined above However if a drop out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width this condition cannot be met before the final pulse so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over Drop Out T T T Figure 6 27 Trigger drop out time for falling edge trigger For gated measurements a combination of a falling edge trigger and a drop o...

Page 484: ...igured in a separate tab of the dialog box See Chapter 6 2 10 Trigger input output settings on page 443 For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see Chap ter 6 6 1 4 How to configure a triggered measurement on page 491 Preview 485 Frequency 485 RBW 485 Sweep Time 485 Trigger Source 486 Free Run 486 External Trigger 1 2 486 Video 487 IF Power 487 I Q Power 487 RF Power 48...

Page 485: ... unchanged If preview mode is switched off any changes to the settings in this dialog box are applied to the measurement diagram directly In this case the zero span settings for the preview diagram are not displayed For information on the zero span settings see Center Frequency on page 448 RBW on page 340 Sweep Time on page 472 Frequency Preview Defines the center frequency Remote command SENSe FR...

Page 486: ... and the analysis bandwidth is increased above 400 MHz thus activating the B1000 B600 option the trigger is automatically deactiva ted Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 1129 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 1133 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitly In the Spectrum applicatio...

Page 487: ...third IF represents the start frequency The trigger threshold depends on the defined trigger level as well as on the RF attenuation and preamplifi cation A reference level offset if defined is also considered The trigger bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type For details on avail able trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the instrument data sheet For measure...

Page 488: ...tus bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis If the bandwidth extension option R S FSV3 B1000 B600 is active this trigger is not available for bandwidths 400 MHz Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 1129 SWE EGAT SOUR RFP for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOUR...

Page 489: ... SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 1127 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel VIDeo on page 1128 Repetition Interval Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger The shortest interval is 1 μs The granularity of the repetition interval is 1 256 MHz Set the repetition interval to the exact pulse period burst length frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic If the required interval cannot be s...

Page 490: ...sis on page 481 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 1127 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored For more information see Trigger holdoff on page 483 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 1126 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can ...

Page 491: ...trigger 1 Connect an external device that will provide the trigger signal to one of the Trigger Input Output connectors on the R S FSV A For details see the R S FSV A Getting Started manual 2 In the Trigger And Gate dialog box define the Trigger Source External 3 If you are using the variable Trigger 2 Input Output connector you must define its use as an input connector In the Trigger In Out tab o...

Page 492: ...te settings 496 How to configure a gated measurement 497 6 6 2 1 Gated measurements Like a gate provides an opening in a fence a gated measurement lets data from the input signal pass in defined areas only The gate controls exactly when data is included in the measurement results and when not The gate is opened by the trigger source which is also the gate source Gates can be used in two different ...

Page 493: ...in sweep mode only the Gate Mode Edge is supported Additionally a delay time can be defined so that the first few measurement points after the gate opening are ignored Figure 6 29 Effects of Gate mode Gate delay and Gate length To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep GAT and the gate source is displayed in the channel bar Continuous gating With common gating a measurement is performed each t...

Page 494: ...veral trigger events Continuous gating can also improve the measurement speed as you no longer have to wait for the next external trigger events but can measure several periodic bursts after a single trigger event Settings for continuous gate periods are defined in a separate tab of the Trigger Gate Config dialog box see Chapter 6 6 2 3 Continuous gate settings on page 496 6 6 2 2 Gate settings Ac...

Page 495: ...nts in sweep mode only the Gate Mode Edge is supported For more information see Chapter 6 6 2 1 Gated measurements on page 492 Edge The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the signal edge After the gate signal has been detected the gate remains open until the gate length is over Level The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level After the gate signal has be...

Page 496: ...a continuous gated sweep after a single external trigger is received For details see Continuous gating on page 493 Continuous Gate 496 Gate Period Length 496 Gate Period Count 496 Continuous Gate Activates or deactivates continuous gating This setting is only available if Gated Trigger is On Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe CONTinuous STATe on page 1132 Gate Period Length Defines the length in sec...

Page 497: ...r level is exceeded for example for one or more pulses define Gate Mode Level To measure the signal for a certain time after a level is exceeded for example dur ing a burst a Define Gate Mode Edge b Define the time to measure for each gate Gate Length 4 To open the gate with a time delay for example to ignore an overshoot define a Gate Delay 5 Select Gated Trigger On To configure a continuous gate...

Page 498: ...rigger event Gate Period Count 8 Run a measurement and wait for the external trigger event to occur 6 7 Adjusting settings automatically Access AUTO SET Some settings can be adjusted by the R S FSV A automatically according to the cur rent measurement settings To do so a measurement is performed You can configure this measurement For an active external frontend automatic settings are not available...

Page 499: ... deter mine the required measurement parameters automatically see also Chapter 5 1 Auto measurements on page 134 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 499 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Frequency 499 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 500 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 500 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meas...

Page 500: ...SV A If necessary you can optimize the reference level further Decrease the attenuation level manually to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decrease the reference level in the same way You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 500 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 113...

Page 501: ...nction the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted To avoid frequent adapta tion due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measure ment before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 1138 Show Searc...

Page 502: ...ically as summary tables statistical evaluations etc Thus the result display is highly config urable to suit your specific requirements and optimize analysis Here you can find out how to optimize the display for your measurement results Basic operations concerning the R S FSV A display for example how to use the SmartGrid are described in the R S FSV A Getting Started manual General display settin...

Page 503: ... Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be configured Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 1026 Results TRACe n DATA on page 1162 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table is displayed automatically if configured accordingly Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finge...

Page 504: ...n MARKer m Y on page 1190 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 1026 Spectrogram A spectrogr...

Page 505: ...out of the other windows as well All evaluation methods available for the currently selected measurement are dis played as icons in the evaluation bar If the evaluation bar contains more icons than can be displayed at once on the screen it can be scrolled vertically The same evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon f...

Page 506: ...w would be replaced the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade Positioning the window The screen can be divided into up to four rows Each row can be split into up to four columns where each row can have a different number of columns However rows always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column A single row is available as the drop area for the window in t...

Page 507: ...tkey from the Meas Config menu The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the Close icon in the right hand corner of the toolbar or press any key 7 1 2 3 How to add a new result window Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per channel i e per t...

Page 508: ...e result windows 1 Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the Move icon for an existing evaluation window 2 Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid A blue area shows where the window will be placed 3 Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue 4 Drop the window in the target area The windows are rearranged to the selected layout and Delete and Move icons are displayed in each wind...

Page 509: ...ea surement settings are adapted For example dragging horizontally in a spectrum dis play changes the center frequency Dragging vertically in a spectrum display changes the reference level for absolute scaling These changes are permanent for the mea surement This behavior is also referred to as measurement zoom and is active by default in the new R S FSV A However you can also activate it manually...

Page 510: ...e zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom areas can be moved and resized any time The zoom area that corresponds to the indi vidual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Figure 7 3 Single zoom Figure 7 4 Multiple zoom Using the zoom area to restrict a peak search The selected zoom area can be used to restrict the search range for a peak ...

Page 511: ...enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn STATe on page 1143 DIS...

Page 512: ...e that these settings remain unchanged after a channel preset Level Lock Measurement Zoom If activated default the reference level and thus the attenuation is locked that is remains unchanged during touch gestures on the screen X Lock Measurement Zoom If activated the x axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges tures Y Lock Measurement Zoom If activated the y axis of the diagr...

Page 513: ... new data thus enlarging the display of the remaining data ALL result displays based on the same data analysis region or hop chirp are updated Currently this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application Tip result tables are also re evaluated for each data zoom which can take some time Close the result tables during a data shift zoom to improve the screen update speed 7 2 3 How...

Page 514: ... the bottom of the diagram To return to original display Click on the Zoom Off icon in the toolbar The original trace display is restored Zoom mode remains active however To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram 1 Click on the Multi Zoom icon in the toolbar Multiple zoom mode is activated 2 Select the first area in the diagram to be enlarged as described in To zoom into the diagram at one po...

Page 515: ...re adapted accordingly To maintain a zoomed display permanently Graphical zooming only changes the resolution of the displayed trace points tempora rily In order to change the display permanently you must change the corresponding measurement settings Note Performing a measurement zoom automatically adapts the measurement set tings to reflect a graphically zoomed display see To perform a measuremen...

Page 516: ...s at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame Basics on markers 516 Marker settings 519 Marker search settings and positionin...

Page 517: ...s or via the context menu Tap the marker on the touch screen and hold your finger for about 2 seconds until the context menu is opened then select the required entry Softkeys for active markers displayed on the screen are highlighted blue The softkey for the currently selected marker for which functions are performed is highlighted orange To set individual markers very quickly use the softkeys in ...

Page 518: ... number and is not frozen View mode The next marker to be activated is set to the frequency of the next lower level next peak as a delta marker its value is indicated as an offset to marker 1 A marker can only be activated when at least one trace in the corresponding window is visible If a trace is switched off the corresponding markers and marker functions are also deactivated If the trace is swi...

Page 519: ...he marker information displayed within the diagram area a separate marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram This table provides the following information for all active markers Type Marker type N normal D delta T temporary internal and number Ref Reference marker for delta markers Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned Frame Spectrogram frame the marker is positioned in Displayed only ...

Page 520: ...s are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active Selected Marker 520 Marker State 520 Marker Position X value 521 Frame Spectrogram only 521 Marker Type 521 Reference Marker 521 Linking to Another Marker 521 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 522 Select Marker 522 All Markers Off 522 Selected Marker Marker name T...

Page 521: ...s an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n...

Page 522: ... the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 1176 Select Marker The Select Marker function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or ...

Page 523: ... is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off No separate marker table is displayed If Marker Info is active the marker information is displayed within the diagram area Auto Default If more than two markers are active the marker table is dis played automatically If Marker Info is active the marker information for up to two markers is display...

Page 524: ...t results you can define a fixed reference marker for trace analysis Note that this function is not available in all result displays For State On a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed marked as FXD The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1 and a delta marker to the next peak The fixed reference marker is set to the position of...

Page 525: ... may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings For more information on searching for signal peaks see Chapter 7 3 4 8 Marker peak list on page 550 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 12 8 3 4 Positioning the marker on page 1183 Marker search settings 525 Marker search settings for spectrograms 528 Positioning functions 531 7 3...

Page 526: ...o either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command Chapter 12 8 3 4 Positioning the marker on page 1183 Exclude LO If activated restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions On The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is 5 resolution bandwidth RBW Due to the interference by the first local oscil...

Page 527: ...RKer m MINimum AUTO on page 1185 Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con ditions Search Limits Left Right Search Limits If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered For details on limit lines for searches see Peak search limits on page 550 Remote command CALC...

Page 528: ... only the current sweep results but also the sweep history Thus when searching for peaks you must define the search settings within a single time frame x direction and within several time frames y direction These settings are only available for spectrogram displays Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction 529 Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction 529 Marker Search Type 529 Marker Search Area 53...

Page 529: ...t peak in older frames Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe on page 1193 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe on page 1197 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow on page 1193 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow on page 1198 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT on page 1194 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAX...

Page 530: ...mping to the LO signal at 0 Hz this frequency is excluded from the peak search Off No restriction to the search range The frequency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude on page 1179 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions En...

Page 531: ... on page 1182 Use Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe on page 1181 Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe on page 1180 CALCulate n THReshold STATe on page 1182 7 3 3 ...

Page 532: ... displays define which frame the minimum is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 1186 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 1188 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated For spectrogram displays define which frame the next minimum is to be se...

Page 533: ...er 538 Measuring characteristic bandwidths n db down marker 541 Fixed reference marker 543 Measuring the power in a channel band power marker 544 Demodulating marker values and providing audio output marker demodulation 547 Marker peak list 550 Deactivating all marker functions 554 7 3 4 1 Precise frequency signal count marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Select Marker Function Signal...

Page 534: ... filter the delta must be less than 2 RBW Usually the marker peak function detects a trace point that is close enough However for a large span or a small number of sweep points the result can be inaccurate Signal counting can be performed explicitly at the current marker position Signal Count marker function or implicitly by the R S FSV A for certain functions Signal counting is only possible whil...

Page 535: ...s are performed in the fre quency domain eight points to the right and left of the marker if available are used for the measurement to obtain a stable result Result display Noise density is the noise referred to a bandwidth of 1 Hz With logarithmic amplitude units dBm dBmV dBmµV dBµA the noise power density is output in dBm Hz i e as the level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW With linear a...

Page 536: ...the difference between the average value and the RMS value of white noise With a logarithmic level axis 1 45 dB is added addi tionally Logarithmic averaging is thus fully taken into account which yields a value that is 1 45 dB lower than that of linear averaging To allow for a more stable noise display eight trace points on each side of the mea surement frequency are averaged For span 0 the measur...

Page 537: ... RESult on page 1206 Marker State 537 Marker Type 537 Noise Measurement State 538 Switching All Noise Measurement Off 538 Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 1176 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 1173 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always D...

Page 538: ...nt Off Deactivates noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe STATe on page 1206 7 3 4 3 Phase noise measurement marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Phase Noise Phase Noise Config Or MKR FUNC Select Marker Function Phase Noise Phase Noise Config For each of the 16 markers you can activate a phase noise measurement Phase noise is unintentional ...

Page 539: ...level between the refer ence point and the noise power density It is indicated as the function result of the phase noise marker in the marker table The sample detector is automatically used and the video bandwidth set to 0 1 times the resolution bandwidth RBW The two settings are considered in the correction values used for the noise power measurement To obtain stable results two pixels on the rig...

Page 540: ...page 1209 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 1209 Phase Noise Measurement State 540 Defining Reference Point 541 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off 541 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the dia gram This function is only available for delta markers Marker usage ...

Page 541: ...ase Noise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 1208 7 3 4 4 Measuring characteristic bandwidths n db down marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions n dB down n dB Down Config Or MKR FUNC Select Marker Function n dB down n dB Down Config When characterizing the shape of a signal the bandwid...

Page 542: ...alue n dB down ndB down Bw PWid Determined bandwidth or pulse width zero span at the offset Q factor Center frequency n dB down bandwidth Quality factor of the determined bandwidth characteristic of damping or resonance T1 T2 Current position and level of the temporary markers If the required position for the temporary markers cannot be determined uniquely for example due to noise dashes are displ...

Page 543: ... MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 1216 7 3 4 5 Fixed reference marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Reference Fixed Or MKR FUNC Select Marker Function Reference Fixed Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis Once positioned the reference marker does not move duri...

Page 544: ...Power Config or MKR FUNC Select Marker Function Band Power To determine the noise power in a transmission channel you can use a noise marker and multiply the result with the channel bandwidth However the results are only accu rate for flat noise Band power markers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span band around a marker similar to ACP measurements By default 5 of the curre...

Page 545: ... absolute power at a single point if the reference marker is not a band power marker or the power in a band if the reference marker is a band power marker itself If the reference marker for the band power marker is also a delta marker the absolute power level for the reference marker is used for calculation Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements not zero span in ...

Page 546: ... changed in the Marker Function dialog box are also changed in the Marker dialog box and vice versa Remote commands Example measuring the power in a channel using band power markers on page 1227 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 1211 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 1210 Band Power Measurement State 546 Span 547 Power Mode 547 Switching All Band Power Measuremen...

Page 547: ...solute power level The power unit depends on the Unit setting Relative Power This setting is only available for a delta band power marker The result is the difference between the absolute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker see Reference Marker on page 337 The powers are sub tracted logarithmically so the result is a dB value Relative band powe...

Page 548: ...dulation can be activated continuously i e audio output occurs regardless of the marker position and the marker stop time For measurements in the time domain zero span demodulation is always continuous Optionally a minimum level Squelch Level can be defined so that the signal is only demodulated when it exceeds the set level This is useful during continuous demodula tion to avoid listening to nois...

Page 549: ... ted signal For zero span measurements demodulation is always active continuously regardless of the marker stop time Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff on page 1219 Modulation Defines the demodulation mode for output The default setting is AM Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation SELect on page 1220 Squelch Activates or deactivates the squelch fun...

Page 550: ...ca tions Setting a marker to a peak value once Peak Search Searching for a peak value within a restricted search area Search Limits Creating a marker table with all or a defined number of peak values for one sweep Marker Peak List Updating the marker position to the current peak value automatically after each sweep Auto Peak Search Creating a fixed reference marker at the current peak value of a t...

Page 551: ...nal 1 80 dB 2 80 dB 3 55 dB 4 39 dB 5 32 dB To eliminate the smaller peaks M3 M4 and M5 in the example above a peak excur sion of at least 60 dB is required In this case the amplitude must rise at least 60 dB before falling again before a peak is detected Marker peak list The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum It is updated automatically after each swee...

Page 552: ...ds to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting Using a peak as a fixed reference marker Some results are analyzed in relation to a peak value for example a carrier frequency level In this case the maximum level can be determined by an initial peak search and then be used as a reference point for further measurement results Remote commands Example obtaining a marker peak...

Page 553: ...eak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB For Analog Modulation Analysis the unit and value range depend on the selected result display type Remote command CALCulate n M...

Page 554: ...mands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 12 8 3 Working with markers on page 1170 When you need to analyze a characteristic point in the signal in more detail the follow ing procedure can be helpful 1 Perform a peak search to determine the characteristic point roughly by pressing the Peak Search key 2 If the required signal point is not the maximum continue the peak search t...

Page 555: ...efault the current peak value of trace 1 is set Set the fixed reference marker to the current peak value by selecting the Peak Search button in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box Move the FXD display lines that define the position of the fixed reference marker by dragging them on the screen How to Assign a Fixed Reference Marker to Delta Markers 1 In the Marker dialog box select the ho...

Page 556: ...r currently running measurement when the sweep reaches the marker position the demodulated signal is output as an audio signal via the head phones for the given duration Or depending on the configuration the demodula ted signal is continuously output via the headphones if the signal level exceeds the squelch level 7 3 5 4 How to export a peak list You can save the results of a marker peak list to ...

Page 557: ...m Procedure 1 Preset the R S FSV A 2 Set the center frequency to 128 MHz 3 Set the span to 100 kHz 4 Select Auto Level The R S FSV A displays the reference signal with a span of 100 kHz and resolu tion bandwidth of 1 kHz 5 Switch on the marker by pressing the MKR key The marker is positioned on the trace maximum 6 Set the measured signal frequency and the measured level as reference values a Press...

Page 558: ... the UP key The center frequency is set to the 2nd harmonic 9 Select Auto Level to ensure the R S FSV A measures the harmonics with a high sensitivity 10 Place the delta marker on the 2nd harmonic in the Marker To menu select the Peak softkey The delta marker moves to the maximum of the 2nd harmonic The displayed level result is relative to the reference point level fundamental wave level The othe...

Page 559: ...onstant level values It is not possible to check automati cally whether the points are below or above the marked level values use limit lines for that task see Chapter 7 4 2 1 Basics on limit lines on page 561 Two different types of display lines are provided Two horizontal lines Horizontal Line 1 and Horizontal Line 2 These lines are continuous horizontal lines across the entire width of a diagra...

Page 560: ...Horizontal Line 2 Activates a horizontal display line H1 or H2 in the diagram at the specified point of the y axis Remote command CALCulate n DLINe dl on page 1230 CALCulate n DLINe dl on page 1230 7 4 1 3 Defining display lines 1 Display lines are configured in the Lines Config dialog box To display this dialog box press the Lines key and then Lines Config 2 Select the Display Lines tab 3 To defi...

Page 561: ...imit lines with a maximum of 200 data points Eight of the limit lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously The number of limit lines stored in the instrument is only limited by the capacity of the storage device used Limit line data can also be exported to a file in ASCII CSV format for further evalua tion in other applications Limit lines stored in the specified ASCII CSV form...

Page 562: ...is almost reached The margin is not indicated by a separate line in the display but if it is violated a warning is displayed Margins are defined as lines with a fixed distance to the limit line To check the signal for maximum levels you must define an upper limit whereas to check the signal for minimum levels you must define a lower limit Limits can be defined relative to the reference level the b...

Page 563: ...upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally or vertically Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points changes the line configuration thus changing the position of the line in the dia gram Limit Check Results A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated Visibility setting Only the specified Traces to ...

Page 564: ...mmon analysis and display functions R S FSVA3000 R S FSV3000 564 User Manual 1178 8520 02 08 Figure 7 9 Margin violation for limit check Figure 7 10 Limit violation for limit check Display and limit lines ...

Page 565: ...e limit line values After recalling measurement settings the limit line values applied to the measurement may be different to those displayed in the Limit Lines dialog box see Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings on page 638 7 4 2 2 Limit line settings and functions Access Overview Analysis Lines or LINES Line Config Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R S...

Page 566: ...ed for the current measurement For details on settings for individual lines see Limit line details on page 568 For more basic information on limit lines see Chapter 7 4 2 1 Basics on limit lines on page 561 Name 566 Unit 567 Compatibility 567 Visibility 567 Traces to be Checked 567 Comment 567 Included Lines in Overview View Filter 567 Show Lines for all Modes 567 X Offset 567 Y Offset 568 Create ...

Page 567: ...of the Traces to be Checked violate any of the active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk on page 1244 Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show Com patible Only compatible lines Whether a line is compatible or not is ind...

Page 568: ...mand CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer OFFSet on page 1237 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer OFFSet on page 1241 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li COPY on page 1243 Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulat...

Page 569: ...1 Export 571 File Explorer 572 Name Defines the limit line name All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names The limit line data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li NAME on page 1239 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li COMMent on page 1233 Threshold Defines an absolute thre...

Page 570: ...y of the diagram is used as the refer ence Scaling linear or logarithmic Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer MODE on page 1236 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MODE on page 1240 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DOMain on page 1234 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol SPACing on page 1235 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings L...

Page 571: ... data point vertically by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see Y Offset on page 568 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer SHIFt on page 1237 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer SHIFt on page 1241 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field Import Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the limit line f...

Page 572: ...ements on page 273 It is strongly recommended that you define limits only via the Sweep List dialog for these measurements not using the Lines key Any changes to the special limit lines are automatically overwritten when the sweep list settings are changed The following tasks are described here How to find compatible limit lines on page 572 How to activate and deactivate a limit check on page 573 ...

Page 573: ...it existing limit lines Existing limit line configurations can be edited 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the Edit button 3 Edit the line configuration as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 574 4 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button If the limit line is active the edited limit line is displayed in the diagram How to copy an exist...

Page 574: ...data point d Repeat this to insert all other data points To insert a data point before an existing one select the data point and then Insert Value To insert a new data point at the end of the list move the focus to the line after the last entry and then select Insert Value To delete a data point select the entry and then Delete Value 6 Check the current line configuration in the preview area of th...

Page 575: ...ed in the diagram How to export a limit line Limit line configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other programs or to be imported later for other measurements 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the New or Edit button 3 Define the limit line as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 574 4 Select Export to save the configuration to a...

Page 576: ...limit line on page 575 This reference describes in detail the format of the export import files for limit lines Note that the bold data is mandatory all other data is optional Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal separator to be used see Deci mal Separator on page 616 Table 7 2 ASCII file format for...

Page 577: ...ine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen Standard traces 577 Spectrograms 592 Trace math 610 7 5 1 Standard traces 7 5 1 1 Basics on setting up traces Some background knowledge on traces is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector 577 X value of the sweep point 581 Analyzing seve...

Page 578: ...sitive Peak Pk Determines the largest of all positive peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Negative Peak Mi Determines the smallest of all negative peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Auto Peak Ap Combines the peak detectors determines the maximum and the minimum...

Page 579: ...ipeak detector displays the maximum signal level weighted to CISPR 16 1 1 that was detected during the dwell time This detector is only available for the CISPR filter and only if the R S FSV3 EMI measurement option K54 is installed Note the Restrictions for the R S FSV A using CISPR detectors on page 327 The quasipeak detector is not available for an RBW of 1 MHz CISPR Aver age detector CISPR AV T...

Page 580: ...sed for different traces RMS detector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to ach ieve more stable trace curves...

Page 581: ...s The distance between two sweep points is span no_sweep_points 1 Bin centered This is the default method for all marker values The full measurement span is divided by the number of sweep points The result is the span that is evaluated for an individ ual sweep point also referred to as a bin The x value of the sweep point is then defined as the x value at the center of the bin bin 2 video signal s...

Page 582: ...marker values and trace values using the start stop method Analyzing several traces trace mode If several sweep are performed one after the other or continuous sweep are per formed the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is processed After each sweep the trace mode determines whether The data is frozen View The data is hidden Blank The data is replaced by new values Clear Writ...

Page 583: ... of averaging procedures This mode is not available for statistics measurements View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed If a trace is frozen View mode the measurement settings apart from scaling set tings can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the dis played trace no longer matches the current measurement settings is indicated by a yel low...

Page 584: ...rent sweep n 2 sweep count No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value is stored in the trace memory With increasing n the displayed trace is increasingly smoothed since there are more individual sweeps for averaging After the selected number of sweeps the average trace is saved in the trace mem ory Until this number of sweeps is reached a preliminary average is displaye...

Page 585: ... Filter VBW is a hardware based method of smoothing the trace see also Chapter 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the trace using the video bandwidth on page 465 However other sweep and bandwidth settings can be coupled to the VBW For some signals a VBW may not be freely selectable to obtain the required smoothing effect Therefore a software based trace smoothing function is also availa ble Software based smoothin...

Page 586: ...ings Access Overview Analysis Traces Or TRACE Trace Config You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces For settings on spectrograms see Chapter 7 5 2 2 Spectrogram settings on page 601 Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see Chapter 7 6 2 Trace data ex import on page 614 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 587 Trace Mode 58...

Page 587: ... trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to PositivePeak This mode is not available for statistics measurements Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R S FSV A saves each trace point in the trace mem ory only if the new value is lower than the previous one The Detector is...

Page 588: ...t FUNCtion AUTO on page 1150 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started again after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false ...

Page 589: ... scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Power Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt before averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes correctly In particular for small VBW values smaller th...

Page 590: ...Peak Traces 4 6 Blank Auto Detector Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t PRESet on page 1147 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace For details see Chapter 7 5 1 3 How to configure a standard trace on page 591 Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t STATe on page 1147 Copy Trace Access Overvi...

Page 591: ...s whose State is enabled Enable the state and enter a trace label Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t LABel STATe on page 1144 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t LABel TEXT on page 1145 7 5 1 3 How to configure a standard trace Step by step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 7 5 1 2 Trace settings on page 586 The ...

Page 592: ...TRACE key and then the Trace Copy softkey Select Analysis from the Overview then select the Trace Copy tab 2 Select the Source trace to be copied 3 Select the Copy to Trace button for the trace to which the settings are to be applied The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace The newly configured trace if not set to Blank is displayed after the next sweep 7 5 2 Spectro...

Page 593: ...al does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e vertically The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 Figure 7 15 Screen layout of the spectrogram result display 1 Spectrum result display 2 Spectrogram result displa...

Page 594: ...lected detector See Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector on page 577 Frames are sorted in chronological order beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram frame number 0 With the next sweep the previous frame is moved further down in the diagram until the maximum number of captured frames is reached The display is updated continuously during the meas...

Page 595: ...o create the second frame As you can see increasing the sweep count increases the accuracy of the individual traces while increasing the frame count increases the number of traces in the diagram Especially for Average or Min Hold and Max Hold trace modes the number of sweeps that are analyzed to create a single trace has an effect on the accuracy of the results Thus you can also define whether the...

Page 596: ...you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame Special search functions are p...

Page 597: ...pectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame By default the most recently recorded frame frame 0 is selected and added at the front of the diagram Rotating the spectrogram in three dimensions Depending on which aspect of the spectrogram is currently of interest you can rotate the display to have a closer look at the frequency the time or the power dimension Simply ...

Page 598: ... position on all axes Sometimes a marker can be hidden by other frames If necessary rotate the spectro gram or select a different frame as the current frame Color maps Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors to visualize them The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to yo...

Page 599: ...pe and focus of the color curve The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever to visualize a certain area of the value range in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of th...

Page 600: ...Bm is covered by red yellow and a few shades of green Figure 7 17 Spectrogram with default linear color curve shape 0 The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors After shifting the color curve to the left negative value more colors cover the range from 100 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow This range occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the other h...

Page 601: ...gs on page 604 Settings concerning the frames and how they are handled during a sweep are provided as additional sweep settings for spectrogram display See Chapter 6 5 Bandwidth filter and sweep configuration on page 463 Search functions for spectrogram markers are described in Chapter 7 3 3 2 Marker search settings for spectrograms on page 528 General spectrogram settings 601 Color map settings 6...

Page 602: ... 604 Clear Spectrogram 604 State Activates and deactivates a Spectrogram subwindow Off Closes the Spectrogram subwindow Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram LAYout on page 1154 3D Spectrogram State Activates and deactivates a 3 dimensional spectrogram As opposed to the common 2 dimensional spectrogram the power is not only indicated by a color mapping but also in a third dimension the z axis For...

Page 603: ... with the new data Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram HDEPth on page 1154 3 D Display Depth Defines the number of frames displayed in a 3 dimensional spectrogram For details see Three dimensional spectrograms on page 596 Time Stamp Activates and deactivates the timestamp The timestamp shows the system time while the measurement is running In single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped the tim...

Page 604: ... Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel However the sweep mode only takes effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case the Sequencer sweeps a channel in single sweep mode only once Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individ...

Page 605: ...and stop sliders define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram 6 Color curve slider adjusts the focus of the color curve 7 Histogram shows the distribution of measured values 8 Scale of the horizontal axis value range Start Stop 605 Shape 605 Hot Cold Radar Grayscale 606 Auto 606 Set to Default 606 Close 606 Start Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range...

Page 606: ... are provided here For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 7 5 2 2 Spectro gram settings on page 601 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 12 8 2 2 Configuring spectrograms on page 1151 The following tasks are described here To display a spectrogram on page 606 To remove the spectrogram display on page 607 To set a marker in the spectrog...

Page 607: ...R key 2 Select a Marker softkey 3 Enter the frequency or time x value of the marker or delta marker 4 Enter the frame number for which the marker is to be set for example 0 for the cur rent frame or 2 for the second to last frame Note that the frame number is always 0 or a negative value The marker is only visible in the spectrum diagram if it is defined for the currently selected frame In the spe...

Page 608: ...t a color scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values In the Color Mapping dialog box select the option for the color scheme to be used Editing the value range of the color map The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the Color Map ping dialog box To cover the entire measurement value range make sure the first and last bar of the histogram a...

Page 609: ...r 10 in the Start field The R S FSV A shifts the start point 10 to the right to 90 dBm Adjusting the reference level and level range Since the color map is configured using percentages of the total value range changing the reference level and level range of the measurement and thus the power value range also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram Editing the shape of the color curve The colo...

Page 610: ... of the curve A negative value 1 to 0 focuses the lower values 0 defines a linear distribution A positive value 0 to 1 focuses the higher values 7 5 3 Trace math Access TRACE Trace Math If you have several traces with different modes for example an average trace and a maximum trace it may be of interest to compare the results of both traces In this example you could analyze the maximum difference ...

Page 611: ...acts trace 4 from trace 1 T1 T5 T1 Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 T1 T6 T1 Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1 To switch off the trace math use the Trace Math Off button Remote command CALCulate n MATH t EXPRession DEFine on page 1159 CALCulate n MATH t STATe on page 1160 Trace Math Off Deactivates any previously selected trace math functions Remote command CALC MATH STAT OFF see CALCulate n MATH t STA...

Page 612: ...wer level values are converted into unit Watt prior to subtrac tion After the subtraction the data is converted back into its original unit Unlike the linear mode the subtraction is always done in W Remote command CALCulate n MATH t MODE on page 1159 7 6 Importing and exporting measurement results for evaluation The R S FSV A provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed mea...

Page 613: ...points per x value Auto Peak but the file contains only one each point is duplicated If the detector type requires only one point per x value but the file contains two each second point is ignored If the file contains more sweep points than the active trace requires the superfluous points are ignored If the file does not contain enough sweep points the missing points are inserted as 200 dBm Units ...

Page 614: ...before import Only trace 1 is imported to the spectrogram Any other traces may be imported to a Spectrum display if available However they do not change the spectrogram dis play which always refers to trace 1 A single spectrum is inserted as a new frame number 0 The trace mode is not changed to View as for Spectrum trace imports 7 6 2 Trace data ex import Access TRACE Trace Config Trace Data Expor...

Page 615: ...Result Summary marker table etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 1165 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Inc...

Page 616: ...eep points to obtain bins The x value of the sweep point is defined as the x value at the center of the bin bin 2 Start Stop Default The x value of the first sweep point corresponds to the starting point of the full measurement span The x value of the last sweep point corresponds to the end point of the full measurement span All other sweep points are divided evenly between the first and last poin...

Page 617: ...application see Chapter 7 6 6 Refer ence ASCII file export format on page 621 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a memory limit reached error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location ...

Page 618: ... comma or a tabulator tab Example for semicolon Type FSV3007 Version 1 80 Date 01 Jan 3000 Example for comma Type FSV3007 Version 1 80 Date 01 Jan 3000 Example for tabulator tab after the last column is not visible Type FSV3007 Version 1 80 Date 01 Jan 3000 The selected column separator setting remains the same even after a preset Remote command FORMat DEXPort CSEParator on page 1164 File Explorer...

Page 619: ...e command not supported 7 6 3 How to import traces Trace data that was stored during a previous measurement can be imported to the Spectrum application for example as a reference trace To import trace data 1 Press the Trace key 2 Select Trace Config Trace Data Export Import 3 Select Import All Traces to import traces for all the currently active traces or select a specific trace to be imported in ...

Page 620: ...t file 6 If necessary change the decimal separator for the ASCII export file 7 Select the data format of the ASCII file 8 Select Save to close the dialog box and export the data to the file 7 6 5 How to export a peak list You can save the results of a marker peak list to an ASCII file 1 Press the MKR FUNCT key 2 Select the Marker Peak List softkey 3 Configure the peak search and list settings as d...

Page 621: ... condi tion applies The combinations of condition and actions are called rules Each applica tion individually specifies its own set of rules Triggering conditions are referred to as events Typical examples are exceeding or going below a limit value the non viola tion of a limit line hitting a marker value etc The range of actions includes taking a screenshot starting a separate program saving I Q ...

Page 622: ...iggered 623 New Rule 623 Edit Rule 623 Copy Rule 623 Delete Rule 623 Show Journal 623 Rule state Enables disables processing of the defined rule for the currently active channel only Note that the application does not perform a validity check on the rules For example if you change or delete the required command file for a rule the rule becomes invalid However the application still attempts to proc...

Page 623: ... based action rule Show Journal Shows the logging information for the rules defined in the EBA rule manager This information is useful to debug rules when expected actions are not performed For details see Chapter 7 7 3 Debugging rules with the EBA Journal on page 629 7 7 2 Defining rules Access Event based actions New Rule Edit Rule Copy Rule Rules are defined individually for each measurement ch...

Page 624: ... Trigger condition Marker value is 626 Value 626 Result Value 626 Result 626 Trigger condition Value is 626 Value 626 State Value 626 Result 626 Trigger condition Check for 626 Action 627 Store Screenshot 627 Storage location Browse 627 File name 627 Format 627 Stop Cont Sweep 627 Deactivate Rule 627 Auto Level 628 Trace Export 628 Browse 628 Mode 628 I Q Export 628 Start Program Script 629 Type 6...

Page 625: ... a limit line that is defined for the current measurement channel see Chapter 7 4 2 Limit lines on page 561 The limit line must be active in the current measurement channel for the rule to be pro cessed Trigger condition Limit Line Event The result of the limit check Pass Fail Margin that triggers the actions Window Limit Line Event Window in which the specified limit line is evaluated Marker Y Po...

Page 626: ...nd state events on page 631 Result Result Value Event The measurement result whose value is evaluated see also Chapter 7 7 4 Refer ence overview of available result events and state events on page 631 Trigger condition Value is Result Value Event The relation of the result value to the specified value greater than lower than that triggers the actions Value Result Value Event Value with which the r...

Page 627: ...cessary a consecutive num ber is added to the specified file name to create unique file names Placeholders can be inserted in square brackets to create generic file names The placeholders are replaced by current values at the time the screenshot is created The following placeholders are supported Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Date Year Month Day Time Hour Minute Second Example The definition S...

Page 628: ...olders are supported Date Year Month Day Time Hour Minute Second Browse Trace Export Action Opens a file selection dialog box to select the directory for exported traces Mode Trace Export Action Defines whether all traces or only user defined traces are exported as defined in Trace Trace export settings I Q Export Action Stores the current I Q data to the specified file Only available for I Q base...

Page 629: ...ed invalid not available file names are indicated by red font Add Action Adds another action to be taken when the specified events occur You can define up to 3 different actions The order in which the actions are defined is irrelevant If several actions are scheduled due to one or more rules the actions are performed in the following order if specified 1 Store Screenshot 2 Auto Level 3 Start Progr...

Page 630: ...n on possibly unexpected results due to conflicting rule def initions for example if an Auto Level action causes the EBA man ager to pause execution of further actions ERR Errors concerning failed rules for example due to missing action command or invalid trigger event Refresh Updates the journal display to include the latest information since journal was opened or last updated Clear Clears all cu...

Page 631: ...esult and state events Measurement Results States Channel power ACLR Channel Power ACLR Tx Total Channel Power ACLR Channel Power ACLR Tx 1 n Channel Power ACLR Adj Lower Channel Power ACLR Adj Upper Channel Power ACLR Alt 1 n Lower Channel Power ACLR Alt 1 n Upper Carrier to Noise C N C N0 OBW OBW Occ BW OBW Occ BW Freq Offset Statistics APD Crest TRC 1 6 CCDF Crest TRC 1 6 Spectrum Emission Mask...

Page 632: ...e of the sweep type FFT as opposed to Auto in Sweep mode the averaging effect of the RMS detector may be less efficient When performing multiple measurements use multiple channels to switch between measurements rather than changing the settings within one channel repeatedly Take advantage of the Sequencer function to switch between multiple measure ments automatically or continuously see also Chap...

Page 633: ...weep time leads to more data to be averaged and thus stabilizes the results In FFT mode a higher sweep time means more FFTs are calculated and combined per bin Thus in the same capture time the FFT mode with an RMS detector can provide bet ter results than an averaged trace Improving averaging results ...

Page 634: ...measurement results and settings 653 Working with test reports 668 9 1 Restoring the default instrument configuration pre set When delivered the R S FSV A has a default configuration You can restore this defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements This is often recommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement results arise Factory default c...

Page 635: ...assified data it may contain Redirecting storage to volatile memory Alternatively to avoid storing any sensitive data on the R S FSV A permanently the secure user mode was introduced option R S FSV3 K33 In secure user mode the instrument s solid state drive is write protected so that no information can be written to memory permanently Data that the R S FSV A normally stores on the solid state driv...

Page 636: ...me and due to temperature changes Therefore to achieve optimal accuracy it can be preferable to perform a new self alignment at the start of each new session on the R S FSV A Restricted operation Since permanent storage is not possible the following functions are not available in secure user mode Firmware update Activating a new option key Furthermore since the SecureUser used in secure user mode ...

Page 637: ...hen another user logs on The SecureUser is no longer available For users with administrator rights the secure user mode setting is available in the general system configuration settings see SecureUser Mode on page 748 Remote control Initially after installation of the R S FSV3 K33 option secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible See SYSTem SECurity STATe Manu...

Page 638: ...ld remain valid after every recall of that save set Thus even if the transducer file is changed and the original save set file is recalled later the originally stored transducer values are recalled and applied to the measurement In the Edit transducer dialog box however the changed transducer file values are displayed as no updated trans ducer file was loaded The same applies to limit line setting...

Page 639: ... 9 3 2 1 Stored data types on page 641 Source calibration files for an optional external generator if available are included Saving instrument settings in secure user mode Settings that are saved via Quick Save in secure user mode are stored to the SDRAM and are only available during the current session As soon as the power is switched off on the R S FSV A the data is cleared see Chapter 3 2 15 Pr...

Page 640: ...d At the time of storage the QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 placeholder is replaced by a label indicating the storage date and time and the storage type Right click on one of the QuickSave buttons to display a context menu with additional functions for the save set During recall save sets of type Instrument replace the settings of the entire instru ment All other save sets start a new channel with the s...

Page 641: ...y selected measurement Channel s are stored Recall Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file If the settings file contains settings for a specific Channel only a new channel with the stored set tings is activated otherwise all Channel s and instrument settings are overwritten with the stored settings Note After you use the Recall function the history of previous actio...

Page 642: ...nstrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode all data is stored to the SDRAM and is only available during the current session As soon as the power is switched off on the R S FSV A the data is cleared see Chapter 3 2 15 Protecting data using the secure user mode on page 55 Other storage locations cannot be selected in this mode The storage location and filename are selected in a file ...

Page 643: ...or the SEM settings files is C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSV3000 version sem_std Note Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a memory limit reached error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently s...

Page 644: ...ther the global instrument settings with all Channel s are stored or recalled or the current Channel settings only Items Defines which data and settings are stored or are recalled Depending on the File Type either channels only or global settings are available Which items are available also depends on the installed options see also Chapter 9 3 2 1 Stored data types on page 641 Remote command MMEMo...

Page 645: ...settings as saved in the selected settings file If the settings file contains settings for a specific Channel only select Recall in New Channel to activate a new channel with the stored settings Select Recall in Current Channel to replace the current Channel settings Note After you use the Recall function the history of previous actions is deleted i e any actions performed previously cannot be und...

Page 646: ...ecall function not Channel files Remote command MMEMory LOAD AUTO on page 1260 Selecting Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSV3000 version sem_std Note Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode settings that...

Page 647: ...d instrument settings Instrument settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later so that you can repeat the measurement with the same settings Optionally user defined measurement settings can automatically be restored each time you start or preset the instrument To save and recall instrument settings using the Quick Save function 1 Select the Save icon from the toolbar 2 Select whether the ...

Page 648: ... to save the settings again Otherwise those settings cannot be restored and will be overwritten by the stored values when the configuration file is recalled To recall configurable instrument settings 1 Select the Open icon from the toolbar 2 In the Recall dialog box switch to the Recall tab 3 In the file selection dialog box select the filename and storage location of the set tings file Note The F...

Page 649: ...on methods for the results of the performed measurements However you may want to evaluate the data with further external applications In this case you can export the measurement data to a standard format file ASCII or XML Some of the data stored in these formats can also be re imported to the R S FSV A for further evaluation later for example in other applications The following data types can be e...

Page 650: ...R S FSV A I Q Analyzer user manual for more information I Q data can only be imported by applications that process I Q data via the I Q File input source For more information about importing I Q data files see the user manual of the I Q analyzer Export Access Save Recall Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Saves the selected trace or all traces in the ...

Page 651: ...ectrum application see Chapter 7 6 6 Refer ence ASCII file export format on page 621 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a memory limit reached error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage lo...

Page 652: ...r a semicolon a comma or a tabulator tab Example for semicolon Type FSV3007 Version 1 80 Date 01 Jan 3000 Example for comma Type FSV3007 Version 1 80 Date 01 Jan 3000 Example for tabulator tab after the last column is not visible Type FSV3007 Version 1 80 Date 01 Jan 3000 The selected column separator setting remains the same even after a preset Remote command FORMat DEXPort CSEParator on page 116...

Page 653: ...Q Export Export Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer Remote command not supported 9 5 Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings To document the graphical results and the most important settings for the currently per formed measurement you can create a screenshot of the current display Screenshots can either be printed or stored to a file Print and screenshot settings 65...

Page 654: ...s 663 9 5 1 1 Print content settings Access Print Print Config Content tab The content settings determine which data is included in the printout Note that some content settings are independent of the selected printing device others are printing device specific Print Screenshot 655 Print Multiple Windows 655 Comment 655 Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings ...

Page 655: ... option is only available when printing on a printer or to a PDF file see Destina tion on page 660 If the Destination is currently set to an image file or the clipboard for the selected printing device it is automatically changed to be a PDF file Remote command HCOPy CONTent on page 1265 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 STATe on page 1274 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe on page 1272 Comment Defines an op...

Page 656: ...selected printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R S FSV A Print Dialog Includes any currently displayed dialog in the screenshot printout This setting is printing device specific and only available if Print Screenshot is selected Print Date and Time Includes or removes the current date and time at the bottom of the printout This setting is printing device specific Remote co...

Page 657: ...ut 657 Fit Page 658 Zoom 1 1 658 Page Up Page Down 658 Print 658 Zoom In Zoom Out Zooms into enlarges or zooms out of decreases the preview display Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview not the printout itself Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings ...

Page 658: ...croll within the preview to see the individual pages Print Starts to print or store the selected screen contents to a file see Chapter 9 5 1 1 Print content settings on page 654 Whether the output is sent to the printer or stored in a file or the clipboard depends on the selected printing device and the printing device settings see Chapter 9 5 1 3 Printer settings on page 658 If the output is stor...

Page 659: ...switch between configura tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing Select Device 1 2 659 Destination 660 Destination File 660 Destination Clipboard 660 Destination Printer 660 Suppress File Name Dialog 660 Printer Name 660 Print to file 661 Install Printer 661 Select Device 1 2 Selects the printing device to be configured Creating screenshots of current measurement re...

Page 660: ... destination not multiple windows see Chap ter 9 5 1 1 Print content settings on page 654 Page settings are not available how ever you can configure the colors used for the screenshot see Chapter 9 5 1 5 Print color settings on page 663 If you select the clipboard as the printing destination the content setting is automati cally set to Print Screenshot Remote command HCOP DEST1 SYSTem COMMunicate ...

Page 661: ...To disable HCOP DEST1 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter Install Printer This softkey opens the standard Windows dialog box to install a new printer All print ers that are already installed are displayed Only user accounts with administrator rights can install a printer For further information refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation 9 5 1 4 Page setup Access Print Print Config Page Setup tab Creating...

Page 662: ... 2 on page 1272 Windows Per Page Defines how many windows are displayed on a single page of the printout This setting is only available if Print Multiple Windows is active see Chapter 9 5 1 1 Print content settings on page 654 If more than one window is printed on one page each window is printed in equal size Remote command HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 COUNt on page 1273 Scaling Determines the scaling of...

Page 663: ...MARGin 1 2 RIGHt on page 1271 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 TOP on page 1271 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 UNIT on page 1272 9 5 1 5 Print color settings Access Print Print Config Color tab The settings provided here are identical to those in the Print Colors section of the Display Theme Color dialog box See Print Colors on page 698 Creating screenshots of current measurement results and settings ...

Page 664: ...e Printer tool in the toolbar The Print Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select Device 1 or Device 2 to define which printing device you want to config ure Note Some settings are independent of the printing device 3 In the Content tab define the elements of the screen and additional information to be included in the printout a Select Print Screenshot to include all elements displayed on the scre...

Page 665: ... to execute the print function To store a printout containing multiple windows 1 Select the Printer tool in the toolbar The Print Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select Device 1 or Device 2 to define which printing device you want to config ure 3 In the Content tab define the elements of the screen and additional information to be included in the printout a Select Print Selected Windows to incl...

Page 666: ...ng is appropriate 10 Select Print to execute the print function 11 If you did not select the option to suppress the dialog enter a filename in the file selection dialog box The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured 12 To store another file using the same configuration any other time simply press the Print immediate icon at the far right end of the toolbar If you use different...

Page 667: ...ile as the Destination 11 Select PDF from the file format selection list 12 Select Suppress File Name Dialog 13 In the Page Setup tab select Landscape as the Orientation 14 Select Windows Per Page 1 to print a single result display on each page 15 Select the Scaling option Size to fit to maximize the result display on each page 16 In the Color tab select Screen Colors Print for a printout that ref...

Page 668: ...th test reports Access Toolbar The R S FSV A features a test report generator A test report is a document that sum marizes the results and configuration of measurements In the default configuration the icons for reporting are not visible directly in the toolbar They are available in the list of additional icons that is displayed when you select the arrow at the bottom of the toolbar To reconfigure...

Page 669: ... test report template 669 Managing templates 678 Creating datasets 678 Creating a test report 679 How to create a test report 681 9 6 1 Designing a test report template Access Report Report menu Templates The R S FSV A allows you to create multiple test report templates Thus you can document measurement tasks that require different information or a different layout in the test report The propertie...

Page 670: ...nt specific information per subreport 4 General instrument settings per subreport 5 Measurement specific settings per subreport 6 Measurement results per subreport 7 Date and page count each page To see the result of your template configuration use the Show Preview function General contents 671 Title page 672 Measurement information 675 Application specific contents 677 Working with test reports ...

Page 671: ...ount 672 Report Path 672 Suppress Dialog 672 Raw Data Storage 672 Page format Selects the format of the document A4 or Letter format Remote command HCOPy TREPort PAGesize on page 1284 File type Selects the file type pdf or doc Remote command HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 on page 1269 Use Screen Colors Enables or disables the use of printer friendly color schemes as opposed to the colors used on the sc...

Page 672: ...a different location see Save on page 678 Remote command MMEMory NAME on page 1254 Suppress Dialog Report Path By default when you store a report a dialog is displayed to define the storage path If the dialog is suppressed reports are saved to the default directory C R_S INSTR USER with a generic name without further interaction Raw Data Storage Defines the location where the measurement data sets...

Page 673: ...Data management R S FSVA3000 R S FSV3000 673 User Manual 1178 8520 02 08 Working with test reports ...

Page 674: ...00 674 User Manual 1178 8520 02 08 Figure 9 3 Example of a test report title page State HCOPy TREPort TITLe STATe on page 1285 Title HCOPy TREPort TITLe on page 1285 Abstract HCOPy TREPort DESCription on page 1279 Working with test reports ...

Page 675: ... report plus one picture for example a company logo The first line is a heading Each of the following five lines consists of a title and a value which is displayed next to the title The information can be global that is valid for the entire report or specific to an individual measurement In this case you define the actual value when you store the measurement data Figure 9 4 Example for measurement...

Page 676: ...le For data that is specific to an individual measurement you are asked to provide this information when you append the measurement results to the report Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line TEXT on page 1280 Visibility Determines the validity of the content and thus when the contents are configured and where the line is displayed in the report Never Default Contents are ignored Glob...

Page 677: ... information is only included if it is also displayed for the measurement indicated by an asterisk Result list a table that contains the trace values for each trace point A maximum of 50001 measurement points per trace are written to the report The rest is dismissed If you have more measurement points export the data to an ASCII file see Export Trace to ASCII File on page 616 Settings basic instru...

Page 678: ... you omit the path the template is saved in the default directory C R_S INSTR USER Remote command Query available templates HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlate CATalog on page 1282 Save Saves the current test report configuration to the specified Template name Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlate SAVE on page 1283 Load Restores the selected test report configuration Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM...

Page 679: ...eview on page 681 Report New 679 Report Append 679 Report New Deletes all currently stored datasets and creates a new one Remote command HCOPy TREPort NEW on page 1283 Report Append Adds a new dataset to the existing ones for the next test report If measurement spe cific data is configured in the report template a dialog box prompts you to provide the information for the appended dataset Remote co...

Page 680: ...o the directory specified in the general contents area see Report Path Tip before saving the report check the contents using the Show Preview function Remote command Print mode HCOPy MODE on page 1279 Report name and directory MMEMory NAME on page 1254 Print report HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 on page 1269 Selecting items to include in the report By default all datasets and subsets stored for the test repo...

Page 681: ...onfiguration and contents is displayed Note that it can take a short time until the preview has been created The preview area provides typical viewing functions as in common PDF viewers 9 6 5 How to create a test report Using a test report you can summarize the results and configuration of measurements in a document directly from the Spectrum application To configure a test report template 1 Acces...

Page 682: ...Select the button at the bottom of the Templates tab to select the preconfig ured template for your report 3 Select Load The preconfigured report template is loaded to the dialog box 4 Configure and perform your measurement as usual 5 When the measurement is finished save the results for your report From the toolbar select Report Report new to delete any existing report data and start a new report...

Page 683: ... for your report From the toolbar select Report Report new 3 Perform further measurements and save the results as required From the toolbar select Report Report append 4 From the toolbar select Report Report menu Save A file selection dialog box is displayed unless you enabled the Suppress dialog option in the general template settings 5 Select the file name and path for the report 6 Select OK The...

Page 684: ... 691 Alignment 684 Display settings 691 Application starter 704 Toolbar configuration 710 Transducers 712 Frequency response correction R S FSV A K544 724 Reference frequency settings 736 System configuration settings 739 Service functions 751 Synchronizing measurement channel configuration 759 10 1 Alignment 10 1 1 Basics on alignment When you put the instrument into operation for the first time ...

Page 685: ...e larger than expected correction could however be per formed FAILED Deviations of correction value too large no correction was possible The found cor rection data is not applicable The results are available until the next self alignment process is started or the instru ment is switched off Temperature check During self alignment the instrument s frontend temperature is measured if activated only ...

Page 686: ...e that touching a specific point on the screen does not achieve the cor rect response If the position of the instrument has been changed and you cannot look straight on the screen If another person operates the instrument 10 1 2 Alignment settings Access Setup Alignment Both the instrument and the touchscreen can be aligned when necessary see Chap ter 10 1 1 Basics on alignment on page 684 Alignme...

Page 687: ...ongly recommended If you do not activate this option make sure the instrument has reached its operating tempera ture before installing the firmware Furthermore you can force the instrument to shut down after self alignment Note however that you cannot switch the instrument back on remotely afterwards The additional settings for self alignment can also be activated or deactivated during operation i...

Page 688: ...ignment 689 Schedule 689 Shut down Device after Self Alignment 689 Reuse Old Alignment Data 689 Starting Touch Screen Alignment 690 Alignment Results 690 Start Self Alignment Starts recording correction data for the instrument If the correction data acquisition fails or if the correction values are deactivated a corresponding message is displayed in the status field For details see Chapter 10 1 1 ...

Page 689: ...ter Self Alignment If activated the R S FSV A is automatically shut down after self alignment is comple ted Note that the instrument cannot be restarted via remote control Reuse Old Alignment Data If data from a previous self alignment is available on the instrument it can be reused even though the instrument claims the instrument is uncalibrated This is useful for example after activating a softw...

Page 690: ...u switch on the instrument It is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected Operating temperature Before performing this functional test make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature for details refer to the data sheet 1 Select SETUP 2 Select Service 3 Select Selftest Once the instrument modules have been checked successfully a message is dis played 10 1 4 How to...

Page 691: ...e screen 4 Touch and hold the blinking cross until it stops blinking Repeat this action for the crosses in the other corners 10 2 Display settings 10 2 1 Display settings Access Setup Display Some general display settings are available regardless of the current application or operating mode For information on optimizing your display for measurement results see Chapter 7 1 Result display configurat...

Page 692: ...ve for the entire screen Touch Off Touchscreen is deactivated for the entire screen Touch Diagram Off Touchscreen is deactivated for the diagram area of the screen but active for the surrounding softkeys toolbars and menus Remote command DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe on page 1321 Display Update Rate By default a fast update rate ensures the most recent measurement results on the dis play However when ...

Page 693: ...2 10 2 1 2 Displayed items Access Setup Display Displayed Items Several elements on the screen display can be hidden or shown as required for exam ple to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Toolbar 693 Status Bar 694 Softkey Bar 694 Channel Bar 694 Diagram Footer Annotation 694 Date and Time 694 Front Panel 694 Mini Front Panel 695 Toolbar The toolbar provides access to frequently...

Page 694: ...mand DISPlay SKEYs STATe on page 1320 Channel Bar The channel bar provides information on firmware and measurement settings for a specific channel Remote command DISPlay ANNotation CBAR on page 1320 Diagram Footer Annotation The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains information on the x axis of the dia gram display such as The current center frequency and span settings The displayed span per...

Page 695: ...For more information see Chapter 10 2 3 How to work with the soft front panels on page 703 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 1322 Mini Front Panel If you require a front panel display but do not want to lose too much space for results in the display area a mini front panel is available The mini version displays only the main function keys in a separate window in the display area D...

Page 696: ...That is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 1322 10 2 1 3 Display theme and colors Access Setup Display Theme Color You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen For step by step instructions see Chapter 10 2 2 How to configure the colors for dis play and printing...

Page 697: ...ng the User Settings to Default Colors 700 Theme The theme defines the colors and style used to display softkeys and other screen objects The default theme is IndustrialDark Remote command DISPlay THEMe SELect on page 1325 Screen Colors Two different color sets are provided by the instrument a third user defined set can be configured The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all scre...

Page 698: ...e 2 black trace 3 green and the markers are turquoise The background is always printed in white and the grid in black HCOP CMAP DEF2 Screen Colors Print Selects the current screen colors for the printout The background is always printed in white and the grid in black HCOP CMAP DEF1 Screen Colors Screenshot Selects the current screen colors without any changes for a screenshot HCOP CMAP DEF4 User D...

Page 699: ...Markers and marker information Remote command Each object is assigned to a specific suffix of the CMAP commands see Chap ter 12 10 5 3 CMAP suffix assignment on page 1325 Predefined Colors Modifying User Defined Color Assignments Displays the available colors from the predefined color set that can be used for the selected object Remote command HCOPy CMAP it PDEFined on page 1267 Preview Modifying ...

Page 700: ...u to define values for tint saturation and brightness Remote command HCOPy CMAP it HSL on page 1267 Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors In addition to the predefined color settings a user defined setting can be configured By default the same settings as defined in Default Colors 1 are used They can then be modified according to user specific requirements see Modifying User Defined Color ...

Page 701: ...as the only display in the Windows configuration dialog box Show only on 2 the maximum screen resolution of the monitor is used In this case you can maximize the R S FSV A application window and see even more details You cannot change the monitor s screen resolution via the standard Windows configuration dialog box However you can restore the default instrument resolution 1280x800 on the monitor u...

Page 702: ... Lock If activated the x axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges tures Y Lock If activated the y axis of the diagram is not changed during subsequent touch ges tures Adapt Measurement to Zoom selected diagram If you already performed a graphical zoom using the Single Zoom on page 511 or Multi Zoom on page 511 functions this function automatically adapts the measure ment sett...

Page 703: ... which you want to assign a color 4 Do one of the following Select a color from the Predefined Colors Select the Userdefined Colors button to define a different color The Preview area indicates the currently selected color 5 To assign a user specific color to the selected object do one of the following Select the color from the palette Enter values for the Tint Saturation and Brightness Note In th...

Page 704: ...panel display occasionally to press a single function key If you want the window to remain open deactivate the Auto close option You can close the window manually by selecting Close planel or the key combination ALT M be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system To display the soft front panel or mini front panel 1 Press the Setup key and select the Display softkey 2 Select th...

Page 705: ... Starter dialog box provides different tabs for different types of applica tions External Applications contains applications that are provided with but are not part of the R S FSV A such as auxiliary tools User Applications contains any user defined applications that can be accessed from the R S FSV A such as command scripts R S Applications contains applications predefined by Rohde Schwarz to enh...

Page 706: ... 709 Remove from Toolbar 709 Application buttons Start the selected application directly on the R S FSV A Any application windows outputs or results are displayed on the R S FSV A screen Add Application Change Application Opens the Add Application Change Application dialog box Both dialog boxes are identical This function is not available for applications on the R S Applications tab Remote command...

Page 707: ...to start your file with For inp files for example the IECWIN tool provided by Rohde Schwarz to execute scripts is preselected as the application to start File Explorer Add Application Change Application Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer Remote command not supported Select Add Application Change Application Closes the Add Application Change Applicaiton dialog box and opens the Edit Properti...

Page 708: ... command SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter PATH on page 1368 Parameters Edit Properties Defines parameters that are provided with the application for execution for example arguments for a custom script Remote command SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter PARams on page 1368 Working Directory Edit Properties Defines the working directory used by the selected application Remote command SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter DIRectory ...

Page 709: ...con from the R S FSV A toolbar See also Chapter 10 4 Toolbar configuration on page 710 10 3 2 How to work with the application starter To start an application 1 Select the Application Starter icon from the toolbar The Application Starter dialog box is displayed 2 Select the required application from the dialog box The application is started and displayed on the R S FSV A screen To return to the R ...

Page 710: ...lication is available in the Application Starter 11 Optionally add an icon for the application to the toolbar To add an icon for the application to the toolbar 1 Select the Application Starter icon from the toolbar The Application Starter dialog box is displayed 2 Right click the application button in the Application Starter 3 Select Add to Toolbar 10 4 Toolbar configuration If the list of availab...

Page 711: ...y not visible a Select More icons All hidden icons are displayed in a menu b Drag the icon from the menu to the toolbar The added icon is displayed If the toolbar contains too many icons to display the icons from the bottom move to the menu 4 To hide an icon from the toolbar drag and drop it outside the toolbar The icon is moved to the menu of hidden icons More icons Empty spaces are indicated by ...

Page 712: ...cer is used the trace is shifted by a calculated factor However an upward shift reduces the dynamic range for the displayed values Thus the reference level can be adapted automatically to restore the original dynamic range The refer ence level is shifted by the maximum transducer factor By default if transducers are active the reference level function is adapted automatically to obtain the best dy...

Page 713: ...ments The minimum frequency of a data point is 0 Hz the maximum frequency 200 GHz The value range for the transducer factor is 200 dB Gain has to be entered as a negative value and attenuation as a positive value Storing transducer factors Transducer factors can be exported to a file in ASCII CSV format for further evalua tion in other applications Transducer factors stored in the specified ASCII ...

Page 714: ...ings in secure user mode Be sure to store transducer files before SecureUser Mode is enabled see Chap ter 3 2 15 Protecting data using the secure user mode on page 55 Stored transducer settings When storing and recalling transducer settings consider the information provided in Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings on page 638 Transducer management 714 Transducer factors 717 10 5 ...

Page 715: ...t For details on settings for individual lines see Chapter 10 5 2 2 Transducer factors on page 717 For instructions on configuring and working with transducers see Chapter 10 5 4 How to configure the transducer on page 720 Name 715 Unit 715 Compatibility 716 Activating Deactivating 716 Comment 716 Included Transducer Lines in Overview View Filter 716 Adjust Ref Level 716 Create New Line 716 Edit L...

Page 716: ... of the transducer line Included Transducer Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored transducer lines are included in the overview The view can be restricted to compatible transducer lines only or include all transducer lines found Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Adjust Ref Level Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the...

Page 717: ... CORRection TRANsducer DELete on page 1299 10 5 2 2 Transducer factors Access Setup Transducer Edit Line Copy Line New Line The settings and functions available for individual transducer lines are described here For instructions on creating and editing transducer lines see Chapter 10 5 4 How to configure the transducer on page 720 Name 718 Comment 718 Unit 718 X Axis Scaling 718 Data Points 718 In...

Page 718: ...ENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT on page 1299 X Axis Scaling Describes the scaling of the horizontal axis on which the data points of the transducer line are defined Scaling can be linear or logarithmic Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SCALing on page 1299 Data Points Each transducer line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 50 data points Each data point is defined by its positi...

Page 719: ...ds the transducer factor from the selected file in CSV format Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the R S FSV A For details on the file format see Chapter 10 5 3 Reference transducer factor file format on page 720 Remote command MMEMory LOAD n TFACtor on page 1300 File Explorer Import Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer Remote command not supporte...

Page 720: ... Header data sep Separator for individual values required by Microsoft Excel for example Type RS_TransducerFactor Type of data FileFormatVersion 1 00 File format version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage OptionID SpectrumAnalyzer Application the transducer factor was created for Name TestTDF1 Transducer factor name Comment Transducer for device A Description of transducer factor XAxisScali...

Page 721: ...r option Show Compatible All transducer lines stored on the instrument that are compatible to the current measurement settings are displayed in the overview How to activate and deactivate a transducer 1 To activate a transducer select a transducer line in the overview and select the Active setting for it The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep after a transducer line is activate...

Page 722: ... Save button The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated How to delete an existing transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The transducer line is deleted After the next sweep the originally measured val ues are displayed How to configure a new transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog ...

Page 723: ...asily be moved vertically or horizontally Thus a new transducer line can be easily generated based upon an existing transducer line which has been shifted 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Edit button 3 In the Edit Transducer Line dialog box select the Shift x or Shift y button and define the shift width 4 Save the shifted data points by selecting the Save but...

Page 724: ...ansducer factor 5 Select the decimal separator that was used in the file 6 Select Select The transducer factor is loaded from the specified file and displayed in the Edit Transducer dialog box 7 Activate the transducer factor as described in How to activate and deactivate a transducer on page 721 10 6 Frequency response correction R S FSV A K544 If the Frequency Response Correction option R S FSV ...

Page 725: ...o transducer files by the R S FSV A However while a transducer adapts the frequency values by a fixed factor Touchstone files act as a filter on I Q input data For common frequency sweeps the effects of transducers and Touchstone files are the same fres files Additional frequency response correction files in fres format allow you to correct effects from components for which no Touchstone files are...

Page 726: ... response correction in measurement results on page 726 External preamplifier Touchstone files If an external preamplifier is connected to the R S FSV A an additional Touchstone file is provided by the preamplifier The combined frequency response filter also con siders those values For your convenience the external preamplifier can be switched on and off directly in the User Defined Frequency Resp...

Page 727: ...correction or the external preamplifier in general is switched on symbol lights up or not symbol is dark A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file A green symbol represents a fre quency response fres file Storing frequency response correction settings You can store frequency response correction settings to a file saveset and load them for future measurements For details see Save Settings on pag...

Page 728: ...them A configuration of correction files can be stored to and loaded from a file Frequency response correction can be configured individually for all available input types RF baseband The settings in the User defined Frequency Response Correc tion dialog box apply to the currently selected input type State 729 Refresh 729 Ext PA Correction 729 Adjust Ref Level 730 Apply to 730 Load Settings 730 Sa...

Page 729: ...ernal preamplifier is connected to the R S FSV A and only for frequencies above 1 GHz For details on connection see the preamplifier s documentation Using an external preamplifier you can measure signals from devices under test with low output power using measurement devices which feature a low sensitivity and do not have a built in RF preamplifier When you connect the external preamplifier the R ...

Page 730: ...tes the automatic adjustment The original dynamic range of the reference level is shifted by the filter calculation offset Manual Deactivates the automatic adjustment Adjust the reference level in the Amplitude settings see Reference Level on page 456 Remote command SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER ADJust RLEVel STATe on page 1303 Apply to Determines which channels the correction settings are ap...

Page 731: ...nd the order of their application If an external preamplifier is active it is also included at the bottom of the list ID Touchstone File Information Consecutive number which determines the order in which the correction files are applied to the measurement data The maximum number of files per configuration is 15 An LED like symbol indicates whether the file is active and Touchstone files or the ext...

Page 732: ...FRESponse si USER SLISt sli CLEar on page 1311 Move File Up or Down Moves the selected Touchstone file one position up or down in the list of files changing the order in which the correction data is applied Remote command SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli MOVE on page 1313 Frequency Response active Activates or deactivates the use of additional frequency response fres files The correcti...

Page 733: ...m number of values is required to compensate for a group delay see Group delay compensation on page 725 The default directory for fres files is C R_S INSTR USER Fresponse Remote command SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER FLISt fli INSert on page 1305 Remove Frequency Response File Removes the selected frequency response fres file from the current configuration Remote command SENSe CORRection FRESp...

Page 734: ...ISt sli DATA MAGNitude spi on page 1311 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli DATA PHASe spi on page 1311 IQ Mode Preview The preview in IQ Mode indicates the frequency ranges covered by the individual cor rection files The blue bar indicates the valid frequency range for which all files contain values An LED like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction in general i...

Page 735: ...The preview in Spectrum Mode indicates the frequency ranges covered by the individ ual correction files The blue bar indicates the valid frequency range for which at least one file contains values An LED like symbol indicates whether each file is active and user correction in general is switched on symbol lights up or not symbol is dark A purple symbol represents a Touchstone file A green symbol r...

Page 736: ...rrection files Remote command SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SPECtrum DATA FREQuency on page 1317 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SPECtrum DATA MAGNitude on page 1317 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SPECtrum DATA PHASe on page 1317 10 7 Reference frequency settings Access Setup Reference Reference frequency settings ...

Page 737: ...nternal oscillators A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source In the external reference setting all internal oscillators of the R S FSV A are synchronized to the external reference frequency External references are connected to one of the REF INPUT or the SYNC TRIGGER connectors on the rear panel Note The optional and more precise OCXO signal can replace the internal ref...

Page 738: ...if no valid external reference signal is available Additionally the flag NO REF is displayed to indicate that no synchronization was performed for the last measurement Switch to internal refer ence The instrument automatically switches back to the internal reference if no external reference is available Note that you must re activate the external reference if it becomes available again at a later ...

Page 739: ...nfiguration Hardware information 739 Licensing versions and options 740 System messages 745 Firmware updates 746 General configuration settings 748 Signal generator settings 750 10 8 1 Hardware information Access Setup System Configuration Hardware Info An overview of the installed hardware in your R S FSV A is provided Every listed component is described by its serial number part number model inf...

Page 740: ...emote commands SYSTem FORMat IDENt on page 1343 DIAGnostic SERVice BIOSinfo on page 1340 DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo on page 1341 Obtaining copyright information on used third party sources 740 License management 741 10 8 2 1 Obtaining copyright information on used third party sources Open Source Acknowledgment Open Displays a PDF file containing information on open source code used by the R S FSV...

Page 741: ...se from the server When you no longer need the license you return it to the server and it becomes available to other users again These licenses are also referred to as floating licenses as opposed to permanently assigned licenses If the predefined number of available licenses for a particular option are currently occu pied by other users you cannot open a further instance of the optional applicati...

Page 742: ... Option by XML 742 License state 742 Enabling disabling floating licenses 743 Setup Floating License Server 744 Enabled 744 IP Host name 744 Port RPort 744 Description 744 Add Server 745 Remove Server 745 Open License Server Manager 745 Apply Changes 745 Install Option Opens an edit dialog box to enter the permanently assigned license key for an option Only user accounts with administrator rights ...

Page 743: ...lable for multiple applications such as power sensor support In this case the license is retrieved if you select any application that supports the option For options with suboptions e g K91 with suboptions K91AC K91N all suboptions are automatically activated together with the main option by default Disabled If the license is disabled it is not retrieved from the server when you open the main appl...

Page 744: ...s user manual Indicates the currently configured floating license servers All enabled servers are searched for floating licenses when the R S FSV A software starts Note that changes to the list of servers only take effect after the R S FSV A software and the local License Manager are restarted To abort any changes simply close the dialog box Enabled Setup Floating License Server Only enabled serve...

Page 745: ...he selected server from the list permanently Tip To disable the server without removing it permanently deselect the Enabled checkbox Open License Server Manager Setup Floating License Server Displays the R S License Server Manager window Press F1 or select Help Show Help in this window to obtain more information on managing floating licenses Apply Changes Setup Floating License Server Stores the e...

Page 746: ...he occurrence of the message Remote command SYSTem ERRor LIST on page 1342 10 8 4 Firmware updates Access Setup System Configuration Firmware Update During instrument start the installed hardware is checked against the current firmware version to ensure the hardware is supported If not an error message is displayed Wrong Firmware Version and you are asked to update the firmware Until the firm ware...

Page 747: ...nabled see Chapter 3 2 15 Protecting data using the secure user mode on page 55 For restricted users in secure user mode this function is not available Enter the name or browse for the firmware installation file and press the Install but ton Remote command SYSTem FIRMware UPDate on page 1343 How to Update the Instrument Firmware 1 Download the update package from the Rohde Schwarz website and stor...

Page 748: ...uration process Now the firmware update is complete It is recommended that you perform a self alignment after the update see Chap ter 10 1 4 How to align the instrument on page 690 10 8 5 General configuration settings Access Setup System Configuration Config General system settings for example concerning the initial behaviour of the R S FSV A after booting can also be configured Out of range valu...

Page 749: ...allation of the R S FSV A K33 option secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible Changing the password SecureUser Mode When the secure user mode is activated the first time after installation you are promp ted to change the passwords for all user accounts in order to improve system security To save the new password select Save The password dialog for the next u...

Page 750: ...connected signal generator that can then be used for vari ous tasks for example for external generator control or NPR measurements IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator 750 123 ABC 751 Password 751 Test Connection 751 Connect Disconnect 751 IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the R S FSV A via LAN For tips o...

Page 751: ...d signal generator Test Connection The R S FSV A attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Device type Name and serial number Connection state Remote command CONFigure GENerator CONNection CSTate on page 1346 CONFigure GENerator CONNection STATe on page 1346 Connect Disconnect The R S FSV A attempts to establish ...

Page 752: ...upport information Access Setup Service R S Support In case of errors you can store useful information for troubleshooting and send it to your Rohde Schwarz support center Create R S Support Information 752 Save Device Footprint 753 Last Service Date 753 Last Calibration Date 753 Next Calibration Due 753 Create R S Support Information Creates a zip file with important support information The zip f...

Page 753: ...service date is updated by the service technicians For new instruments the last service date date of production is entered during produc tion If the field contains no date we recommend that you enter the date of last service according to the service certificates you received after the R S FSV A has been serv iced If the R S FSV A has not been serviced yet leave the field empty Remote command DIAGn...

Page 754: ...and the corresponding test results are indicated A running Sequencer process is aborted when you start a self test If you start a self test remotely then select the Local softkey while the test is still run ning the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is comple ted In this case the self test cannot be aborted Remote command TST on page 849 DIAGnostic SERVice STESt ...

Page 755: ...alibration Frequency RF Uses the internal calibration signal as the RF input signal Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 1295 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut PULSed CFRequency on page 1295 Spectrum Calibration Frequency RF Defines whether a broadband or narrowband calibration signal is sent to the RF input Narrowband Used to calibrate the absolute level of the frontend at 64 MHz Broadba...

Page 756: ...dapts the defined value to the next possible valid value Note The microwave calibration signal is only displayed if the YIG Preselector is enabled see Chapter 6 2 2 1 Radio frequency input on page 356 Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 1295 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut MC CFRequency on page 1294 10 9 4 Service functions Access Setup Service Service Function Using service functions ...

Page 757: ...al name The selection list includes all functions previously selected since the last Clear His tory action Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction on page 1347 Send Starts the selected service function Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction on page 1347 Numeric Mode If activated the service function is selected by its numeric code Otherwise the func tion is selected by its textual name Cl...

Page 758: ... Clears the result display for all previously performed service functions Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults DELete on page 1348 Save Results Saves the results of all previously performed service functions to a file stored as C R_S INSTR results Servicelog txt Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults SAVE on page 1348 Result List The Results List indicates the status an...

Page 759: ...changing the frequency in the spectrum application does not by default change the frequency in the vector signal analysis VSA application However sharing settings can be convenient for certain measurement tasks The R S FSV A provides a tool to couple or synchronize selected parameters across applications the coupling manager The coupling managers allows you not only to couple parameters but also m...

Page 760: ... at the same time because some parameters are interdependent For example you cannot synchronize the resolution and video bandwidth simultaneously because the video bandwidth depends on the resolution bandwidth and vice versa Center Frequency Synchronizes the center frequency Remote command INSTrument COUPle CENTer on page 1352 Start Stop Frequency Synchronizes the start and stop frequencies for me...

Page 761: ...s the measurement bandwidth Note You cannot synchronize the video bandwidth and the resolution bandwidth simultaneously Remote command INSTrument COUPle BANDwidth on page 1351 Limit Lines Activates the limit line over all channels Note Limit lines are only synchronized over channels if the limit line is compatible to the channel configuration especially units of the x and y axis Remote command INS...

Page 762: ...low you to synchronize user defined parameters as well as markers and lines between measurement channels Compared to the predefined couplings user couplings do not necessarily have to syn chronize all active measurement channels Instead you can define specific channels that are synchronized with each other in any combination while other channels remain independent Example You currently run two ins...

Page 763: ...te operation Remote command INSTrument COUPle USER uc NUMBers LIST on page 1361 Edit coupling definition Opens a dialog box to edit the selected coupling See Add New User Coupling on page 764 Remote command INSTrument COUPle USER uc on page 1356 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 The coupled parameters markers or lines Remote command INSTrument COUPle USER uc NEW on page 1359 State Enables or disables the co...

Page 764: ...ng definition Deletes the selected coupling definition permanently Remote command INSTrument COUPle USER uc REMove on page 1362 Info Shows information for the selected coupling for example restrictions regarding the coupling Note that usually no information is displayed Remote command INSTrument COUPle USER uc INFO on page 1359 Delete All Deletes all current coupling definitions Parameters are no ...

Page 765: ...ual channels All channels of the same type All channels Remote command INSTrument COUPle USER uc CHANnel LIST on page 1358 Specifics for Window Add New User Coupling Selects the windows of the selected channel for which the parameters are coupled This setting is only available for AM FM PM Analog Demod channels Individual win dows can only be coupled for frequency markers Remote command INSTrument...

Page 766: ... S FSV A applications but also between the R S FSV A and a connected signal generator Coupling parameters is especially useful when you use the SCPI recorder and need to include generator com mands see Combined Recording of Spectrum Analyzer and R S Signal Generator on page 799 IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator 767 123 ABC 767 Password 767 Connect Disconnect 767 Coupling State 767 Ce...

Page 767: ...tablish a temporary connection from the R S FSV A to the specified signal generator If a connection to a signal generator is already configured the connection data is provi ded for information only Remote command CONFigure GENerator IPConnection ADDRess on page 1347 123 ABC IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator By default the TCPIP address is expected To enter the computer name toggle th...

Page 768: ...vel Couples the reference level of the connected signal generator to the R S FSV A This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled Remote command INSTrument COUPle GENerator RLEVel STATe on page 1365 Generator Reference Level Offset Defines a fixed offset to the reference level of the R S FSV A for the coupled signal generator This setting requires the Coupling State to be enabled Remote co...

Page 769: ...he individual windows in the frequency domain to couple 8 To couple specific channels rather than all channels of a type a Select the second channel for coupling from the Channel 2 list b Select the parameter to which the first parameter is coupled from the Coupling Element 2 list c For AM FM PM Analog Demod channels and frequency markers only select the individual windows in the frequency domain ...

Page 770: ...icon for the parameter cou pling you want to remove 5 Close the dialog box 10 10 5 Example for a user defined parameter coupling Currently two Spectrum application channels are active one VSA channel and two AM FM PM Analog Demod channels Synchronizing all Spectrum channels The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the center frequency in all Spectrum application channels while the VSA...

Page 771: ...in the second AM FM PM Analog Demod channel is also set to 15 dB Synchronizing markers in AM FM PM Analog Demod windows Now you have two AM FM PM Analog Demod channels AnaDemod1 has an FM Spectrum and an FM Time Domain window AnaDemod2 has an RF Spectrum and an RF Time Domain window Only when the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum win dow is moved the marker in the RF Spectrum window is to move t...

Page 772: ...e frequency marker in the FM Spectrum to 900 MHz In the second AnaDemod channel the frequency marker in the RF Spectrum is also at 900 MHz 12 In the second AnaDemod channel set the frequency marker in the RF Spectrum to 1100 MHz In the first AnaDemod channel the frequency marker in the FM Spectrum is still at 900 MHz Synchronizing measurement channel configuration ...

Page 773: ...of spectrum analyzers see the following documents available from the Rohde Schwarz website Remote control via SCPI 1EF62 Hints and Tricks for Remote Control of Spectrum and Network Analyzers 1MA171 How to use Rohde Schwarz Instruments in MATLAB 1MA208 Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Chapter 11 7 How to set up a network and r...

Page 774: ...face To be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols The network card can be oper ated with the following interfaces 10 Mbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3 100 Mbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 1Gbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface t...

Page 775: ...tifies these instruments by the resource string For details on configuring the LAN connection see Chapter 11 7 1 How to configure a network on page 824 LAN web browser interface 775 11 1 1 1 LAN web browser interface The LAN web browser interface allows for easy configuration of the LAN and remote control of the R S FSV A without additional installation requirements The instrument s LAN web browse...

Page 776: ... LAN web browser interface In the address field of the browser on your PC type the host name or IP address of the instrument for example http 10 113 10 203 The instrument home page welcome page opens The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements LAN Home opens the instrument home page The home page displays device information including the VISA resource string in rea...

Page 777: ...rowser inter face on page 833 License Manager License Manager allows you to install or uninstall license keys and to acti vate register or unregister licenses Help www rohde schwarz com opens the Rohde Schwarz home page 11 2 Status reporting system The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information ...

Page 778: ...in 1 FAIL LMARgin 2 FAIL LMARgin 3 FAIL LMARgin 4 FAIL LMARgin 5 FAIL LMARgin 6 FAIL LMARgin 7 FAIL LMARgin 8 FAIL not used 15 5 4 3 0 1 2 STAT QUES EXTended not used Sweep time too low 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 2 STAT QUES FREQuency not used OVEN COLD LO UNLocked External REFerence STAT QUES LIMit n LIMit 1 FAIL LIMit 2 FAIL LIMit 3 FAIL LIMit 4 FAIL LIMit 5 FAIL LIMit 6 FAIL LIMit 7 FAIL LIMit 8 FAIL...

Page 779: ...r view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis ters A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is link...

Page 780: ...er and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus OPERation status register 11 2 2 2 IST flag and parallel poll enable register PPE As with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit It can be read by means of a parallel poll or using the comm...

Page 781: ...rrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument 11 2 2 4 STATus OPERation register The STATus OPERation register contains information on current activities...

Page 782: ...TATus QUEStionable TIMe registers For some subregisters there may be separate registers for each active channel Thus if a status bit in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a ...

Page 783: ...e LMARgin register provides more information on the error type 11 SYNC device specific This bit is set if the R S FSV A is not synchronized to the signal that is applied The R S FSV A is not synchronized if it cannot synchronize to midamble during a measurement or premeasurement it cannot find a burst during a measurement or premeasurement the results deviate too much from the expected value durin...

Page 784: ...f the limit is exceeded in one of the lower or upper alternate channels 3 11 7 CACLR FAIL This bit is set if the CACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels 8 GAP ACLR FAIL This bit is set if the ACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels 9 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 11 2 2 7 STATus QUEStionable EXTended register The STATus QUEStionable EXTended register contains further st...

Page 785: ...ement e g the settings no longer match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily 3 ERRor This bit is set if an error occurs during a measurement e g due to missing data or wrong set tings so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly 4 FATal This bit is set if a serious error occurs in the application and regular operation is no longer possi ...

Page 786: ... read out the register with STATus QUEStionable LIMit n CONDition or STATus QUEStionable LIMit n EVENt Table 11 10 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 LIMit 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated 1 LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated 2 LIMit 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated 3 LIMit 4 FAIL This bit is...

Page 787: ...lated 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated 6 LMARgin 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated 7 LMARgin 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated 8 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 11 2 2 12 STATus QUEStionable POWer register The STATus QUEStionable POWer register contains information about possible overload situations that may occur during op...

Page 788: ...EMPerature register contains information about possible temperature deviations that may occur during operation of the R S FSV A A separate temperature register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition or STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt Table 11 13 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register Bit No...

Page 789: ...s not change the instrument settings Table 11 15 Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching on supply voltage Power On Status Clear DCL SDC Device Clear Selected Device Clear RST or SYS Tem PRE Set STA Tus PRE Set CLS Effect 0 1 Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Clear PPE yes Clear EVENt parts of the regis ters yes yes Clear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUEStionable registers...

Page 790: ...d set is compatible with one of the supported device models can be emulated Supported languages Language Comment SCPI 71100C Compatible to 8566A B 71200C Compatible to 8566A B 71209A Compatible to 8566A B 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A Command sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure 8566B 8568A Command sets A and B are availabl...

Page 791: ...mote control languages the following settings or changes are made SCPI The instrument performs a PRESET 8566A B 8568A B 8594E FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK The instrument performs a PRESET The following instrument settings are changed Table 11 16 Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A B 8568A B 8594E FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK instruments Model of Trace Points Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Input Coupling 8566...

Page 792: ...y change in a future version without notice IECWIN offers the following features Connection to instrument via several interfaces protocols GPIB VISA named pipe if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself RSIB Interactive command entry Browsing available commands on the instrument Error checking following every command Execution of command scripts Storing binary data to a file Reading binary data fro...

Page 793: ...equired settings with scripts A script con tains a series of SCPI commands corresponding to the settings When completed it is converted to an executable format saved in a file and can be run whenever needed Creating a SCPI script Using the SCPI Recorder functions you can create a SCPI script directly on the instru ment and then export the script for use on the controller You can also edit or write...

Page 794: ...g perform a function or displays results for example Softkeys Buttons or input fields in dialog boxes Traces or markers in a diagram Figure 11 2 Context sensitive SCPI command menu for a trace in a result display The menu provides the syntax of the remote command with the current setting and some functions to help you create your script Show SCPI result query commands 794 Show SCPI command 795 Cop...

Page 795: ...I Command to Clipboard Show SCPI command Copies the command and the current value for the selected setting to the clipboard Help Show SCPI command Provides help on the displayed SCPI command its syntax and possible parameter val ues Add SCPI Command to Recording Show SCPI command Adds the command and the current value for the selected setting to the recorded SCPI list Help Provides help on the sel...

Page 796: ...ecording 796 List of recorded commands script editor 797 Remove Last 797 Load Recording 797 Save As 797 Export 797 Clear All 798 Settings 799 Add Synchronization Commands 799 Combined Recording of Spectrum Analyzer and R S Signal Generator 799 IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator 799 123 ABC 800 Password 800 Test Connection 800 Auto Recording If enabled the SCPI Recorder automatically r...

Page 797: ...ch as copy paste delete undo and redo Remove Last Deletes the last recorded SCPI command from the list Load Recording Loads an existing script in ASCII format inp from a file to the script editor If the editor contains recorded commands you must confirm a message to overwrite them A file selection dialog box is displayed Save As Saves the current SCPI command list to the C R_S INSTR ScpiRecordings...

Page 798: ...pplications m You can use this format directly with the MATLAB Instrument Con trol Toolbox MATLAB R S Toolkit You can use this format directly with the MATLAB Toolkit NICVI An ANSI C programming environment designed for measurements and tests cvi You can use this format directly with National Instruments LabWind ows CVI Plain SCPI Represents SCPI base format that is ASCII format saved as a text fi...

Page 799: ...commands that are executed by the signal generator the instruments must be connected via LAN To avoid duplicate commands for the same setting on the individual instruments you can couple the most important parameters between the analyzer and the generator automatically See Chapter 10 10 3 Generator coupling on page 766 IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator Settings The IP address or comp...

Page 800: ...ected signal generator Test Connection Settings The R S FSV A attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Device type Name and serial number Connection state Remote command CONFigure GENerator CONNection CSTate on page 1346 CONFigure GENerator CONNection STATe on page 1346 11 5 3 How to determine the required SCPI ...

Page 801: ... want to record To query trace or marker results select the result diagram 2 On the screen tap and hold or right click the measurement setting function or result display The context sensitive menu containing the SCPI command for that particular set ting function or result is displayed Tip If the SCPI command menu is not displayed you probably tapped outside of a softkey or input field for example ...

Page 802: ...alog box with the currently recorded command list is dis played 5 Save the recorded command list to a file for later use a Select Save As b Define a file name for the script file To edit a SCPI command list All command lists can be edited after recording either directly on the instrument or in any suitable editor on the controller The following functions describe how to edit the SCPI command list ...

Page 803: ...u can check and improve a recorded SCPI script Search and remove missing command entries If a configured setting or performed function does not have a corresponding com mand SYST INF SCPI SCPI command not available is entered in the list instead Remove unnecessary commands written after a preset Rearrange the commands to a reasonable order For example if you move a STATe command to the end of your...

Page 804: ...SV3000 write INIT CONT OFF FSV3000 write SENS FREQ CENT 850000000 FSV3000 write SENS FREQ SPAN 4000000 FSV3000 write DISP WIND SUBW TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 10 FSV3000 write CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP FSV3000 write CALC MARK FUNC POW PRES S2CD FSV3000 write SENS ADJ LEV WAI FSV3000 write SENS POW HSP ON FSV3000 write TRAC1 DATA TRACE1 FSV3000 query CALC1 MARK Y FSV3000 write CALC1 MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW B...

Page 805: ...ument from a remote PC or use a network printer Network settings can only be edited in the firmware if a LAN cable is connected to the R S FSV A You can define the settings for both the 1 Gbit and the optional 10 Gbit connectors individually Risk of network problems All parameters can be edited here however beware that changing the computer name has major effects in a network For details see Chapt...

Page 806: ... but this name can be changed The naming conventions of Windows apply If too many characters and or numbers are entered an error message is displayed in the status line The default instrument name is a non case sensitive string with the following syntax Type variant serial_number The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument It is the third part of the device ID printed on the...

Page 807: ...e DHCP server is available DHCP On this setting is read only The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Each block con tains 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block as an example see the preinstalled address DHCP Switches between DHCP server available On or not available Off If a DHCP server is available in the network the I...

Page 808: ... 810 GPIB Address Defines the GPIB address Values from 0 to 30 are allowed The default address is 20 This setting is only available if the optional GPIB board is installed R S FSV A B5 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess on page 1327 Identification String Defines the identification string for the R S FSV A which is provided as a response to the IDN query Maximum 36 characters are a...

Page 809: ...IB receive terminator LFEOI According to the standard the terminator in ASCII is LF and or EOI EOI For binary data transfers e g trace data from the control computer to the instrument the binary code used for LF might be included in the binary data block and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case This can be avoided by using only the receive terminator EOI Remo...

Page 810: ...SPlay on page 1328 SYSTem ERRor CLEar REMote on page 1341 Set Hardware Immediately Determines when the remote commands that change hardware settings on the R S FSV A are executed If enabled default remote commands are always executed immediately when they are received by the instrument If disabled remote commands that cause changes to the hardware are only executed when an appropriate command is e...

Page 811: ...easurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems The required settings are configured in the Compatibility tab of the Network Remote dialog box Language 811 IF Gain 812 Sweep Repeat 812 Coupling 812 Wideband 813 FSU FSQ Preamplifier 813 HP Additional 813 Revision String 813 Resetting the Factory Revision 813 Language Defines the system language used to control the instrume...

Page 812: ...gh dynamic range overload limit is close to reference level PULS Optimized for pulsed signals overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level This setting is only available if an HP language is selected see Language on page 811 Remote command SYSTem IFGain MODE on page 1374 Sweep Repeat Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI HP model commands for details on the commands refer to Chapter ...

Page 813: ...hen the OPT query is executed depending on the used preamplifier It is only available for FSU FSQ emulation and only if a preamplifier is used by the R S FSV A B24 B25 option Remote command SYSTem PREamp on page 1375 HP Additional Allows the use of HP commands in addition to SCPI commands for R S FSP FSQ FSU emulation see Language Remote command SYSTem HPADditional on page 1375 Revision String Def...

Page 814: ...ides basic LAN configuration functions and information for the R S FSV A Alternatively you can change the LAN settings using the web browser interface For details see Chapter 11 7 1 4 How to configure the LAN using the web browser interface on page 828 Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LAN configuration and web browser functionality Current LAN Configuration 814 LAN Pass...

Page 815: ...he overall utilization to avoid downtime and to increase the overall security level of a fleet of instruments HUMS provides for example information about Instrument identification hardware components software packages licenses Usage of remote control usage via keyboard mouse usage of test applications Hardware utilization and status including S M A R T data of the system drive User defined static ...

Page 816: ...settings 816 Protocol settings 817 Device tags 820 11 6 5 1 Basic settings Access SETUP Network Remote HUMS tab The HUMS tab of the Network Remote dialog provides basic R S HUMS configu ration functions To export the complete HUMS history use the REST API with the endpoint http IP api hums v1 dump The remote commands to configure HUMS are described in Chapter 12 10 8 Config uring HUMS on page 1331...

Page 817: ...nstrumentaddress hums The instrumentaddress is either the IP address of the instrument or the instrument name Delete HUMS History Deletes complete HUMS data which includes the device history device tags SCPI connections utilization history utilization table values Remote command DIAGnostic HUMS DELete ALL on page 1331 11 6 5 2 Protocol settings Access SETUP Network Remote HUMS Enhanced Settings Co...

Page 818: ...n define the Access and Community Access SNMPv2c Configuration Defines the access an SNMP user can have for a specific SNMP community read write RW read only RO RW Read write access allows the user to read and change information By default the user has read write access rights RO Read only access allows the user to only read information Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RO on page 1...

Page 819: ...ss allows the user to read and change information RO Read only access allows the user to only read information Security Level SNMPv3 Configuration Defines the security level for access noAuthNoPriv authNoPriv or authPriv For security reasons we recommend that you only allow access via passwords noAuthNo Priv Low security level no authentication no data transfer encryption user name query only No a...

Page 820: ...hysical location and is used for identification of the SNMP server By default this input field is empty Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP LOCation on page 1335 SNMP Contact SNMP Contact defines the SNMP contact information This information complies with the person who manages the SNMP server and is used for identification of the SNMP server By default this input field is empty Remote command ...

Page 821: ...mple Key Location Value Building 1 Remote command DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS ALL on page 1332 Delete All Deletes all defined device tags Remote command Delete all device tags DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS DELete ALL on page 1332 Delete a single device tag DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS DELete on page 1333 11 6 6 Remote errors Access SETUP Network Remote Remote Errors tab The error messages generated by the R S FSV A durin...

Page 822: ...rted To clear the message buffer use the Clear Error List button It is automatically cleared when the R S FSV A is shut down The following information is available No Device specific error code Error Brief description of the error Date Time Time the message occurred Remote command SYSTem ERRor LIST on page 1342 Clear Error List Deletes the error message buffer for remote operation Note The remote ...

Page 823: ...eration the following happens All front panel keys are enabled The main softkey menu of the current mode is displayed The measurement diagrams traces and display fields are displayed again If at the time of pressing the LOCAL softkey the synchronization mechanism via OPC OPC or WAI is active the currently running measurement procedure is aborted and synchronization is achieved by setting the corre...

Page 824: ...e Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on your instrument R S instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled and preconfigured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote control are enabled For more details on firewall configuration see the Windows 10 help system and the R S White Paper available from the Rohde Schwarz website 1EF96 Malware Protection Windows 1...

Page 825: ... IP configuration the addresses must be set manually By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration When a DHCP server is used a new IP address may be assigned each time the PC is restarted This address ...

Page 826: ...le 255 255 255 0 The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains a maximum of 3 num bers 7 Close the dialog box If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask the message out of range is displayed in the status line If the settings are correct the configuration is saved and you are prompted to restart the instrument 8 Confirm the displayed message Ye...

Page 827: ...ad of the IP address The DNS server translates the host name to the IP address This is especially useful when a DHCP server is used as a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed To change the instrument s computer name 1 Press the Setup key and then the Network Remote softkey The cu...

Page 828: ...The instrument home page displays device information including the VISA resource string in read only format Press the Device Indicator button on the Instrument Home Page to activate or deactivate the LAN status icon on the status bar of the R S FSV A A green LAN status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established a red symbol indicates an error for example that no LAN cable is conne...

Page 829: ...ynamic Link Local Addressing Automatic IP to obtain the instrument IP address Changing the LAN configuration is password protected The default password is Lxi WebIfc notice upper and lower case characters You can change the LAN password in the Network Remote dialog box see Chap ter 11 6 4 LAN settings on page 814 Advanced LAN configuration The LAN Configuration Advanced LAN Configuration parameter...

Page 830: ... value between 0 and 30 Remote command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 11 7 2 How to operate the instrument without a network To operate the instrument without a network connection either temporarily or perma nently no special measures are necessary Windows 10 automatically detects the interruption of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the instrument is switched on If you are no...

Page 831: ...he network Thus a matching user must be created in the R S FSV A and in the network the password must be adapted to the network password and the auto login mechanism must then be deactivated The network administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network 1 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 Select Start Settings Accounts Other users 3 Select Add ...

Page 832: ... 7 Press the ENTER key to confirm The auto login function is reactivated with the changed password It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on Switching users when using the auto login function Which user account is used is defined during login If auto login is active the login win dow is not displayed However you can switch the user account to be used even when the auto login f...

Page 833: ...y of a file or directory 1 In the Start menu select Programs Accessories and then select Windows Explorer 2 Select the desired folder with the right mouse button 3 In the context menu select Sharing with Specific people The dialog box for sharing a directory is displayed 4 Select a user from the list or add a new name and select the Add button 5 Select the Share button 6 Select Done to close the d...

Page 834: ...le limit line definitions from the PC to the R S FSV A 1 In the web browser select the Welcome page window 2 In the navigation pane select Instrument Control File Upload or File Down load The most commonly used folders on the instrument are displayed for example those that contain user data as well as the top most My Computer folder from which you can access all other folders on the instrument 3 T...

Page 835: ...tion is automatically active again until you deactivate it manually To deactivate the LAN web browser interface 1 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 In the Start menu select Control Panel 3 Select System and Security Administrative Tools 4 From the list on the right select Services 5 From the list of local services select R S TightVNC Server 6 Set Startup type ...

Page 836: ...er configura tion is required However if the connection fails or other users need to connect this section provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for the R S FSV A 11 7 7 1 How to configure the R S FSV A for remote operation via remote desktop 1 Create a fixed IP address for the TCP IP protocol as described in Chapter 11 7 1 2 How to assign the IP address on page 825 Note To a...

Page 837: ...er 11 7 7 2 How to configure the controller Remote Desktop Client With Windows 10 Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via Start Programs Accessories Remote Desktop Connection For other versions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on 1 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 From the Start menu select ...

Page 838: ...lection and how powerful the connection is the options are activated or deactivated 6 To improve the performance you can deactivate the Desktop background Show contents of window while dragging and Menu and window animation options 7 Open the Local Resources tab for enabling printers local drives and serial inter faces 8 If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R S FSV A e g in...

Page 839: ... from the R S FSV A activate the Printers option Do not change the remaining settings 10 Open the Display tab The options for configuring the R S FSV A screen display are displayed 11 Under Remote desktop size you can set the size of the R S FSV A window on the desktop of the controller 12 Under Colors do not change the settings 13 Set the Display the connection bar when I use the full screen opti...

Page 840: ... standard user In the Password field enter 894129 3 To save the connection configuration for later use a Select the Save As button The Save As dialog box is displayed b Enter the name for the connection information RDP 4 To load an existing connection configuration a Select the Open button The Open dialog box is displayed b Select the RDP file 5 Select the Connect button The connection is set up 6...

Page 841: ...ote Desktop application window The Windows Start menu can be made available by expanding the Remote Desktop window to full size During the connection with the controller the login entry is displayed on the R S FSV A screen To terminate Remote Desktop control The connection can be terminated by the controller or by a user at the R S FSV A 1 On the controller close the Remote Desktop window at any t...

Page 842: ...end an addressed command GTR Go to Remote from a controller to the instru ment The instrument is switched to remote control remote state Operation via the front panel is disabled Only the Local softkey is displayed to return to manual operation The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the instrument or via remote control interfaces Switching from manual ...

Page 843: ...ay Update on page 809 11 7 9 How to return to manual operation Before you switch back to manual operation all remote command processing must be completed Otherwise the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately Select the Local softkey or use the following GPIB command status viGpibControlREN vi VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL If you select the Local softkey while a self alignment or a self...

Page 844: ...ffixes 845 Common commands 845 Selecting the operating mode and application 850 Configuring and performing measurements 858 Configuring the result display 1024 Setting basic measurement parameters 1035 Analyzing measurements basics 1140 Managing settings and results 1249 Configuring the R S FSV A 1290 Using the status register 1369 Commands for remote instrument operation 1373 Emulating other inst...

Page 845: ...ric values if no other unit is provided with the parameter Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 12 2 Common suffixes In the Spectrum application the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Table 12 1 Common suffixes used in remote commands in the Spectrum application Suffix Value range Descr...

Page 846: ... to the manual operation state after the alignment is completed Usage Query only Manual operation See Start Self Alignment on page 688 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting ...

Page 847: ... 809 IST Individual status query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values ISTflag 0 1 Usage Query only OPC Operation complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query writes a 1 into the output buff...

Page 848: ...SC Action Power on status clear Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 0 1 0 The contents of the status ...

Page 849: ...ates a manual trigger signal This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem TRG corresponds to the INITiate IMMediate command see INITiate n IMMediate on page 861 Usage Event TST Self test query Initiates self tests of the instrument and returns an error code Note If you start a self test remotely then select the Local softkey while the test is still running the instrument o...

Page 850: ...NSTrument CREate DUPLicate 850 INSTrument CREate NEW 851 INSTrument CREate REPLace 851 INSTrument DELete 852 INSTrument LIST 852 INSTrument REName 853 INSTrument SELect 853 DISPlay ATAB State This command switches between the MultiView tab and the most recently displayed channel If only one channel is active this command has no effect Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON ...

Page 851: ...nnel name to a new channel If you do an error occurs Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds a spectrum display named Spectrum 2 Manual operation See New Channel on page 128 INSTrument CREate REPLace ChannelName1 ChannelType ChannelName2 This command replaces a channel with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the channel you want to replace ChannelType Channel ty...

Page 852: ... delete the channels Return values ChannelType ChannelName For each channel the command returns the channel type and channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Changing the Channel Name on page 98 See Selecting an applica...

Page 853: ...for the new channel INSTrument REName ChannelName1 ChannelName2 This command renames a channel Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the channel you want to rename ChannelName2 String containing the new channel name Note that you cannot assign an existing channel name to a new channel If you do an error occurs Channel names can have a maximum of 31 characters and must be co...

Page 854: ...124 See I Q Analyzer on page 124 See LTE on page 124 See NB IoT on page 124 See Noise Figure on page 124 See Phase Noise on page 125 See Pulse Measurements on page 125 See Transient Analysis on page 125 See Vector Signal Analysis VSA on page 125 See WLAN on page 125 See Selecting an application on page 128 See New Channel on page 128 12 4 2 Performing a sequence of measurements The following comma...

Page 855: ...els it contains Note To synchronize to the end of a measurement sequence using OPC OPC or WAI use SINGle Sequencer mode Parameters Mode SINGle Each measurement group is started one after the other in the order of definition All measurement channels in a group are started simultaneously and performed once After all measure ments are completed the next group is started After the last group the measu...

Page 856: ...ands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement is performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 131 12 4 3 Programming example performing a sequence of measurements This example demonstrates how to perform several mea...

Page 857: ...NH Create new analyzer channel INSTrument CREate NEW SANalyzer Spectrum 2 Activate ACLR measurement in channel Spectrum 2 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer SELect ACPower Load W CDMA Standard CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer PRESet FW3Gppcdma Change trace modes DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC1 MODE MINH Performing a sweep and retrieving results Change sweep count SENS SWEep COUNt 7 Single Sweep mode I...

Page 858: ...ctrum channel INST SEL Spectrum 2 WAI Query channel power result CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult ACPower 12 5 Configuring and performing measurements The following commands are required to configure measurements in a remote environ ment The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 5 Measurements and results on page 133 Performing measurements 859 Configuring power measurements 86...

Page 859: ...I Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R S FSV A is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear ...

Page 860: ...waits for the end Result Averaging is performed over 40 sweeps Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 477 INITiate n CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode for an individual channel Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thu...

Page 861: ...arting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see Remote control via SCPI Suffix n irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Manu...

Page 862: ...SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel 866 SENSe POWer TRACe 866 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb MODE Mode This command selects the trace display mode for power measurements Suffix n Window m Marker sb irrelevant Parameters Mode WRITe MAXHold WRITe The power is calculated from the current trace MAXHold The power is calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value usi...

Page 863: ...f the returned results is slightly different power of the transmission channels total power of the transmission channels for each sub block power of adjacent channels lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper power of gap channels lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear...

Page 864: ...ote that this result is only available if the power reference type is set to peak power see SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe on page 946 OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz COBandwidth COBWidth Centroid frequency Frequency offset See Chapter 5 5 2 OBW results on page 220 Manual operation See C N on page 216 See C N0 on page 217 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb ...

Page 865: ... sweep is activated RST 0 Manual operation See C N on page 216 See C N0 on page 217 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet Measurement This command determines the ideal span bandwidths and detector for the current power measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single...

Page 866: ...his command selects the trace channel power measurements are performed on For the measurement to work the corresponding trace has to be active Parameters TraceNumber Range 1 to 6 RST 1 Example POW TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2 Manual operation See Selected Trace on page 177 12 5 3 Measuring the channel power and ACLR All remote control commands specific to channel power or ACLR measure...

Page 867: ...ts of weighting filter channel bandwidth and spacing resolution and video bandwidth detector and sweep time Suffix n Window m Marker sb irrelevant Parameters Standard For more information see Chapter 5 3 9 Reference predefined CP ACLR standards on page 211 If you want to load a customized configuration the parameter is a string containing the file name Manual operation See Predefined Standards on ...

Page 868: ...video bandwidth detector and sweep time Suffix n Window m Marker sb irrelevant Parameters Standard String containing the file name The file format is xml Manual operation See User Standards on page 175 12 5 3 2 Configuring the channels The following commands configure channels for channel power and ACLR measure ments SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs 869 SENSe POWer ACHannel BWIDth ACHannel 869 SENSe P...

Page 869: ... of the adjacent channels Parameters Bandwidth Range 100 Hz to 1000 MHz RST 14 kHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Channel Bandwidth on page 180 See Adjacent Channel Bandwidths on page 192 SENSe POWer ACHannel BWIDth ALTernate ch Bandwidth SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth ALTernate ch Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the alternate channels Suffix ch 1 n Alternate channel ...

Page 870: ...182 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate ch Name This command defines a name for an alternate channel Suffix ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters Name String containing the name of the channel RST ALT 1 11 Manual operation See Channel Names on page 182 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel ch Name This command defines a name for a transmission channel Suffix ch 1 n Tx channel number Parameters Na...

Page 871: ...SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch Spacing This command defines the distance between transmission channels If you set the channel spacing for a transmission channel the R S FSV A sets the spacing of the lower transmission channels to the same value but not the other way round The command works hierarchically to set a distance between the 2nd and 3rd and 3rd and 4th channel you have to set the...

Page 872: ...LTernate ch 873 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch 874 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the adjacent channel weighting filter Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 182 See Weighting Filters on page 192 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALL Value This command define...

Page 873: ...l State This command turns the weighting filter for the adjacent channel on and off Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 182 See Weighting Filters on page 192 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALL State This command turns the weighting filters for all channels on and off Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch Sta...

Page 874: ...NCE This command sets the channel power as the reference for relative ACLR measure ments Example POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE Usage Event Manual operation See Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measure ments Set CP Reference on page 178 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO RefChannel This command selects the reference channel for relative measurements You need at least one channel for t...

Page 875: ...n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel ABSolute 875 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe 876 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel RELative 876 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel RESult 877 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe 878 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute 878 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute STATe 879 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ...

Page 876: ...l ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 Absolute limit check for lower adjacent channel RST 0 State ON OFF 1 0 Absolute limit check for upper adjacent channel RST 0 Manual operation See Limit Check on page 181 See Limit Checking on page 193 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel RELative Lower...

Page 877: ...u have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Return values LowerACH text value Thestate of the limit check for the lower adjacent channels PASSED Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has failed Uppe...

Page 878: ...operation See Limit Check on page 181 See Limit Checking on page 193 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute LowerLimit UpperLimit This command defines the absolute limit of the alternate channels If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R S FSV A uses the lower value for the limit check Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant ch 1 n Alternate channel number Param...

Page 879: ...ate ON OFF 1 0 Absolute limit check for upper alternate channel RST 0 Manual operation See Limit Check on page 181 See Limit Checking on page 193 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch RELative LowerLimit UpperLimit This command defines the relative limit of the alternate channels The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power If you have defined an absolute limit as w...

Page 880: ...ement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant ch Alternate channel number Return values LowerChan text value The state of the limit check for the lower alternate or adjacent channels PASSED Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has fai...

Page 881: ...heck for upper alternate channel RST 0 Manual operation See Limit Check on page 181 See Limit Checking on page 193 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe State This command turns the limit check for ACLR measurements on and off Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Limit Check on page 181 See Limit Checking on page 187 See Limit Checking on page 193 1...

Page 882: ...5 3 7 Configuring MSR ACLR measurements If the Multi Standard Radio standard is selected see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 867 the channels for the ACLR measure ment are configured differently For more information see Chapter 5 3 3 4 Measure ment on multi standard radio MSR signals on page 167 In this case use the following commands General MSR ACLR measurement settings 882...

Page 883: ...nd Tx channels SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa SBLock sb CHANnel ch 883 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe SBLock sb CHANnel ch 883 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBCount 884 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb BWIDth CHANnel ch 884 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb BANDwidth CHANnel ch 884 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb CENTer CHANnel ch 884 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb FREQuency CENTer 885 SENSe POWer ACHannel...

Page 884: ...e 1 to 8 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of Sub Blocks on page 185 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb BWIDth CHANnel ch Bandwidth SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb BANDwidth CHANnel ch Bandwidth This command defines the bandwidth of the specified MSR Tx channel This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 867 Suffix sb 1 to 8 sub block number ch 1 n Tx ...

Page 885: ...cent gap CACLR channels This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 867 Suffix sb 1 to 8 sub block number Parameters Frequency absolute frequency in Hz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Sub Block Center Freq on page 189 MSR adjacent channel setup The functions for manual operation are described in Chapter 5 3 5 MSR ACLR config uration on page 1...

Page 886: ... ranges also affect the position of the adjacent gap channels CACLR This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 867 Suffix sb 1 to 8 sub block number Parameters Bandwidth Bandwidth in Hz Default unit Hz Manual operation See RF Bandwidth on page 189 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb TECHnology CHANnel ch Standard This command defines the technology us...

Page 887: ...of transmission channels the specific sub block contains This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 867 Suffix sb 1 to 8 sub block number Parameters Number Range 1 to 18 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of Tx Channels Tx Count on page 189 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing UACHannel Spacing This command defines the distance from the transmission chann...

Page 888: ...defines whether adjacent channels are defined symmetrically or not For more information see Chapter 5 3 3 4 Measurement on multi standard radio MSR signals on page 167 Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The upper and lower adjacent and alternate channels are defined symmetrically This is the default behaviour and corre sponds to the behavior in firmware versions before 2 10 OFF 0 The upper and lower...

Page 889: ...efault unit Hz Manual operation See Adjacent Channel Bandwidths on page 192 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa UACHannel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the upper adjacent channel weighting filter for asymmetrical MSR signals To configure the factor for the upper adjacent channel use the SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel command Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 t...

Page 890: ...LTer STATe UALTernate ch State This command turns the weighting filter for the upper alternate channels on and off for asymmetrical MSR signals To configure the factor for the lower alternate channels use the SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch com mand Suffix ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 192 General gap...

Page 891: ...configured gap 1 gap 2 Gap channels are configured identically for all gaps if more than two sub blocks are defined Depending on the defined minimum gap size the actual number of evaluated gap channels is determined automatically See also SENSe POWer ACHannel GAP gap AUTO MSIZe on page 896 MANual In Manual mode up to four channels can be configured individ ually for each gap Active gap channels ar...

Page 892: ...p AUTO 895 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe GAP gap AUTO 895 SENSe POWer ACHannel GAP gap AUTO MSIZe 896 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP gap AUTO 896 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap AUTO ABSolute Limit Reserved This command defines the absolute limit of the specified gap CACLR channel If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit the R S FSV A uses the lower value for the limit ...

Page 893: ...SV A uses the lower value for the limit check Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters Limit Defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified gap channel in dB Default unit DB UpperLimit Ignored Default unit DB Example CALC LIM ACP GAP1 ACLR REL 3dB CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap AUTO ACLR RELative STATe State This command turns the relative...

Page 894: ...relevant gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters Limit Defines the relative limit of the specified gap channel in dB Default unit DB UpperLimit Optional Defines the relative upper limit of the specified gap channel Default unit dB Example CALC LIM ACP GAP1 REL 3dB 0 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap AUTO CACLr RELative STATe State This command turns the relative limit check for the specifie...

Page 895: ... 3 84 MHz Default unit Hz Example SENS POW ACH BAND GAP2 5MHZ Manual operation See Gap Channel Bandwidths on page 197 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa GAP gap AUTO Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the specified gap CACLR channel s weighting filter in all sub block gaps Suffix gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Example SENS POW...

Page 896: ...p1 5 MHz gap2 10 MHz Default unit Hz Example POW ACH GAP2 MSIZ 5 MHz Gap channel 2 is only evaluated if the gap is wider than 5 MHz Manual operation See Minimum gap size to show Gap 1 Minimum gap size to show Gap 2 on page 196 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP gap AUTO Spacing This command defines the distance from sub block to the specified gap channel In Auto gap mode channels in the upper gap ar...

Page 897: ...it li ACPower GAP gap MANual UPPer CACLr RELative 904 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual UPPer CACLr RELative STATe 904 SENSe POWer ACHannel BWIDth GAP gap MANual LOWer 905 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP gap MANual LOWer 905 SENSe POWer ACHannel BWIDth GAP gap MANual UPPer 906 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP gap MANual UPPer 906 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe GAP gap MANual LOWe...

Page 898: ... State CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual LOWer ABSolute STATe SBGaps This command turns the absolute limit check for the specified lower gap CACLR channel on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe Suffix n 1 n li 1 n gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function...

Page 899: ...nnel Default unit DB Parameters for setting and query SBGaps AB BC CD DE EF FG GH Name of the gap defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks e g AB for the gap between sub blocks A and B Example CALC LIM ACP GAP1 MAN LOW ACLR REL AB 3dB Example See Example configuring and performing an asymmetrical MSR ACLR measurement on page 920 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual LOWer ACLR RE...

Page 900: ...ative SBGaps This command defines the relative limit of the specified lower gap CACLR channel The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit the R S FSV A uses the lower value for the limit check Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters Limit Defines the relative limit of the sp...

Page 901: ...ches the function on RST 0 Parameters for setting and query SBGaps AB BC CD DE EF FG GH Name of the gap defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks e g AB for the gap between sub blocks A and B Example CAL LIMit ACPower GAP2 MAN LOW STAT BC ON Example See Example configuring and performing an asymmetrical MSR ACLR measurement on page 920 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual UPPer A...

Page 902: ...CPower GAP gap MANual UPPer ABSolute STATe SBGaps This command turns the absolute limit check for the specified upper gap CACLR channel on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switc...

Page 903: ...ower in the specified gap channel in dB Default unit DB Parameters for setting and query SBGaps AB BC CD DE EF FG GH Name of the gap defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks e g AB for the gap between sub blocks A and B Example CALC LIM ACP GAP1 MAN UPP ACLR REL AB 3dB CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual UPPer ACLR RELative STATe SBGaps State CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP ga...

Page 904: ...and a relative limit the R S FSV A uses the lower value for the limit check Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters Limit Defines the relative limit of the specified gap channel in dB Default unit DB Parameters for setting and query SBGaps AB BC CD DE EF FG GH Name of the gap defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks e g AB for the gap between sub b...

Page 905: ... MANual LOWer SBGaps SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP gap MANual LOWer SBGaps Bandwidth SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP gap MANual LOWer SBGaps Defines the bandwidth of the lower gap channel in the specified gap Suffix gap 1 2 Gap channel number Parameters Bandwidth RST 3 84 MHz Default unit HZ Parameters for setting and query SBGaps AB BC CD DE EF FG GH Name of the gap defined by the letters...

Page 906: ...ks e g AB for the gap between sub blocks A and B Example POW ACH BAND GAP MAN UPP BC 5MHz Example See Example configuring and performing an asymmetrical MSR ACLR measurement on page 920 Manual operation See Gap Channel Bandwidths on page 197 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe GAP gap MANual LOWer SBGaps State SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe GAP gap MANual LOWer SBGaps This command turns the weigh...

Page 907: ...ction off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Parameters for setting and query SBGaps AB BC CD DE EF FG GH Name of the gap defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks e g AB for the gap between sub blocks A and B Example SENS POW ACH FILT GAP MAN UPP BC ON Example See Example configuring and performing an asymmetrical MSR ACLR measurement on page 920 Manual operation See Weighting Filters...

Page 908: ...eight ing filter This command is only available for for asymmetrical manual configuration of gap channels see SENSe POWer ACHannel GAP gap MODE on page 891 Suffix gap 1 2 Gap channel number Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Parameters for setting and query SBGaps AB BC CD DE EF FG GH Name of the gap defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks e g AB for the gap betwee...

Page 909: ...d C Example See Example configuring and performing an asymmetrical MSR ACLR measurement on page 920 Manual operation See Gap Channel Active on page 196 SENSe POWer ACHannel GCHannel STATe GAP gap MANual UPPer SBGaps State SENSe POWer ACHannel GCHannel STATe GAP gap MANual UPPer SBGaps Defines which upper gap channels are active in the specified gap Suffix gap 1 2 gap channel Parameters State ON OF...

Page 910: ... of left sub block 2 Suffix gap 1 2 Gap channel number Parameters Spacing Default unit HZ Parameters for setting and query SBGaps AB BC CD DE EF FG GH Name of the gap defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks e g AB for the gap between sub blocks A and B Example POW ACH SPAC GAP MAN LOW AB 5MHz Example See Example configuring and performing an asymmetrical MSR ACLR measurement on page 9...

Page 911: ...l NAME UALTernate ch 911 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb NAME CHANnel ch 912 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME GAP gap Name This command queries the name of the GAP channel Suffix gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters Name String containing the name of the channel RST Gap1 Gap2 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME UACHannel Name This command defines the name for the upper adjacent channel in asymmetrical MSR ch...

Page 912: ...signals only see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 867 Suffix sb 1 to 8 sub block number ch 1 to 18 Tx channel number Parameters Name String containing the name of the channel Example POW ACH SBL2 NAME CHAN2 Result B WCDMA Manual operation See Tx Channel Definition on page 189 12 5 3 8 Performing an ACLR measurement The following commands are required to perform an ACLR measure...

Page 913: ...14 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult UNIT 915 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE 916 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap ACLR RESult The command returns the ACLR power limit check results for the selected gap channel in an MSR ACLR measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This ...

Page 914: ...erGap_BC LowerGap_CD UpperGap_CD LowerGap_DE UpperGap_DE LowerGap_EF UpperGap_EF LowerGap_FG UpperGap_FG LowerGap_GH UpperGap_GH Limit check results for the CACLR power in the upper and lower gap channels for the selected gap Results are only returned for the available sub blocks PASSED Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has failed NONE No results available e g because limit checking was deac...

Page 915: ...RKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult UNIT Unit LTE and 5G applications only This command selects the unit the R S FSV A returns results for power measure ments You can query results with CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult Suffix n Window m irrelevant sb irrelevant Parameters Measurement ABS Channel power in dBm PHZ Channel power density in dBm Hz MPHZ Channel power density in dBm MHz RST ABS...

Page 916: ...easurement 916 Example configuring and performing an MSR ACLR measurement 918 Example configuring and performing an asymmetrical MSR ACLR measurement 920 Example configuring and performing an ACLR measurement In this example we will configure and perform an adjacent channel power measure ment Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control commands it does not necessari...

Page 917: ...relative display of the channel power POW ACH MODE REL Define transmission channel 1 as the reference channel POW ACH REF TXCH MAN 1 Saving the settings as a user standard Save the user standard with the name my_aclr_standard Weighting filters can only be defined for user defined standards CALC MARK FUNC POW STAN SAVE my_aclr_standard Defining Weighting Filters Define a roll off factor of 0 35 for...

Page 918: ...n POW ACH PRES ACP WAI Determine the ideal reference level for the measurement POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Initiate a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Limit Check Query the results of the limit check for the adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Query the results of the limit check for the first alternate channels CALC LIM ACP ALT1 RES Retrieving Results Query the results...

Page 919: ...Dwidth CHANnel2 2 5MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 BANDwidth CHANnel3 2 5MHZ Configuring Sub block B SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 TXCHannel COUNt 1 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 FREQuency CENTer 1 255GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 RFBWidth 4MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 CENTer CHANnel1 1 255GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 TECHnology CHANnel1 LTE_1_40 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 BANDwidth CH...

Page 920: ...lts for the ACLR measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW RES MCAC Results Transmission channels in sub block A 13 2346727385 13 2346723793 13 2390131759 Transmission channels in sub block B 17 0863336597 Transmission channels in sub block C 13 2390127767 13 2390134744 Totals for each sub block 8 4649064021 17 0863336597 10 2287131689 Adjacent channels 67 9740721019 67 9740728014 0 00434041734 0 00434041734...

Page 921: ...ock1 FREQuency CENTer 1 230GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 RFBWidth 12MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 CENTer CHANnel1 1 226GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 CENTer CHANnel2 1 230GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 CENTer CHANnel3 1 234GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 TECHnology CHANnel1 WCDMA SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 TECHnology CHANnel2 WCDMA SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 TECHnology CHANnel3 GSM ...

Page 922: ...Hannel BANDwidth ACHannel 1 60MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth ALTernate1 1 60MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 3MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate1 5MHZ Configuring gap channels manually SENSe POWer ACHannel AGCHannels ON SENSe POWer ACHannel GAP MODE MAN Configuring AB gap channels 1 lower 2 upper SENSe POWer ACHannel GCH GAP1 MAN LOW AB ON SENSe POWer ACHannel GCH GAP1 MAN UPP...

Page 923: ...OW BC 2 0MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP2 MAN LOW BC 4 2MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP1 MAN LOW BC 2 0MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth GAP2 MAN LOW BC 2 0MHZ Limit check CALC LIM ACP ON CALC LIM ACP GAP1 MAN LOW ABS STAT BC ON CALC LIM ACP GAP1 MAN LOW ABS BC 3DBM CALC LIM ACP GAP1 MAN LOW CACL REL STAT BC ON CALC LIM ACP GAP1 MAN LOW CACL REL BC 3DB CALC LIM ACP GAP2 MAN LOW ACLR R...

Page 924: ...The following commands are necessary to perform carrier to noise measurements CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL CN CN0 see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb SELect CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb STATe CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet Programming example Measuring the carrier to noise ratio This programming example...

Page 925: ...surement The following commands configure measurements of the occupied bandwidth Useful commands for occupied bandwidth measurements described elsewhere Configuring the channel SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel Defining search limits CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe on page 1180 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits LEFT on page 1...

Page 926: ...et the instrument RST Configuring the Measurement Set the center frequency to 800 MHz FREQ CENT 800MHz Set the reference level to 10 dBm DISP TRAC Y RLEV 10dBm Activate occupied bandwidth measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW Set the percentage of power to 99 POW BWID 99PCT Set the channel bandwidth to 21 kHz POW ACH BAND 21kHz Optimize the instrument settings according to the channel bandwidth P...

Page 927: ...reference range 945 Configuring the power classes 946 Configuring MSR SEM measurements 951 Configuring the list evaluation 957 Performing an SEM measurement 959 Retrieving results 959 Example SEM measurement 959 12 5 6 1 Managing measurement configurations The following commands control measurement configurations for SEM measurements CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb RESTore 927 SENSe ESPectrum sb...

Page 928: ...ad Standard on page 254 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet RESTore This command restores the default configurations of predefined SEM standards Note that the command will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Suffix sb 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 255 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STORe Standard This com...

Page 929: ...urious emission measurements RST AUTO Example SWE MODE ESP 12 5 6 3 Configuring a multi sem measurement In the Spectrum application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see Chapter 5 6 4 5 SEM with multiple sub blocks Multi SEM on page 236 Up to 8 sub blocks with 7 gaps can be defined For each sub block the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges li...

Page 930: ... sb SCOunt Subblocks This command defines the number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement Suffix sb irrelevant Parameters Subblocks Number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement Range 1 to 8 RST 1 Example ESP SCO 2 Manual operation See Sub Block Count on page 246 12 5 6 4 Configuring a sweep list The following commands define a sweep list for SEM measurements The sweep list cannot be configured usin...

Page 931: ... LIMit li RELative STOP 939 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP ABS 940 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP FUNCtion 940 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li STATe 941 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri POINts MINimum VALue 942 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri MLCalc 942 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri RLEVel 943 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri SWEep TIME 943 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri ...

Page 932: ...i BANDwidth VIDeo VBW This command defines the video bandwidth for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the video bandwidth has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 to 8 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters VBW Video bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths RST 10 0 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See VBW on page 242 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ...

Page 933: ...e identical for all ranges The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R S FSV3 K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see Chap ter 5 13 3 1 Resolution bandwidth and filter types on page 326 Suffix sb 1 to 8 ri 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters FilterType NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters CISPr PULS...

Page 934: ...ange Parameters Frequency Numeric value Note that the minimum frequency range of a SEM range is 20 Hz RST 12 75 MHz range 1 2 515 MHz range 2 2 515 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 241 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency of a SEM range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that ...

Page 935: ...e measurement range Parameters Attenuation Numeric value Refer to the data sheet for the attenuation range RST 10 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 243 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a SEM range on and off In case of high speed measurements the input attenuation has to be iden...

Page 936: ... preamplifier has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 to 8 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Preamp on page 243 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri INSert Mode This command inserts a new SEM range and updates the range numbers accordingly Suffix sb 1 to 8 ri 1 n Selects the SEM range Parameters Mode AFTer BEFore AFTer Inserts a range after t...

Page 937: ...ge 244 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li ABSolute STOP Level This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode Suffix sb 1 to 8 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range li 1 n Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range Rang...

Page 938: ...es an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 233 Suffix sb 1 to 8 ri 1 n Selects the SEM range li 1 n Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe E...

Page 939: ...ds to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative start value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARtcommand to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STARt FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see Chapter 12 5 6 11 Example SEM measurement on page 959 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop ...

Page 940: ... on page 233 Suffix sb 1 to 8 ri 1 n Selects the SEM range li 1 n Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP FUNCtion on page 940 Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe...

Page 941: ...alue Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP command to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STOP FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see Chapter 12 5 6 11 Example SEM measurement on page 959 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop n on page 244 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li STATe State This command selects the limit check mode for all ...

Page 942: ...32001 RST 1 Example SENSe1 ESPectrum RANGe3 POINts MIN VALue 400 Manual operation See Min Sweep Points on page 245 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri MLCalc Function Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n th power class for overlap ping ranges in Multi SEM measurements For details see Limit calculation for individ ual ranges on page 237 Suffix sb 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi SEM m...

Page 943: ...page 243 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri SWEep TIME SweepTime This command defines the sweep time for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the sweep time has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters SweepTime Sweep time The range depends on the ratios of the span to the RBW and the RBW to the VBW Refe...

Page 944: ...over at least the span of the range the x axis has to be linear the unit has to be dB Suffix sb 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters Transducer String containing the transducer file name including the path information Manual operation See Transducer Factor on page 243 SENSe ESPectrum sb SSETup State Enables or disables symmetrical configuratio...

Page 945: ...r Suffix sb 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Bandwidth minimum span value span of reference range RST 3 84 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Tx Bandwidth on page 248 SENSe ESPectrum sb FILTer RRC ALPHa Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the RRC filter The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power Suffix sb 1 to 8 Sub block in a...

Page 946: ...highest peak within the reference range CPOWer Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method RST CPOWer Manual operation See Power Reference Type on page 248 12 5 6 6 Configuring the power classes The following commands define the power classes for SEM measurements CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb LIMits 947 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb MODE 948 CALCulate n ...

Page 947: ...lue range for power class 2 is defined as Max1 to 200 Range 199 to 199 Default unit DBM Max2 Defines the value range for power class 2 as Max1 to Max2 Only available for CALC LIM ESP PCL COUNT 3 If only 3 power classes are defined the value range for power class 3 is defined as Max2 to 200 Range 199 to 199 Max2 must be higher than Max1 Max3 Defines the value range for power class 3 as Max2 to Max3...

Page 948: ...pc EXCLusive command RST AUTO Example CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb VALue Power This command activates the manual limit line selection as and specifies the expected power as a value Depending on the entered value the associated predefined limit lines is selected This command has the same effect as a combination of the CALC ...

Page 949: ...nt li irrelevant sb 1 to 8 pc irrelevant Parameters NoPowerClasses 1 to 4 RST 1 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined Manual operation See Adding or Removing a Power Class on page 250 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc EXCLusive State This command selects the power class used by the measurement if CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb MODE is set to manual Note that...

Page 950: ...both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed RST REL Example CALC LIM ESP PCL LIM ABS Manual operation See Used Power Classes on page 249 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MAXimum Level This command defines the upper limit of a particular power class Note The last power class always has an upp...

Page 951: ...LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc COUNt on page 949 Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant sb 1 to 8 pc 1 n power class Parameters Level Range 200 dBm to 199 9 dBm Default unit dBm Example CALC LIM ESP PCL2 MIN 40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to 40 dBm Manual operation See PMin PMax on page 250 12 5 6 7 Configuring MSR SEM measurements The following commands configure MSR SE...

Page 952: ...SP2 MSR BCAT 1 Set the base station class to medium range ESP2 MSR CLAS MED Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm ESP2 MSR MPOW 10 Set the frequency range of the base station to 3 GHz ESP2 MSR BAND HIGH Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2 MSR RFBW 20MHZ Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2 MSR APPL Manual operation See Apply to SEM on page 253 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BAND Range Defines t...

Page 953: ...es the band category for MSR measurements i e the combination of available carriers to measure Suffix sb 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Category 1 2 3 1 2 carriers LTE FDD and W CDMA 2 3 carriers LTE FDD W CDMA and GSM EDGE 3 2 carriers LTE TDD and TD SCDMA RST 1 Example Select the band category 1 ESP2 MSR BCAT 1 Set the base station class to medium range ESP2 MSR CLAS MED ...

Page 954: ...maximum output power to 10 dBm ESP2 MSR MPOW 10 Set the frequency range of the base station to 3 GHz ESP2 MSR BAND HIGH Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2 MSR RFBW 20MHZ Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2 MSR APPL Manual operation See Base Station Class on page 251 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR GSM CARRier Power Defines the power of the GSM carrier if available see SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR GSM...

Page 955: ...defines whether a GSM Edge carrier is located at the edge of the speci fied RF bandwidth In this case the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges This command is only available for band category 2 see SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BCATegory on page 953 Suffix sb 1 to 8 Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example Select the band category 2 ESP2 MSR BCAT BC2 Set the base station class to med...

Page 956: ...et the base station class to medium range ESP2 MSR CLAS MED Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm ESP2 MSR MPOW 10 Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2 MSR RFBW 20MHZ LTE present ESP2 MSR LTE CPR ON Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2 MSR APPL Manual operation See Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge on page 252 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR MPOWer Power Defines the maximum output power of th...

Page 957: ...rements Suffix sb 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Bandwidth Bandwidth in Hz RST 10 0 MHz Default unit Hz Example Select the band category 1 ESP2 MSR BCAT 1 Set the base station class to medium range ESP2 MSR CLAS MED Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm ESP2 MSR MPOW 10 Set the frequency range of the base station to 3 GHz ESP2 MSR BAND HIGH Set the base station RF bandwidt...

Page 958: ...State This command turns the list evaluation on and off Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation Manual operation See List Evaluation State result summary on page 256 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch IMMediate CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch IMMediate This command initiates a list evaluation Suffix n Window CALCulate n ESPectrum ...

Page 959: ...ing results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for SEM measure ments CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL on page 1246 TRACe n DATA on page 1162 TRACe n DATA MEMory on page 1162 TRACe n DATA X on page 1163 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 862 12 5 6 11 Example SEM measurement In this example we will configure and perform an SEM measurement Note that this exam...

Page 960: ... 5 when measuring the reference power ESP FILT RRC ON ESP FILT ALPH 0 5 Configuring Power Classes Define 3 power classes CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 3 Define the value ranges of the three power classes as dBm power class 1 200 to 100 power class 2 100 to 0 power class 3 0 to 200 CALC LIM ESP LIM 100 0 Define an absolute limit check for class 1 CALC LIM ESP PCL1 LIM ABS Define a relative limit check for ...

Page 961: ...can be used It has to cover the corresponding frequency range SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer SELect Transducer SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer UNIT DB SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer COMMent Test Transducer Frequency Span 0 MHz bis 20 Ghz SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer DATA 0e6 5 20e9 3 Include a transducer called transducer for range 2 ESP RANG2 TRAN Transducer Configuring the limit check Check the absolut...

Page 962: ...STOP 20 Configuring List Evaluation Activate list evaluation i e the peak is determined for each range after each sweep CALC ESP PSE AUTO ON Define a peak threshold of 10 dB CALC ESP PSE MARG 10dB Managing Measurement Configurations Save the current configuration in a new file named 3GPP_UL_User in the same directory so the standard is not overwritten ESP PRES STOR WCDMA 3GPP UL 3GPP_UL_User xml P...

Page 963: ...ng an on going sweep operation Useful commands for configuring the sweep described elsewhere SENSe SWEep MODE on page 929 Remote commands exclusive to spurious measurements SENSe LIST RANGe ri BANDwidth RESolution 964 SENSe LIST RANGe ri BANDwidth VIDeo 964 SENSe LIST RANGe ri BREak 964 SENSe LIST RANGe ri COUNt 965 SENSe LIST RANGe ri DELete 965 SENSe LIST RANGe ri DETector 965 SENSe LIST RANGe r...

Page 964: ...t for available resolution bandwidths Default unit Hz Example LIST RANG2 BAND RES 3KHZ Manual operation See RBW on page 276 SENSe LIST RANGe ri BANDwidth VIDeo VBW This command defines the video bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters VBW Video bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths Default unit Hz Example...

Page 965: ... ri COUNt This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list Suffix ri irrelevant Return values Ranges Number of ranges in the sweep list Example LIST RANG COUN Usage Query only SENSe LIST RANGe ri DELete This command removes a range from the sweep list Note that you cannot delete the reference range a minimum of three ranges is mandatory Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Exampl...

Page 966: ...just the start fre quency of the first range and the stop frequency of the last range to the span Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters Frequency Numeric value RST 12 75 MHz range 1 2 515 MHz range 2 2 515 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Example LIST RANG2 STAR 2MHZ Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 275 SENSe LIST RANGe ri FREQuency STOP Frequency This command define...

Page 967: ...le if the EMI R S FSV3 K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see Chap ter 5 13 3 1 Resolution bandwidth and filter types on page 326 Suffix ri 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters FilterType NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters CISPr PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R S FSV3 K54 option Return value for query is always...

Page 968: ...IST RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the input attenuation for a spurious emis sion measurement range on and off Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example LIST RANG2 INP ATT AUTO ON Manual operation See RF Attenuation Mode on page 277 SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preampli...

Page 969: ...limit at the start frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example LIST RANG2 LIM STAR 200 Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Abs Limit Stop on page 278 SENSe LIST RANGe ri LIMit STATe State This command turns the limit check for all spurious emission measurement ranges on and off Suffix ri irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example LIST RANG2 LIM STAT ON Manu...

Page 970: ...eep points see Chapter 6 5 1 8 How much data is measured sweep points and sweep count on page 469 RST 1001 Example LIST RANG2 POIN 1000 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 277 SENSe LIST RANGe ri RLEVel RefLevel This command defines the reference level for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters RefLevel Reference level Refer to the data s...

Page 971: ...e Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example LIST RANG2 SWE TIME AUTO ON Manual operation See Sweep Time Mode on page 276 SENSe LIST RANGe ri TRANsducer Transducer This command selects a transducer factor for a spurious emission measurement range Note the following prerequisites for the selected transducer The transducer must cover at least the span of the range The x axis has to be linear The unit...

Page 972: ...e n PSEarch PSHow 973 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow 973 CALCulate n PSEarch SUBRanges 973 CALCulate n PEAKsearch SUBRanges 973 CALCulate n PSEarch AUTO State CALCulate n PEAKsearch AUTO State This command turns the list evaluatio n on and off Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation Manual operation See List Evaluation State on page...

Page 973: ...hold to 100 dB Manual operation See Margin on page 279 CALCulate n PSEarch PSHow State CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow State This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off Peak labels are blue squares Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Manual operation See Show Peaks on page 279 CALCulate n PSEarch SUBRanges Number...

Page 974: ...commands are required to perform a Spurious measurement SENS SWE MODE LIST see SENSe SWEep MODE on page 929 INITiate n IMMediate on page 861 see Chapter 12 5 1 Performing mea surements on page 859 12 5 7 6 Retrieving and saving settings and results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for Spurious mea surements Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described...

Page 975: ...nt RST Resets the instrument SWE MODE LIST Activates spurious emissions measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode Spurious measurement has to be in single sweep mode to be configured and no sweep operation may be running If required a sweep stop can be ensured by INIT IMM WAI Configuring a Sweep List LIST RANG COUNt Returns the number of measurement ranges in the sweep list LIST RANG4 DE...

Page 976: ...es 601 sweep points for range 1 LIST RANG1 RLEV 20 Defines a reference level of 20 dBm for range 1 LIST RANG1 SWE TIME 5 Defines a manual sweep time of 5 second for range 1 Create a transducer that can be used It has to cover the corresponding frequency range SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer SELect Test SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer UNIT DB SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer COMMent Test Transducer Frequency...

Page 977: ...statistical measurements 977 Configuring statistical measurements 978 Using gate ranges for statistical measurements 979 Scaling the diagram 981 Performing a statistical measurement 984 Retrieving results 984 Programming example measuring statistics 985 12 5 8 1 Activating statistical measurements The following commands activate statistical measurements CALCulate n STATistics APD STATe 977 CALCula...

Page 978: ...r m Y on page 1190 Remote commands exclusive to statistical measurements CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent 978 CALCulate n STATistics NSAMples 978 CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent Probability This command sets a marker to a particular probability value You can query the corre sponding level with CALCulate n MARKer m X Using the command turns delta markers into normal markers Suffix n Window m Marker Pa...

Page 979: ...WEep EGATe TRACe t STATe gr 980 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STOP gr 980 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the gate of a particular trace Suffix t Trace Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM MyComment Defines a comment for the gate in trace 1 Manual operation See Comment on page 291 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t PERiod Leng...

Page 980: ... for gate range 1 the start time is 0 ms for gate range 3 the start time is 2 ms for gate range 5 the start time is 4 ms Default unit s Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms Manual operation See Range x Start Stop on page 291 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STATe gr State This command includes or excludes a gate range for a particular trace Suffix t Trac...

Page 981: ...opping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms Manual operation See Range x Start Stop on page 291 12 5 8 4 Scaling the diagram The following commands set up the diagram for statistical measurements CALCulate n STATistics PRESet 981 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE 982 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe 982 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel 982 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer 983 CAL...

Page 982: ...omplete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process This is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix n Window Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 290 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe Range This command defines the display range of the x axis for statistical measurements The effects are identical to DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe Suffix n Window Param...

Page 983: ...f the diagram Suffix n Window Parameters Magnitude The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Y Max Y Min on page 293 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis Suffix n Window Parameters Unit PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the perc...

Page 984: ...2 5 8 6 Retrieving results The following commands are required to retrieve the measurement results Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 1177 Remote commands exclusive to statistical results CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t 984 CALCulate n STATistics RESult res 985 CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t Probability This command queries the results of the...

Page 985: ...or Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas mean power peak power crest factor Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only 12 5 8 7 Program...

Page 986: ...on to 1000 Defining Gate ranges SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM GSM useful part Defines a comment for the gate SWE EGAT TRAC1 PER 4 61536ms Sets the gate period to 4 61536ms SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 15us Sets the start of range 1 to 15 μs SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 557 8us Sets the end of range 1 to 15 μs start time 542 77 μs useful part 557 8 μs SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON Activates the use of range 1 Performing the Measu...

Page 987: ...level range of 20 dB for the x axis CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 0001 Sets the minimum of the y axis to 0 01 probability CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 1 0 Sets the maximum of the y axis to 100 probability CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Displays percentage values on y axis scale 12 5 9 Measuring the time domain power All remote control commands specific to time domain power measurements are descri bed here Configuring...

Page 988: ...er CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage State This command switches on or off averaging for the active power measurement in zero span in the window specified by the suffix n If activated a time domain value is cal culated from the trace after each sweep in the end all values are averaged to calcu late the final result The number of results required for the calculation of average is define...

Page 989: ... RST 0 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary STATe State This command turns time domain power measurements on and off This measurement is only available in zero span When you turn the measurement on the R S FSV A activates a marker and positions it on the peak power level in the marker search range Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEA...

Page 990: ...ermine the RMS time domain power on and off The R S FSV A performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Results on page 301 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe State This command turns the evaluation to determine the standard deviation of the time domain power on and off The R S FSV...

Page 991: ...have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values MeanPower Mean power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN PHOLd RESult This command quer...

Page 992: ...age RESult This command queries the average positive peak time domain power The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage on page 988 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode...

Page 993: ...before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values PeakPower Peak power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only Manual operation See Results on page 301 Measuring the RMS power CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS AVERage RESult This command queries the average RMS of th...

Page 994: ...wer of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESult This command queries the RMS of the time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 ...

Page 995: ... PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values StandardDeviation Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUN...

Page 996: ...sweep time to 640 µs FREQ SPAN 0 Sets the instrument to zero span CALC MARK FUNC SUMM STAT ON Turns on time domain power measurements CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE ON CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS ON Turns the evalution of the mean peak and RMS time domain power CALC MARK X SLIM ON Activates limit lines for evaluation CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 1ms Sets the left limit line to 326 µs CAL...

Page 997: ...nics STATe State This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off Note the following If you perform the measurement in the frequency domain the search range for the frequency of the first harmonic whose power is determined is defined by the last span If you perform the measurement in the time domain the current center frequency is used as the frequency of the first harmonic Thus t...

Page 998: ...resolution bandwidth of the harmonic in respect to the band width of the first harmonic Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 identical ON 1 a multiple RST 1 Manual operation See Harmonic RBW Auto on page 309 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics NoHarmonics This command selects the number of harmonics that the R S FSV A looks for Suffix n Window m Marker Paramete...

Page 999: ...llowing commands retrieve the results of the harmonic distortion measurement CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion 999 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST 999 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion This command queries the total harmonic distortion of the signal To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of th...

Page 1000: ...irst harmonic The unit for these is dB 12 5 10 5 Example measuring the harmonic distortion Configuring the Measurement RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Turns on single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC HARM ON Turns on the harmonic distortion measurement CALC MARK FUNC HARM NHAR 3 Defines three harmonics to be found CALC MARK FUNC HARM BAND AUTO OFF Turns off automatic bandwidth selection CALC MARK...

Page 1001: ...MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult 1002 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MAXimum 1002 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MINimum 1003 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI STATe State This command initiates a measurement to determine the third intercept point A two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instru ment Marker 1 and marker 2 both normal markers are...

Page 1002: ...mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values TOI Third order intercept point Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC TOI RES Outputs the measured value Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MAXimum This comma...

Page 1003: ...o perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values TOI Minimum third order intercept point Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement INIT WAI S...

Page 1004: ...he measurement The following commands control the measurement Useful commands for AM modulation depth described elsewhere CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 1174 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative on page 1190 CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 1177 Remote commands exclusive to AM modulation depth measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe 1004 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEAR...

Page 1005: ...ults of the AM modulation depth measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n Window m Marker t Trace Return values ModulationDepth Modulation depth in Usage Query only 12 5 12 2 Example meas...

Page 1006: ... 1KHZ Corrects the position of delta marker 3 by 1 kHz CALC MARK FUNC MDEP RES Queries the measurement results for the repositioned markers 12 5 13 Remote commands for EMI measurements The following commands are required to perform EMI measurements in a remote envi ronment This measurement requires the R S FSV3 K54 option The following tasks specific to the EMI application are described here Activ...

Page 1007: ...ate n DELTamarker m MREFerence on page 1173 CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO MARKer md on page 1175 CALCulate n DELTamarker ms LINK TO MARKer md on page 1172 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK on page 1171 CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 1176 Remote commands exclusive to configuring EMI markers CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector 1007 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DET...

Page 1008: ...SEarch AUTO 1008 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch AUTO 1008 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement PEAKsearch AUTO 1008 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELl 1008 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELl 1008 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t X SPACing 1009 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement PEAKsearch AUTO State CALCulate n DELTamarker...

Page 1009: ...LINear Example DISP TRAC X SPAC LOG Manual operation See Frequency Axis Scaling on page 342 12 5 13 4 Configuring EMI limit lines The commands required to define limit lines for EMI measurements are described in Chapter 12 8 4 Configuring display lines on page 1230 12 5 13 5 Controlling LISN The commands required to control a LISN are described here INPut ip LISN FILTer HPASs STATe 1009 INPut ip L...

Page 1010: ...t ip LISN PHASe Phase This command selects one LISN phase to be measured Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters Phase L1 L2 Available for networks with four phases R S ESH2Z5 R S ENV4200 and R S ENV432 L3 Available for networks with four phases R S ESH2Z5 R S ENV4200 and R S ENV432 N RST L1 Example Select phase L1 INP LISN PHAS L1 Manual operation See Phase on page 343 INPut ip LISN TYPE Type This co...

Page 1011: ...la ble RST OFF Example Select LISN INP LISN TYPE TWOP Manual operation See LISN Type on page 343 12 5 13 6 Retrieving EMI results The commands required to retrieve EMI measurement results are described here Useful commands for retrieving EMI measurement results described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 1177 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 1174 CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 1190 CALCu...

Page 1012: ...u have currently set Example CALC MARK1 FUNC FME RES Queries the result of marker 1 Usage Query only CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LCONdition Condition CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LCONdition Condition This command queries the condition of a marker position in relation to a certain limit line Suffix n Window m Marker li Limit line Return values Con...

Page 1013: ...E LIM2 LDEL Queries the distance of marker 3 to the second limit line Usage Query only 12 5 13 7 Evaluating the results The commands required to control the demodulation of signals at the marker position are described in Chapter 12 8 3 14 Marker demodulation on page 1218 12 5 13 8 Programming example EMI measurement This example demonstrates how to detect electromagnetic interferences EMI in a rem...

Page 1014: ... to 3 on trace 1 Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2 CALC MARK1 TRAC 1 CALC MARK2 TRAC 1 CALC MARK3 TRAC 1 CALC MARK4 TRAC 2 CALC MARK5 TRAC 2 CALC MARK6 TRAC 2 Use CISPR average detector for all markers during final test CALC MARK1 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK2 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK3 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK4 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK5 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK6 FUNC FME DET CAV Configuring a li...

Page 1015: ... DELT CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM COND CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM DELT CALC MARK4 FUNC FME LIM COND CALC MARK4 FUNC FME LIM DELT CALC MARK5 FUNC FME LIM COND CALC MARK5 FUNC FME LIM DELT CALC MARK6 FUNC FME LIM COND CALC MARK6 FUNC FME LIM DELT 12 5 14 List evaluations A list evaluation is a multiple power measurement that measures the power at up to 200 frequencies The measurement itself is a time domai...

Page 1016: ...mand line This method causes the least delay between the measurement and the result output However it requires the control computer to wait for the response from the instrument Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement With this method the control computer may be used for other activities while the measurement is being performed However more time is needed for ...

Page 1017: ... the R S FSV A produces a service request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual mea surements has been performed Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the results if all frequencies have been measured For more information on querying the results see SENSe LIST POWer RESult Parameters Frequency Defines the frequency Each frequenc...

Page 1018: ...ese parameters are valid for every frequency you want to measure The state of the first three parameters PeakPower RMSPower and AVG Power define the number of results for each frequency in the list Note that you have to set the trigger level after sending this command Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 Turns peak power evaluation on and off RST 1 State ON OFF 0 1 Turns RMS power evaluation on and off RST...

Page 1019: ... 2 935 4 0 10 10 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 µs 0 3 935 6 0 10 20 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 µs 0 Measurement with synchronization via service request ESE 1 SRE 32 Configures the status reporting system to produce a service request LIST POW SET ON ON OFF EXT POS 10us 434us Turns on the list evaluation configures the global list evaluation settings and evaluates the peak and RMS power LIST POW 935 2...

Page 1020: ...onds to the TTL level In case of a video signal you can define any threshold The figure below shows the relations between the available trigger settings The measurement is always on trace 1 either with the peak detector to determine the peak power or the RMS detector to determine the RMS power Overall you can config ure the measurement independent of the instrument setup with the commands listed b...

Page 1021: ... PulsePeriod OfPulses This command configures power measurements on pulses in the time domain To evaluate the pulse power the R S FSV A uses the data captured during a previous measurement The data recorded during the set measurement time is combined to a measured value for each pulse according to the detector specified and the indicated number of results is output as a list To get a valid result ...

Page 1022: ...e results of the pulse power measurement This command may be used to obtain measurement results in an asynchronous way using the service request mechanism for synchronization to the end of the measure ment If there are no results the command returns an error Return values PulsePower List of pulse powers The number of values depends on the number of pulses you have been measuring The unit is dBm Us...

Page 1023: ...asurement time Range 1 µs to 30 s Default unit S TriggerSource Selects a trigger source TriggerLevel Defines a trigger level The trigger level is available for the video trigger In that case the level is a percentage of the diagram height In case of an external trigger the R S FSV A uses a fix TTL level Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT TriggerOffset Defines the trigger delay Range 0 s to 30 s RST 0...

Page 1024: ...lses with synchronization to the end Analyzer produces a service request On service request MPOW RES Returns the results of the measurements 20 power levels MPOW RES MIN Returns the lowest of the 20 power level that have been measured Initiliazing the measurement and querying results simultaneously MPOW 935 2MHZ 1MHZ 434us VID 50 5us MEAN 20 Configures initiates and queries the results of the meas...

Page 1025: ...ays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels See Chapter 4 2 R S multiview on page 126 SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow n SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command...

Page 1026: ...e 1032 LAYout WINDow n REPLace 1032 LAYout WINDow n TYPE 1033 LAYout ADD WINDow WindowName Direction WindowType This command adds a window to the display in the active channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Query parameters WindowName String containing t...

Page 1027: ...ult summary SGRam Spectrogram LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax WindowName_1 WindowIndex_1 WindowName_n WindowIndex_n Return values WindowName string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its...

Page 1028: ...ndowName String containing the name of an existing window the selected window is placed next to or replaces By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow REPLace Destination the selected window is moved to relative to the ref erence window Exam...

Page 1029: ...e and index of all active windows in the active channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query WindowType Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 1026 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table Usage Setting only LAYout SPLitter Index1 Index2 Position This command ch...

Page 1030: ...d softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See Figure 12 2 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically...

Page 1031: ...arameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow n REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Suffix n Window Query parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow WindowType Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 1026 for a list of availa ble window types Return values NewWi...

Page 1032: ...NDow command Suffix n Window Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAYout WINDow n REPLace WindowType This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix n in the active channel The effect of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow n ADD command Suffix n Window Settin...

Page 1033: ...lications and measurements Suffix n 1 n Window Parameters WindowType Example LAY WIND2 TYPE 12 6 3 Examples configuring the result display The following example demonstrates how to configure result displays in a remote envi ronment 12 6 3 1 Example 1 adding and arranging windows Starting from the default initial display in the Spectrum application Frequency Sweep we will configure the following re...

Page 1034: ...display to 60 of the entire width LAY SPL 1 3 60 Move the splitter between the Spectrogram window and the Marker Peak List window to enlarge the Spectrogram display to 60 of the entire width LAY SPL 2 4 60 Querying all displayed windows Query the name and number of all displayed windows from top left to bottom right LAY CAT Result 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Maximizing a Window Maximize the window 2 Spectrogr...

Page 1035: ... Query the name and number of all displayed windows from top left to bottom right LAY CAT Result 1 1 4 4 Changing the size of individual windows Move the splitter between the Frequency Sweep window and the Marker Table window to enlarge the spectrum display to 80 of the entire height LAY SPL 1 4 80 12 7 Setting basic measurement parameters All commands that set measurement independent parameters a...

Page 1036: ...h power sensors 1086 Configuring the outputs 1097 12 7 1 1 RF input CALibration PADJust STATe 1036 INPut ip ATTenuation PROTection RESet 1037 INPut ip CONNector 1037 INPut ip COUPling 1037 INPut ip DPATh 1038 INPut ip FILTer YIG STATe 1038 INPut ip IMPedance 1038 INPut ip IMPedance PTYPe 1039 INPut ip SELect 1039 CALibration PADJust STATe Activates or deactivates the preselector adjustment This co...

Page 1037: ...ter on page 787 The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first For details on the protection mechanism see RF Input Protection on page 357 Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Example INP ATT PROT RES INPut ip CONNector ConnType Determines which connector the input for the measurement is taken from Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters ConnType RF RF input connector RFPRobe Active RF...

Page 1038: ...cally for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used Example INP DPAT OFF Manual operation See Direct Path on page 358 INPut ip FILTer YIG STATe State Enables or disables the YIG filter Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 359 INPut ip IMPedance Impedance ...

Page 1039: ...ype Defines the type of matching pad used for impedance conversion for RF input Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters PadType SRESistor MLPad SRESistor Series R MLPad Minimum Loss Pad RST SRESistor Example INP IMP 100 INP IMP PTYP MLP Manual operation See Impedance on page 358 INPut ip SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to in...

Page 1040: ...n external frontend 1053 Commands for initial configuration The following commands are required when you initially set up an external frontend SENSe EFRontend fe CONNection STATe 1040 SENSe EFRontend fe CONNection CONFig 1041 SENSe EFRontend fe CONNection CSTate 1042 SENSe EFRontend fe FREQuency BAND COUNt 1042 SENSe EFRontend fe FREQuency BAND b LOWer 1043 SENSe EFRontend fe FREQuency BAND b UPPe...

Page 1041: ...ive use of frontend by R S FSV A EFR CONN ON Manual operation See External Frontend Connection State on page 430 SENSe EFRontend fe CONNection CONFig Type IPAddress DeviceID SymbolicName Configures the connection to the external frontend Suffix fe 1 Connected frontend Parameters Type FE44S FE50DTR String in double quotes containing the type of frontend to be connected IPAddress string in double qu...

Page 1042: ...ection CSTate Queries the status of the physical connection to the external frontend Suffix fe 1 Connected frontend Return values State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Frontend not connected connection error ON 1 Frontend connected Usage Query only Manual operation See External Frontend Connection State on page 430 SENSe EFRontend fe FREQuency BAND COUNt Queries the number of frequency bands provided by the sele...

Page 1043: ...ation See Frequency Band on page 432 SENSe EFRontend fe FREQuency BAND b UPPer Queries the end of the frequency range supported by the frontend Suffix fe 1 Connected frontend b 1 n Band for multi band frontends Return values StopFreq End frequency of the specified band Example Query end frequency of second band EFR FREQ BAND2 UPP Result 44000000000 Usage Query only Manual operation See Frequency B...

Page 1044: ... BCON SEL IF HIGH Manual operation See Frequency Band Configuration on page 432 SENSe EFRontend fe FREQuency IFRequency Queries the currently used intermediate frequency IF for frequency conversion Suffix fe 1 Connected frontend Return values IFFrequency numeric Default unit HZ Example EFR FREQ IFR Usage Query only Manual operation See Intermediate Frequency on page 433 SENSe EFRontend fe FREQuenc...

Page 1045: ...000 1000000000 Example Query the available reference levels EFR FREQ REF LIST Result 10000000 640000000 1000000000 Use 640 MHz reference EFR FREQ REF 640000000 Usage Query only Manual operation See Reference Frequency on page 433 SENSe EFRontend fe IDN Queries the device identifcation information IDN of the frontend Suffix fe 1 Connected frontend Return values DevInfo string without quotes Rohde S...

Page 1046: ...er is used OFF 0 DHCP off ON 1 DHCP on RST 0 Example EFR NETW Result 123 456 78 90 255 255 255 0 ON Manual operation See IP Address on page 435 See Subnet Mask on page 435 See DHCP on page 435 See Apply Network Settings on page 436 SENSe EFRontend STATe State Activates or deactivates the general use of an external frontend for the application Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 The frontend is disco...

Page 1047: ...le occurring at different IF signal frequencies Suffix fe 1 Connected frontend ch 1 n Currently irrelevant Parameters File string in double quotes Path and file name of the correction data file The file must be in s2p format If the specified file is not found or does not have the correct for mat an error message is returned 256 File name not found 150 String data error Example EFR ALIG FILE FE44S ...

Page 1048: ...eration See FW Update on page 431 SENSe EFRontend fe SELFtest Performs a selftest on the frontend to compare the current performance and character istic values with the specified values for the frontend As a result the success is returned Suffix fe 1 Connected frontend Return values Result 0 No error 0 Error RST 0 Example EFR SELF Result 0 Usage Query only Manual operation See Start Selftest on pa...

Page 1049: ...ional description of the test process FirmwareVersion Firmware version of the controlling instrument R S FSV A FrontendLibrary Version Version of the control dll with the format x y z FrontendServerVer sion Version of the RRH server with the format x y z FE44A only Date Date the selftest was performed with the format dd mm yyyy Time Time the selftest was performed with the format hh mm ss State Te...

Page 1050: ...1 0 encoding UTF 8 Sequence xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation SelfTest_Schema xsd Name DeviceCheck Name FirmwareVersion 1 50 21 1 1 0 Beta FirmwareVersion FrontendLibraryVersion 0 8 0 FrontendLibraryVersion Date 15 01 2021 Date Time 08 51 35 Time State FAILED State Version 1 0 0 Version SequenceCategory Name Frontend Voltages Name Description test desc...

Page 1051: ...emperature Name Description test description Description State PASSED State Version 1 0 0 Version Type Diagnose Type SequenceStep Name TEMP_FE1 Name LimitLow 0 000 LimitLow LimitHigh 60 000 LimitHigh MeasValue 39 300 MeasValue State PASSED State Version 1 0 0 Version SequenceStep SequenceCategory SequenceCategory Name Synthesizer Voltage Name Description test description Description State PASSED S...

Page 1052: ...PASSED State Version 1 0 0 Version SequenceStep SequenceStep Name SYNTH_REF5V Name LimitLow 4 500 LimitLow LimitHigh 5 500 LimitHigh MeasValue 5 031 MeasValue State PASSED State Version 1 0 0 Version SequenceStep SequenceCategory SequenceCategory Name Supply Voltage Name Description test description Description State PASSED State Version 1 0 0 Version Type Diagnose Type SequenceStep Name SUPPLY_12...

Page 1053: ...50 LimitHigh MeasValue 5 507 MeasValue State PASSED State Version 1 0 0 Version SequenceStep SequenceCategory Sequence Programming example configuring an external frontend The following example describes how to configure RF frontend settings in remote oper ation Prepare the instrument Preset RST Create new IQ Analyzer channel INST SEL IQ Enable 640MHz Reference ROSC O640 ON Enable general use of e...

Page 1054: ...Rontend FREQuency REFerence 640000000 Query ranges of the operating frequency band SENSe EFRontend FREQuency BAND1 LOWer Response in Hz 24000000000 24 GHz SENSe EFRontend FREQuency BAND1 UPPer Response in Hz 44000000000 44 GHz Add cable correction data by loading an s2p file SENSe EFRontend ALIGnment FILE C R_S Instr user external_frontends FE44S touchstonefiles if_default_cable_1347_7552_00 s2p S...

Page 1055: ...ern general usage of an external mixer SENSe MIXer x STATe 1055 SENSe MIXer x BIAS HIGH 1055 SENSe MIXer x BIAS LOW 1056 SENSe MIXer x LOPower 1056 SENSe MIXer x SIGNal 1056 SENSe MIXer x THReshold 1057 SENSe MIXer x STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and...

Page 1056: ...vel This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Suffix x 1 n irrelevant Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 412 SENSe MIXer x SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is onl...

Page 1057: ...his command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer x SIGNal on page 1056 Suffix x 1 n irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Default unit DB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 412 Mixer settings The following commands are re...

Page 1058: ...over frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer x STATe on page 1055 Suffix x 1 n irrelevant Parameters Frequency Default unit HZ Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq o...

Page 1059: ...xample MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Manual operation See Preset Band on page 409 SENSe MIXer x HARMonic BAND Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer x STATe on page 1055 Suffix x 1 n irrelevant Parameters Band KA Q U V E W F D G Y J USER S...

Page 1060: ...a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Suffix x 1 n Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Range 1 Range 2 on page 410 SENSe MIXer x HARMonic HIGH VALue HarmOrder This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high second range Suffix x 1 n irrelevant Parameters HarmOrder numeric value Range 3 to 128 USER ba...

Page 1061: ...rmonic Type on page 410 SENSe MIXer x HARMonic LOW HarmOrder This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Suffix x 1 n irrelevant Parameters HarmOrder Range 3 to 128 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 4 for band U Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 410 SENSe MIXer x IF Queries the intermediate frequency currently used by th...

Page 1062: ...rnal mixer whose file is required The R S FSV A automatically selects the correct cvl file for the cur rent IF As an alternative you can also select a user defined conversion loss table acl file Return values FileName As the result of a query the actually used file is returned Manual operation See Conversion Loss on page 410 SENSe MIXer x LOSS TABLe LOW FileName This command defines the file name ...

Page 1063: ...rs Average Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion Loss on page 410 SENSe MIXer x PORTs PortType This command selects the mixer type Suffix x 1 n irrelevant Parameters PortType 2 3 2 Two port mixer 3 Three port mixer RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 409 SENSe MIXer x RFOVerrange STATe State If enabled the band...

Page 1064: ...o be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 1067 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Band K KA Q U V E W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined ban...

Page 1065: ... strings containing the file names Example CORR CVL CAT Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEar This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 1067 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS_TAB_4 Selects the con...

Page 1066: ...R CVL SEL LOSS_TAB_4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 417 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic HarmOrder This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be pe...

Page 1067: ...igned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 1067 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters PortType 2 3 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS_TAB_4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 417 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect ...

Page 1068: ...n ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP ...

Page 1069: ...strument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CORR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band SENS CORR CVL BAND USER SENS CORR CVL HARM 6 SENS CORR CVL BIAS 1mA SENS CORR CVL M...

Page 1070: ... DATA TRACe1 12 7 1 4 Setting up probes Modular probes can be connected to the RF input connector of the R S FSV A For details see Chapter 6 2 1 1 Using probes on page 352 SENSe PROBe pb ID PARTnumber 1070 SENSe PROBe pb ID SRNumber 1071 SENSe PROBe pb SETup ATTRatio 1071 SENSe PROBe pb SETup CMOFfset 1071 SENSe PROBe pb SETup DMOFfset 1072 SENSe PROBe pb SETup MODE 1072 SENSe PROBe pb SETup NAME ...

Page 1071: ... SETup ATTRatio AttenuationRatio Defines the attenuation applied to the input at the probe This setting is only available for modular probes Suffix pb 1 n Selects the connector 3 RF Parameters AttenuationRatio 10 Attenuation by 20 dB ratio 10 1 2 Attenuation by 6 dB ratio 2 1 RST 10 Default unit DB Manual operation See Attenuation on page 361 SENSe PROBe pb SETup CMOFfset CMOffset Sets the common ...

Page 1072: ...ode offset The setting is only available if a modular probe in DM mode is connected to the R S FSV A If the probe is disconnected the DM mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Note that if the offset for DM mode or CM mode is changed the offsets for the P mode and N mode are adapted accordingly and vice versa For details see the R S FSV A I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Suffix pb 1 n Se...

Page 1073: ...nnected to the R S FSV A The maximum voltage difference between the positive and negative input terminals is 16 V If the probe is disconnected the N mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Note that if the offset for DM mode or CM mode is changed the offsets for the P mode and N mode are adapted accordingly and vice versa For details see Multimode function and offset compensation for modular RF...

Page 1074: ...SETup PMOFfset PMOffset Sets the P mode offset The setting is only available if a modular probe in P mode is connected to the R S FSV A The maximum voltage difference between the positive and negative input terminals is 16 V If the probe is disconnected the P mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Note that if the offset for DM mode or CM mode is changed the offsets for the P mode and N mode a...

Page 1075: ... one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended active modular Example Query probe type PROB3 SET TYPE Usage Query only Manual operation See Type on page 361 12 7 1 5 External generator control External generator control commands are available if the R S FSV A External Genera tor Control option R S FSV3 B10 is installed For each measurement channel you c...

Page 1076: ...ency FACTor NUMerator 1077 SOURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency OFFSet 1078 SOURce si EXTernal gen POWer LEVel 1078 SOURce si EXTernal gen STATe 1079 SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 1079 SOURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency Frequency This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator Suffix si irrelevant gen Parameters Frequency Source frequency of the external generator RST 1...

Page 1077: ...ltiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Offset Analyzer Generator F ator Deno Numerator F F min Suffix si irrelevant gen Parameters Value numeric value RST 1 Example Define multiplication factor of 4 3 the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer freq...

Page 1078: ...rator with reference to the ana lyzer frequency Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Offset Analyzer Generator F ator Deno Numerator F F min Suffix si irrelevant gen Parameters Offset numeric value specified in Hz kHz MHz or GHz rounded to the nearest Hz RST 0 Hz Default ...

Page 1079: ...si irrelevant gen Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Manual operation See Source State on page 384 SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset Suffix si irrelevant Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST 0dB Default unit DB Example Define a level offset on the external generator SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Source Offset on p...

Page 1080: ...ernal reference EXTernal Uses the external reference if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar RST INT Example Select an external reference oscillator SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Manual operation See Reference on page 383 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator gen INTerface Type Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator This command is only available if ex...

Page 1081: ...ions of the exter nal tracking generator However they are only available if external generator control is active see SOURce si EXTernal gen STATe on page 1079 Useful commands for source calibration described elsewhere Chapter 12 10 3 Working with transducers on page 1297 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 1124 Remote commands exclusive to source calibration DISPlay WIND...

Page 1082: ...he end of the sweep must have been carried out This is only possible in the single sweep mode This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce si EXTernal gen STATe on page 1079 Setting parameters MeasType THRough OPEN THRough TRANsmission mode calibration with direct connection between generator and device input REFLection mode calibration with short circuit at th...

Page 1083: ... SENSe CORRection RECall This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce si EXTernal gen STATe on page 1079 Example CORR REC Manual operation See Recall Cal Settings on page 387 SENSe CORRection STATe State This command turns correction of measurement results normalization on and off The comm...

Page 1084: ... Programming example for external generator control The following example demonstrates how to work with an external generator in a remote environment It assumes that a signal generator of the type SMA01A is connected to the R S FSV A via TCP IP as described in External generator connections on page 372 Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Set the frequency span SENS FREQ STAR 10HZ SEN...

Page 1085: ... 100KHZ Performing the calibration measurement Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS CORR METH TRAN SENS CORR COLL ACQ THR WAI Retrieving the calibration trace results Retrieve the measured frequencies 10 Hz 600 kHz TRAC DATA X TRACE1 Retrieve the measured power levels 0 between 10 Hz and 100 kHz below generator ...

Page 1086: ...STem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p COUNt 1086 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine 1087 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe State This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on page 365 SYSTe...

Page 1087: ... the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result NRP Z81 USB 123456 The NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is assigned to the Power Sensor 2 Manual operation See Select on page 365 Configuring power sensor measurements CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONCE 1088 CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAG...

Page 1088: ...peration See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 365 CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude RefValue This command defines the reference value for relative measurements Suffix n Window p Power sensor index Parameters RefValue Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 Default unit DBM Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Refere...

Page 1089: ...n off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer p This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix p Power sensor index Usage Query only READ PMETer p This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix p Power sensor index Usage Query only SENSe ...

Page 1090: ...9 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 5 Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 367 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency Frequency This command defines the frequency of the power sensor Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters Frequency The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use...

Page 1091: ... Parameters Duration SHORt NORMal LONG RST NORMal Example PMET2 MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station ary high power signals for the selected power sensor Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 366 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt NumberReadings This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements ...

Page 1092: ...ple PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 366 SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe State This command includes or excludes the reference level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset ...

Page 1093: ... the function on Example PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 365 See Select on page 365 SENSe PMETer p UPDate STATe State This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the results are updated even if a single sweep is complete Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function of...

Page 1094: ...ents Suffix n irrelevant p Power sensor index Parameters Unit DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT PMET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 366 Triggering with power sensors SENSe PMETer p TRIGger DTIMe 1094 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDoff 1095 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis 1095 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger LEVel 1095 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger SLOPe 1096 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger STATe 1096 SENSe PMET...

Page 1095: ...T2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 368 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis Hysteresis This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level to allow a trigger to start the measurement Suffix p Power sensor index Para...

Page 1096: ...ters Edge POSitive The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a posi tive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a neg ative edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 368 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger STATe State This command turns the external power trigger on and off Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 0 ...

Page 1097: ...m SPEaker MUTE 1100 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume 1100 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled noise source control on the R S FSV A on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source Control on page 440 OUTPut up IF IFFRequency Frequency Thi...

Page 1098: ... pole SUB D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R S FSV A For the R S FSV A this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only The AUX PORT connector only supports output Suffix up irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 User port is switched to INPut ON 1 User port is switched to OUTPut Example OUTP UPOR STAT ON OUTPut up UPORt VALue Value This command sets the control ...

Page 1099: ...witches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Example OUTP VID STAT ON Manual operation See Video Output State on page 441 SYSTem SPEaker STATe State This command switches the built in loudspeaker on or off for demodulated signals This setting applies only to the current application The command is available in the time domain in Spectrum mode and in Analog Modu lation Analysis mode ...

Page 1100: ...fines the volume of the built in loudspeaker for demodulated signals This setting is maintained for all applications The command is available in the time domain in Spectrum mode and in Analog Modu lation Analysis mode Parameters Volume Percentage of the maximum possible volume Range 0 to 1 RST 0 5 Example SYST SPE VOL 0 Switches the loudspeaker to mute Manual operation See Audio Output Volume on p...

Page 1101: ... FREQuency STOP 1105 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Suffix n Window m Marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 Manual operation See Center Frequency Marker Frequency ...

Page 1102: ...ameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 M...

Page 1103: ...n page 450 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK CouplingType This command couples and deco...

Page 1104: ...FACT 20PCT Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 450 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 450 Parameters...

Page 1105: ...n Parameters Frequency 0 to fmax min span RST 0 Default unit HZ Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 135 See Start Stop on page 449 SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines a stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency min span to fmax RST fmax Default unit HZ Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Manual operation See Frequency Sweep...

Page 1106: ...ng to keep the center frequency on the signal pea After each sweep the maximum on trace 1 is searched within a range of 2 around the center frequency It must have a minimum power of 90dBm CALC MARK FUNC STR ON CALC MARK FUNC STR BAND 20MHz CALC MARK FUNC STR THR 90dBm CALC MARK FUNC STR TRAC 1 Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 451 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRack BWIDth Bandwidth CA...

Page 1107: ...m irrelevant Parameters TraceNumber 1 to 6 Range 1 to 6 RST 1 Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 451 12 7 3 Configuring bandwidth and sweep settings The commands required to configure the bandwidth sweep and filter settings in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in Chapter 6 5 Bandwidth filter and sweep configuration on page 463 Configurin...

Page 1108: ...W AUTO is set to ON DBW 3MHz Default unit Hz Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 289 See RBW on page 340 See Res BW CISPR on page 342 See Res BW MIL on page 342 See RBW on page 485 SENSe BWIDth RESolution AUTO State SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO State This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span Para...

Page 1109: ...ecific filter types are available if the EMI R S FSV3 K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see Chap ter 5 13 3 1 Resolution bandwidth and filter types on page 326 Parameters FilterType CFILter Channel filters NORMal Gaussian filters P5 5 pole filters The 5 pole filter is not available for FFT sweeps RRC RRC filters CISPr PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EM...

Page 1110: ...on band width Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Manual operation See VBW on page 472 See RBW VBW on page 473 See Default Coupling on page 474 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the coupling ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution band width VBW RBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 001 to 1000 RST 1 Example BAND VID RAT 3 S...

Page 1111: ...s the aver age after the average count has been reached Parameters SweepCount When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R S FSV A performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INI...

Page 1112: ...n be optimized according to measurement requirements Table 12 5 Optimization parameters in FFT mode Optimization mode Description DYNamic Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible subspan depending on the RBW The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A D converter SPEed Optimizes the sweep rate by using the w...

Page 1113: ...urements For EMI measurements using R S FSV3 K54 Dynamic mode is not supported Auto mode always uses Speed optimization Parameters Mode RST AUTO Example SWE OPT DYN Selects optimization for dynamic range Manual operation See Optimization on page 475 SENSe SWEep WINDow n POINts This command defines the number of sweep points to analyze after a sweep Suffix n Example SWE POIN 251 Manual operation Se...

Page 1114: ...1 RST 1 Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time Manual operation See Harmonic Sweep Time on page 309 See Sweep Time on page 472 See Default Coupling on page 474 SENSe SWEep TYPE Type This command selects the sweep type Parameters Type AUTO Automatic selection of the sweep type between sweep mode and FFT FFT FFT mode RST AUTO Example SWE TYPE FFT Manual operation See Sweep Type on p...

Page 1115: ...ance RST AUTO Example BAND TYPE FFT Select FFT filter Example BAND FFT NARR Select narrow subspan for FFT filter 12 7 4 Configuring the vertical axis amplitude scaling The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set tings in a remote environment Amplitude settings 1115 Configuring the attenuation 1118 Configuring a preamplifier 1120 Scaling the Y axis 1122 12 7...

Page 1116: ...See Reference Level Marker Level on page 532 CALCulate n UNIT POWer Unit UNIT n POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all power based measurement windows with absolute values Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere Units based on 1 MHz require installed R S FSV3 K54 EMI measurements option RST dBm Example UNIT POW DBM ...

Page 1117: ... Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST 0dB Default unit DB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 293 See Shifting the Display Offset on page 457 SENSe POWer NCORrection State This command turns noise cancellation on and off If noise cancellation is on the R S FSV A performs a reference measurement to determine its inherent noise and subt...

Page 1118: ...s not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters Attenuation Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB with optional electr attenuator 1 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Default unit DB Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Manual operation See A...

Page 1119: ...his command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut ip EATT AUTO on page 1119 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters Attenuation attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF...

Page 1120: ...f ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 459 12 7 4 3 Configuring a preamplifier INPut ip EGAin STATe 1120 INPut ip GAIN STATe 1121 INPut ip GAIN VALue 1122 INPut ip EGAin STATe State Before this command can be used the external preamplifier must be connected to t...

Page 1121: ...forms data corrections based on the external preamplifier RST 0 Example INP EGA ON Manual operation See Ext PA Correction on page 729 INPut ip GAIN STATe State This command turns the internal preamplifier on and off It requires the optional pream plifier hardware For R S FSV A44 or higher models note the restrictions described in Preamplifier on page 459 Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters State O...

Page 1122: ...T ON INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 459 12 7 4 4 Scaling the Y axis DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe 1122 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE 1123 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe MODE 1123 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe PDIVision 1123 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe ...

Page 1123: ...ACe t Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis for all traces When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Suffix n Window w subwindow t irrelevant Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page ...

Page 1124: ...y grid for all traces The R S FSV A adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the optional external generator control the command defines the position of the reference value Suffix n Window w subwindow Not supported by all applications t irrelevant Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT fr...

Page 1125: ...commands required for trigger input or output are described in Chapter 12 7 5 3 Configuring the trigger output on page 1134 OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned Configuring the triggering conditions 1125 Configuring gated measurements 1130 Configuring the trigger...

Page 1126: ...e trigger sources External or IF Power a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger offset as well Parameters Offset For measurements in the frequency domain the range is 0 s to 30 s For measurements in the time domain the range is the negative sweep time to 30 s RST 0 s Default unit S Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation S...

Page 1127: ...eresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 490 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port TriggerLevel This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable Input Output connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut up TRIGger tp DIRection command Suffix port Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER IN...

Page 1128: ...r Level on page 489 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower TriggerLevel This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters TriggerLevel Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Default unit DBM Example TRIG LEV IQP 3...

Page 1129: ...ff see SENSe DEMod SQUelch STATe on page 1221 Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure that this situation is avoided in your remote control programs For troubleshooting tips see Incompleted sequential commands blocked rem...

Page 1130: ...wer Sensor on page 488 See Time on page 489 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval numeric value Range 1 us to 15 s RST 10 ms Default unit S Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 5 The sweep starts every 5 s Manual operation See Repetition Interval on page 489 12 7 ...

Page 1131: ...D 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 µs SWE EGAT LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 µs INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation See Gated Trigger on page 289 See Gated Trigger on page 495 SENSe SWEep EGATe CONTinuous PCOunt Amount Defines the number of gate periods to be measured after a single trigger event Parameters Amount integer Range 1 to 1023 Increment 1 RST 100...

Page 1132: ...ctivate gating SWE EGAT CONT STAT ON Activate continuous gating Manual operation See Continuous Gate on page 496 SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff DelayTime This command defines the delay time between the gate signal and the continuation of the measurement Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R S FSV A ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep ze...

Page 1133: ...POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS Manual operation See Slope on page 490 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as a signal at 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth 10 MHz For more information see Trigger Source on page 486 Parameters Source RST IFPower Example SWE EGAT SOUR IF...

Page 1134: ...e signal has been detected the gate remains open until the gate length is over RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Manual operation See Gate Mode on page 495 12 7 5 3 Configuring the trigger output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R S FSV A OUTPut up TRIGger tp DIRection 1134 OUTPut up TRIGger tp LEVel 1135...

Page 1135: ...ters Level HIGH 5 V LOW 0 V RST LOW Example OUTP TRIG2 LEV HIGH Manual operation See Level on page 445 OUTPut up TRIGger tp OTYPe OutputType This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix up 1 n tp Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear 2 Trigger 2 Input Output Parameters OutputType DEVice Sends a trigger si...

Page 1136: ...put is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear 2 Trigger 2 Input Output Parameters Length Pulse length in seconds Default unit S Example OUTP TRIG2 PULS LENG 0 02 Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 445 12 7 6 Adjusting settings automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment are described here SENSe ADJust ALL 1137 SENSe ADJust CONFigur...

Page 1137: ...s set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 500 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE Mode To determine the ...

Page 1138: ... SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level is only adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 501 SENSe ADJust CONFigure SMODe Search Mode Determines the searc...

Page 1139: ...matically Auto Fre quency on page 499 SENSe ADJust LEVel Initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the Thus the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimized for the signal level The R S FSV A is not overloaded and the dynamic range is not limited by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Le...

Page 1140: ...15S L20R AWLAN BWLAN CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion POWer1 AUTO LIST L10R 12 8 Analyzing measurements basics The commands for general analysis tasks are described here Zooming into the display 1140 Configuring the trace display and retrieving trace data 1143 Working with markers 1170 Configuring display lines 1230 Defining limit checks 1232 12 8 1 Zooming into the display 12 8 1 1 Using the single zo...

Page 1141: ... of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT x2 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT y2 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the zoom ar...

Page 1142: ...ow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn AREA x1 y1 x2 y2 This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix n Window w subwindow Not supported by all applications zn Selects the zoom window Parameters x1 Diagram coordinate...

Page 1143: ...ower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multi Zoom on page 511 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn STATe State This command turns the multiple zoom on and off Suffix n Window w subwindow Not supported by all applications zn Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of ...

Page 1144: ... DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t LABel STATe 1144 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t LABel TEXT 1145 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t MODE 1145 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous 1146 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t PRESet 1147 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t STATe 1147 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing APERture 1148 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing STATe...

Page 1145: ... can only configure labels for active traces and for traces whose State is enabled Suffix n Window t Trace Parameters Text String containing the trace label Example DISP WIND2 TRAC1 LAB ON DISP WIND2 TRAC1 LAB TEXT MaxTrace Manual operation See Trace Labels on page 590 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode If necessary the selected trace is also activa ...

Page 1146: ... is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure m...

Page 1147: ...only required trace settings to the selected window Suffix n 1 n Window w 1 n subwindow t 1 n Trace Parameters ResultType ALL Preset All Traces MAM Max Avg Min MCM Max ClrWrite Min Example DISP WIND3 TRAC PRES MCM In window 3 the traces are set to the following modes Trace 1 Max Hold Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Manual operation See Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config on page 589 DISPla...

Page 1148: ...perture of the trace smoothing if DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing STATe TRUE Suffix n Window w subwindow t Trace Parameters Aperture Range 1 to 50 RST 2 Default unit PCT Example DISP3 TRAC2 SMO APER 5 Defines an aperture of 5 for trace 2 in window 3 Manual operation See Smoothing on page 588 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing STATe State This command turns trace smoothin...

Page 1149: ...ase of single sweep mode the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Suffix n irrelevant Parameters AverageCount If you set an average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST...

Page 1150: ...ls see Mapping samples to sweep points with the trace detector on page 577 For EMI measurements the trace detector is used for the initial peak search only not for the final test The detector for the final test is configured using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector on page 1007 If the EMI R S FSV3 K54 measurement option is installed and the filter type CISPR is selected additional...

Page 1151: ...ectrum traces the R S FSV A also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time The commands required to configure spectrograms in a remote environment are described here For details and manual operation see Chapter 7 5 2 2 Spectrogram settings on page 601 When co...

Page 1152: ... n SGRam TSTamp DATA 1155 CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA 1155 CALCulate n SGRam TSTamp STATe 1156 CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe 1156 CALCulate n SGRam CLEar IMMediate CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer Suffix n Window Example Reset the result display and clear the memory CALC SGR CLE Manual operation See Clear Spect...

Page 1153: ...ximum number of frames depends on the history depth Range 1 to history depth Increment 1 RST 1 Example Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Set the number of frames to 200 CALC SGR FRAM COUN 200 Manual operation See Frame Count on page 478 CALCulate n SGRam FRAMe SELect Frame Time CALCulate n SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect Frame Time This command selects a specific frame for further analysis The comma...

Page 1154: ...00 Increment 1 RST 3000 Example Set the history depth to 1500 CALC SGR SPEC 1500 Manual operation See History Depth on page 603 CALCulate n SGRam LAYout State CALCulate n SPECtrogram LAYout State This command selects the state and size of spectrograms The command is available for result displays that support spectrograms Suffix n Window Example CALC4 SPEC LAY FULL Shows the spectrogram in window 4...

Page 1155: ...rogram TRACe Trace This command determines the trace in the result display the Spectrogram is based on Suffix n Window Parameters Trace TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 How many traces are available depends on the selected result display Example CALC2 SPEC TRAC TRACE3 CALCulate n SGRam TSTamp DATA Frames CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA Frames This command queries the starting time of ...

Page 1156: ...ed for future uses Reserved The fourth value is reserved for future uses Example CALC SGR TST DATA ALL Returns the starting times of all frames sorted in a descending order Usage Query only Manual operation See Time Stamp on page 603 CALCulate n SGRam TSTamp STATe State CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe State This command activates and deactivates the time stamp If the time stamp is active some...

Page 1157: ...ECtrogram COLor STYLe 1158 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor DEFault DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Suffix n Window Manual operation See Set to Default on page 606 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor LOWer Percentage DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer Percentage This command defines the starting point of the color map Suffix n Window Parameters Pe...

Page 1158: ...lor map to 95 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 605 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor STYLe ColorScheme DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe ColorScheme This command selects the color scheme Parameters ColorScheme HOT Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low lev els red colors indicate high ones COLD Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low lev els blue ...

Page 1159: ...rn trace mathematics on Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Expression TRACE1 TRACE2 Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE3 Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE4 Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE5 Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE6 Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1 Example CALC MATH STAT ON Turns trace mathematics on CALC MATH EXPR DEF TRACE1 TRACE3 Subtracts trac...

Page 1160: ...e mathematical opera tion Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Position Vertical position of the trace in of the height of the diagram area 100 PCT corresponds to the upper diagram border Range 100 to 200 RST 50 Default unit PCT Example CALC MATH POS 100 Moves the trace to the top of the diagram area Manual operation See Trace Math Position on page 611 CALCulate n MATH t STATe State This comman...

Page 1161: ... MEMory 1162 TRACe n DATA X 1163 FORMat DATA Format BitLength This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R S FSV A to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R S FSV A The R S FSV A automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format For details on data formats see Chapter 12 8 2 5 ...

Page 1162: ... number of frames depends on the size of the history depth The power level depends on the unit you have currently set For spectrogram trace results only REAL 32 format is sup ported Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 Manual operation See List Evaluation State result summary on page 256 See Diagram on page 503 TRACe n DATA MEMory Trace OffsSwPoint NoOfSwPoints This command queries the ...

Page 1163: ...y in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements For more information see X value of the sweep point on page 581 Suffix n Window Query parameters TraceNumber TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 Trace number TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 Return values X Values Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only 12 8 2 5 Formats for ret...

Page 1164: ...the maximum REAL 32 data that can be represented is 999 999 999 bytes However the R S FSV A is able to send larger data blocks In this case the length of the data block is placed in brackets e g 10 1234567890 Data Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data 12 8 2 6 Importing and exporting traces FORMat DEXPort CSEPa...

Page 1165: ...command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 1167 Parameters Selection SINGle ALL SINGle Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory STORe n TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Sum mary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace ...

Page 1166: ...AD n TRACe on page 1166 For details on importing data see Chapter 7 6 3 How to import traces on page 619 Parameters Selection SINGle ALL SINGle Only a single trace is selected for import namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory LOAD n TRACe on page 1166 com mand ALL Imports several traces at once overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the same trace num...

Page 1167: ...the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activated in the Export configuration settings see FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 1165 FileName String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 1 C TEST ASC Stores trace 1 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 616 12 8 2 7 Programming example configuring a spectr...

Page 1168: ...SGR COL UPP 70 DISP WIND SGR COL SHAP 0 8 Defines a color map for a range that comprises 40 of the measurement range excluding 30 at each end The colors are not scaled linearly the light gray colors are stretched to distinguish low values better Performing the Measurement SWE COUN 10 Defines 10 sweeps to be performed per measurement INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweeps h...

Page 1169: ...SGR Y MAX NEXT Retrieving Results CALC MARK1 X CALC MARK1 Y CALC MARK1 SGR FRAM Queries the frequency x level y and frame values of marker 1 CALC MARK2 X CALC MARK2 Y CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM Queries the frequency x level y and frame values of marker 2 CALC DELT1 X CALC DELT1 Y CALC DELT1 SGR FRAM Queries the frequency x level y and frame values of deltamarker 1 CALC DELT3 X CALC DELT3 Y CALC DELT3 SGR...

Page 1170: ... 1207 Band power marker 1209 N db down marker 1213 Signal count marker 1217 Marker demodulation 1218 Programming examples for using markers and marker functions 1221 12 8 3 1 Setting up individual markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram CALCulate n DELTamarker m AOFF 1170 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK 1171 CALCulate n DELTamarker ms LINK TO DELTa md 1171 CALCu...

Page 1171: ...er ms LINK TO MARKer md commands Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 337 See Linking to Another Marker on page 521 CALCulate n DELTamarker ms LINK TO DELTa md State This command links the delta source marker ms to any active destination de...

Page 1172: ...age 1174 Then the delta between the two markers is maintained when you move the normal marker In I Q Analyzer mode if md is the reference marker for the delta marker ms the relative distance delta between the two markers is maintained when you move the normal marker In other applications the delta marker is set to the same horizontal position as the marker md and if md is moved along the x axis ms...

Page 1173: ...n in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position CALCulate n DELTamarker m MREFerence Reference This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 ar...

Page 1174: ...e marker first Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Suffix n Window m Marker Pa...

Page 1175: ...arkers Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 522 CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO DELTa md State This command links the normal source marker ms to any active delta destination marker md If you change the horizontal position of marker md marker ms changes its hori zontal position to the same value Suffix n Window ms source marker see Marker md destination marker see Marker Parameters State ON O...

Page 1176: ...er on page 521 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a delta marker it is turned into a normal marker Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 336 Se...

Page 1177: ...eters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit depends on the result display Range The range depends on the current x axis range Default unit Hz Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 on page 317 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 on page 322 See Marker Position X value on page 3...

Page 1178: ...ay WINDow n MINFo STATe State This command turns the marker information in all diagrams on and off Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON 1 Displays the marker information in the diagrams OFF 0 Hides the marker information in the diagrams RST 1 Example DISP MINF OFF Hides the marker information Manual operation See Marker Info on page 523 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe StepSize This command selects...

Page 1179: ...Mits RIGHt 1181 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe 1181 CALCulate n THReshold 1182 CALCulate n THReshold STATe 1182 CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude State This command turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automatic marker positioning on and off for all markers in all windows Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON Manual ope...

Page 1180: ...be analyzed Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 222 See Deactivating All Search Limits on page 223 See Limit State on page 301 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits LEFT SearchLimit This command defines the l...

Page 1181: ...er search range for all markers in all windows If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters Limit The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST right diagram border Default unit HZ Example CAL...

Page 1182: ... search for all markers in all windows Note that you must enable the use of the threshold using CALCulate n THReshold STATe on page 1182 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Level Numeric value The value range and unit are variable RST 120 dBm Default unit DBM Example CALC THR STAT ON Example CALC THR 82DBM Enables the search threshold and sets the threshold value to 82 dBm Manual operation See Search T...

Page 1183: ...MAXimum NEXT 1184 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK 1184 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt 1184 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO 1185 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT 1185 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT 1185 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK 1186 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt 1186 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO State This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maxi...

Page 1184: ...d frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 532 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet activ...

Page 1185: ...p Manual operation See Auto Max Peak Search Auto Min Peak Search on page 527 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum peak value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position ...

Page 1186: ... minimum peak value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 532 Positioning delta markers The following commands positi...

Page 1187: ...s a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n 1 n Window m 1 n Marker Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 532 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently sel...

Page 1188: ...s the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 532 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum peak value In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Ne...

Page 1189: ...llowing commands CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer on page 1101 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence on page 1116 Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 1174 CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 1177 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt on page 1203 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks X on page 1205 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks...

Page 1190: ...ion to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 on page 317 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 on page 322 CALCulate n DELTamarker m Y Queries the result at the position of the specified delta marker Suffix n 1 n m 1 n Return ...

Page 1191: ...ge 1184 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 1184 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT on page 1185 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 1185 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 1186 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 1186 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam FRAMe 1192 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe 1192 CALCulate n MARKer m SGR...

Page 1192: ...s a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Default unit S Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the negative distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC MARK SGR FRAM 20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Set...

Page 1193: ...m Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 529 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate n MARKer m SP...

Page 1194: ... of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Suffix n Window m Marker CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It d...

Page 1195: ...cally to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Suffix n Window m Marker Using delta markers The following commands control spectrogram delta markers Use...

Page 1196: ...ulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK 1198 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK 1198 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe 1199 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe 1199 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum BELow 1199 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow 1199 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT 1199 CALCulate n DELTam...

Page 1197: ...le for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible Manual operation See Marker Search Area on page 530 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all fre quencies Suffix n Window m Marker CALCulate n...

Page 1198: ...earch Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 529 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Ne...

Page 1199: ...nimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 529 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker verti...

Page 1200: ...r m FUNCtion FIXed STATe 1201 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power Suffix n Window m Marker Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 524 See Defining Reference Point on page 541 C...

Page 1201: ...LC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 524 See Defining Reference Point on page 541 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Offset Numeric value RST 0 Defau...

Page 1202: ... 1179 MMEMory STORe n PEAK on page 1277 Chapter 12 8 3 3 Configuring and performing a marker search on page 1179 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe 1202 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt 1203 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate 1203 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE 1204 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ...

Page 1203: ...x n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values NumberOfPeaks Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Peaks This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also ...

Page 1204: ...Number of Peaks on page 553 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT SortMode This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters SortMode X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to de...

Page 1205: ...asurement Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values PeakPosition Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only 12 8 3 9 Noise measurem...

Page 1206: ...arker Return values NoiseLevel Current noise level The unit is the one currently active Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches on marker 2 CALC MARK2 FUNC NOIS ON Switches on noise measurement for marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 FUNC NOIS RES Outputs the noise result of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Noise Measur...

Page 1207: ...on PNOise AUTO 1207 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult 1207 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe 1208 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise AOFF 1209 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise RESult 1209 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise STATe 1209 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise AUTO State This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker a...

Page 1208: ...urns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the...

Page 1209: ... between the measured carrier power and the noise power at the position of the specified normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO RES Outputs the result of phase noise measurement of the marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise STATe State This command turns the phase noise measurement at the marker position on and off Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF...

Page 1210: ...Mode This command selects the way the results for a band power marker are displayed Note relative power results are only availabe for delta markers see CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE on page 1212 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Mode POWer Result is displayed as an absolute power The power unit depends on the CALCulate n UNIT POWer setting DENSity Result is displayed as a densit...

Page 1211: ... position Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Span Frequency The maximum span depends on the marker position and R S FSV A model RST 5 of current span Default unit Hz Example CALC MARK FUNC BPOW SPAN 2MHz Measures the band power over 2 MHz around the marker Manual operation See Span on page 547 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe State This command turns markers for band power measurements ...

Page 1212: ...ower unit depends on the CALCulate n UNIT POWer setting DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm Hz RPOWer This setting is only available for a delta band power marker The result is the difference between the absolute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker The powers are subtracted logarithmically so the result is a dB value Relative band p...

Page 1213: ...ker Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Manual operation See Band Power Measurement State on page 546 See Switching All Band Power Measurements Off on page 547 12 8 3 12 N db down marker The following commands control the n dB down markers CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown 1213 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown ...

Page 1214: ...requency domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values Frequency frequency 1 absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz f...

Page 1215: ...ement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values Distance The result depends on the span In case of frequency domain measurements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width bet...

Page 1216: ...id result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Return values TimeX1 absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref erence marker in seconds TimeX2 absolute position in tim...

Page 1217: ...surement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK ON Switches on marker 1 CALC MARK COUN ON Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1 INIT WAI...

Page 1218: ...measured value of marker 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Signal Count Marker State on page 535 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt RESolution Resolution This command defines the resolution of the frequency counter Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Resolution 0 001 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 Hz RST 0 1 Hz Default unit HZ Example CALC MARK COUN RES 1kHz Sets the resolution of the frequency counte...

Page 1219: ...equency domain on and off In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC2 MARK3 FUNC DEM CONT ON Switches on the continuous demodulation Manual operation See Continuous Demodulation on page 549 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff Duration This comm...

Page 1220: ... Manual operation See Type on page 442 See Modulation on page 549 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation STATe State This command turns the audio demodulator on and off when the measurement rea ches a marker position Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK3 FUNC DEM ON Switches on the demodulation for ...

Page 1221: ...ON 1 Switches the function on Example DEM SQU ON Signals below the level threshold are not sent to the audio out put Manual operation See Squelch on page 442 12 8 3 15 Programming examples for using markers and marker functions Various programming examples on how to use markers and the special marker func tions are provided here The use of spectrogram markers is demonstrated in Chapter 12 8 2 7 Pr...

Page 1222: ...k excursion of 6 dB CALC MARK X SLIM ON CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 50MHz CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 150MHz Restricts the search area for peaks to the frequencies between 50 and 150 MHz CALC THR 100dBm CALC THR STAT ON Configures a threshold level for peak searches at 100 dBm Defining and positioning markers CALC MARK1 ON Activates marker 1 and sets it to the peak of trace 1 CALC MARK2 TRAC 2 Activates marke...

Page 1223: ... AOFF Example marker search in spectrograms This example demonstrates how to search for peak values in spectrograms in a remote environment It assumes a spectrogram is already available see Chapter 12 8 2 7 Programming example configuring a spectrogram on page 1167 and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Analyzing the results using markers Set marker1 on the peak power in the most rec...

Page 1224: ...T 100MHz Defines the center frequency FREQ SPAN 200MHz Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV 0dBm Sets the reference level to 0 dBm Performing the measurement INIT WAI Performs a measurement and waits for it to end Example using a fixed reference marker This example demonstrates how to configure and use reference markers in a basic spectrum measurement i...

Page 1225: ...e determined and displayed with their marker numbers The results are sorted by frequency values The resulting peak list is then exported to a file Configuring the peak search CALC MARK X SLIM ON CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 50MHz CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 150MHz CALC MARK PEXC 10DB CALC THR 100DBM CALC THR STAT ON CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 5 CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT X CALC MARK F...

Page 1226: ... has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Configuring the phase noise marker DET SAMP Switches to Sample detector CALC MARK1 ON Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Activates phase noise marker function CALC DELT1 ON CALC DELT1 X 100kHz CALC DELT2 ON CALC DELT2 X 500kHz CALC DELT3 ON CALC DELT3 X 1MHz CALC DELT4 ON CALC DELT4...

Page 1227: ...er per Hz bandwidth CALC DELT2 ON Activates deltamarker2 CALC DELT2 FUNC BPOW STAT ON Activates the band power measurement for the band around deltamarker 2 CALC DELT2 FUNC BPOW SPAN 30MHz Sets the bandwidth to be measured to 30 MHz CALC DELT2 FUNC BPOW MODE DENS Sets the result to be a density power per Hz bandwidth CALC DELT3 ON Activates deltamarker3 CALC DELT3 FUNC BPOW STAT ON Activates the b...

Page 1228: ...a remote environment Example providing audio output for individual marker values 1228 Example demodulating and providing audio output continuously 1229 Example providing audio output for individual marker values This example demonstrates how to demodulate markers and provide audio output in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic fre quency sweep described in...

Page 1229: ...h level for noise DEM SQU ON Activates squelching CALC MARK1 FUNC DEM CONT ON Activates continuous demodulation Performing the measurement INIT CONT ON Performs a measurement and provides continuous audio output Retrieving Results Results are only provided as audio output Example performing a highly accurate frequency measurement using the signal count marker This example demonstrates how to deter...

Page 1230: ...late n TLINe dl 1232 CALCulate n TLINe dl STATe 1232 CALCulate n DLINe dl Position This command defines the horizontal position of a display line Suffix n Window dl 1 2 Parameters Position The value range is variable You can use any unit you want the R S FSV A then converts the unit to the currently selected unit If you omit a unit the R S FSV A uses the currently selected unit RST state is OFF De...

Page 1231: ...ou can not set a frequency line to a position that is outside the current span Range 0 Hz to Fmax RST STATe to OFF Default unit HZ Example CALC FLIN2 120MHz Sets frequency line 2 to a frequency of 120 MHz Manual operation See Vertical Line x on page 560 CALCulate n FLINe dl STATe State This command turns a frequency line on and off Suffix n Window dl 1 to 4 frequency line Parameters State ON OFF 0...

Page 1232: ... and off Suffix n Window dl 1 to 4 time line Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC TLIN STAT ON Turns the first time line on 12 8 5 Defining limit checks Note that in remote control upper and lower limit lines are configured using separate commands Thus you must decide in advance which you want to configure The x val ues for both upp...

Page 1233: ... STATe 1238 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer THReshold 1238 CALCulate n LIMit li NAME 1239 CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT 1239 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer DATA 1239 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MARGin 1240 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MODE 1240 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer OFFSet 1241 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer SHIFt 1241 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer SPACing 1241 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer STATe 1242 CALCulate n LIMi...

Page 1234: ...he domain of the limit line Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters SpanSetting FREQuency TIME FREQuency For limit lines that apply to a range of frequencies TIME For limit lines that apply to a period of time RST FREQuency Example CALC LIM CONT DOM FREQ Select a limit line in the frequency domain Manual operation See X Axis on page 570 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol MODE Mode This command sele...

Page 1235: ...is command moves a complete limit line horizontally Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Distance Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis Default unit HZ Manual operation See Shift x on page 571 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol SPACing InterpolMode This comman...

Page 1236: ...s surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT on page 1239 RST Limit line state is OFF Default unit DBM Manual operation See Data Points on page 570 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer MARGin Margin This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Margin numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB M...

Page 1237: ... Manual operation See Y Offset on page 568 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer SHIFt Distance This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Suffix n Window li Limit line Parameters Distance Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li U...

Page 1238: ...rrelevant li Limit line Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Manual operation See Visibility on page 567 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer THReshold Threshold This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines The R S FSV A uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the threshold Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameter...

Page 1239: ...defines the unit of a limit line Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Unit DBM DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere DB DBUV_M DBUA_M DBM_mhz DBUV_mhz DBMV_mhz DBUa_mhz DBUV_m DBUa_m DBUV_mmhz DBUa_mmhz DBPW_mhz DBPT_mhz DBPT unitless If you select a dB based unit for the limit line the command automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line RST DBM Manual operation See Y Axis...

Page 1240: ...Points on page 570 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MARGin Margin This command defines an area around an upper limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Margin numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 570 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Suffix n Window l...

Page 1241: ...e upper limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Distance Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT on page 1239 Manual operation See Shift y on page 571 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer SPACing InterpolType Thi...

Page 1242: ...sibility on page 567 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer THReshold Limit This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a relative scale The R S FSV A uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the threshold Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Limit Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT on page 1239 RST 200 Default unit dBm Manual operation...

Page 1243: ...n values LimitLines String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti cal order Example CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Usage Query only Manual operation See Visibility on page 567 CALCulate n LIMit li COPY Line This command copies a limit line Suffix n Window li Limit line Parameters Line 1 to 8 number of the new limit line name String containing the name...

Page 1244: ... Limit line Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC LIM STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 Manual operation See Disable All Lines on page 568 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk State This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL Note th...

Page 1245: ...Name This command exports limit line data to an ASCII CSV file For details on the file format see Chapter 7 4 2 4 Reference limit line file format on page 576 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file LimitLineName Name of the limit line to be exported Example MMEM STOR LIM C TEST UpperLimitLine Stores the limit line named UpperLimitLine in the ...

Page 1246: ...is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 860 Suffix n Window li Limit line Return values Result 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC2 LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 in window 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit Check n on page 244 See Limit Check on page 278 12 8 5 4 Programming examp...

Page 1247: ...s the limit line 1 by 10 dB CALC LIM1 UPP OFFS 3dB Defines an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 1 CALC LIM3 NAME FM3 Names limit line 3 FM3 CALC LIM3 LOW MODE REL Selects a relative vertical scale for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 UNIT DB CALC LIM3 CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW 90 60 40 60 90 Defines 5 definition points re...

Page 1248: ...s 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV 0dBm Sets the reference level to 0 dBm TRIG SOUR IFP TRIG LEV IFP 10dBm Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level of 10 dBm Configuring the Trace DISP TRAC2 ON DISP TRAC2 MODE AVER DISP TRAC3 ON DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Configures 3 traces 1 default clear write 2 average 3 max hold Configuring the limit ...

Page 1249: ...us drives can be addressed via the mass storage instrument specifier msis using the conventional Windows syntax The internal hard disk is addressed by C For details on storage locations refer to Chapter 9 3 2 2 Storage location and file name on page 642 The file names FileName parameter are given as string parameters enclosed in quotation marks They also comply with Windows conventions Windows fil...

Page 1250: ...and loading commands The following commands are available for all applications See also FORMat DATA on page 1161 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator 1250 MMEMory CATalog 1251 MMEMory CATalog LONG 1251 MMEMory CDIRectory 1252 MMEMory COMMent 1252 MMEMory COPY 1252 MMEMory DATA 1253 MMEMory DELete IMMediate 1253 MMEMory MDIRectory 1253 MMEMory MOVE 1254 MMEMory MSIS 1254 MMEMory NAME 1254 MMEMory NETWork DISC...

Page 1251: ... path may be relative or absolute Using wildcards is possible to query a certain type of files only If you use a specific file as a parameter the command returns the name of the file if the file is found in the specified directory or an error if the file is not found 256 File name not found Example MMEM CAT C Data SPOOL PNG Returns all files in C Data whose names start with SPOOL have 6 characters...

Page 1252: ...taining the comment Example MMEMory COMMent ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 MMEMory MMEMory STORe1 STATe 1 ACP_T As a result in the selection list for recall settings the comment ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 is added to the ACP entry Manual operation See Comment on page 644 MMEMory COPY FileName FileName This command copies one or more files to another directory Pa...

Page 1253: ...tion of the binary data number of bytes data Binary data with the indicated number of bytes Parameters for setting and query FileName Example MMEM NAME Public User Testfile txt Creates a new file called testfile txt MMEM DATA Testfile txt 220Contents of the file The parameter means 2 hash sign and length of the length information 20 bytes 2 digits 20 indicates the number of subsequent binary data ...

Page 1254: ... CFG SETUP CFG Renames TEST01 CFG in SETUP CFG in directory C MMEMory MSIS Drive This command selects the default storage device used by all MMEMory commands Parameters Drive A C Z String containing the device drive name RST n a MMEMory NAME FileName This command has several purposes depending on the context it is used in It creates a new and empty file It defines the file name for screenshots tak...

Page 1255: ...ing the host name of the computer or the IP address and the share name of the drive host name or IP address share name UserName String containing a user name in the network The user name is optional Password String containing the password corresponding to the User Name The password is optional State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Reconnects at logon with the same user name OFF 0 Does not reconnect at logon MMEMo...

Page 1256: ... ALL 1256 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault 1257 MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault 1257 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings 1257 MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings 1257 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL 1257 MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL 1257 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE 1258 MMEMory SELect ITEM NONE 1258 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SCData 1258 MMEMory SELect ITEM SCData 1258 MMEMory SELect CHA...

Page 1257: ...ading a configuration file Measurement settings include general channel configuration measurement hardware configuration including markers limit lines Note that a configuration may include no more than 8 limit lines This number includes active limit lines as well as inactive limit lines that were used last Therefore the combination of inactivate limit lines depends on the sequence of use with MMEM...

Page 1258: ... CHANnel ITEM SCData State MMEMory SELect ITEM SCData State This command includes or excludes source calibration data for an optional external generator when storing or loading a configuration file Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example MMEM SEL SCD ON Adds the source calibration data to the list of data subsets Manual operation See Items on page 644 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SPECtrogram Stat...

Page 1259: ...ncludes or excludes transducer factors when storing or loading a con figuration file Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example MMEM SEL TRAN ALL ON Manual operation See Items on page 644 See Save on page 719 12 9 3 Storing and loading instrument settings See also INSTrument SELect on page 853 to select the channel MMEMory CLEar ALL 1259 MMEMory CLEar STATe 1260 MMEMory LOAD AUTO 1260 MMEMory LOAD ...

Page 1260: ...ation file Example MMEM LOAD AUTO 1 C R_S INSTR USER TEST Manual operation See Startup Recall on page 646 MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 FileName This command restores and activates the instrument configuration stored in a dfl file Note that files with other formats cannot be loaded with this command The contents that are reloaded from the file are defined by the last selection made either in the Save Recal...

Page 1261: ...eloads user settings and all limit lines RST Reset instrument MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S INSTR USER TEST01 Selected items are retained Reloads user settings and all limit lines Restart the instrument MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S INSTR USER TEST01 Selected items are set to default Reloads only the user set tings Manual operation See Recall on page 641 See Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel on pa...

Page 1262: ...atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a memory limit reached error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Chapter 3 2 15 Protecting data using the secure user mode on page 55 Suffix 1 2 irrelevant Parameters 1 FileName String containing the p...

Page 1263: ...fl MMEM STOR STAT NEXT Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save_001 dfl MMEM STOR STAT NEXT Saves the current instrument settings in the file Save_002 dfl Manual operation See Save File on page 644 MMEMory STORe 1 2 TYPE Type This command defines whether the data from the entire instrument or only from the current channel is stored with the subsequent MMEM STOR command Suffix 1 2 irr...

Page 1264: ...here MMEMory NAME on page 1254 Remote commands exclusive to configuring screenshots DISPlay LOGO 1265 HCOPy ABORt 1265 HCOPy CONTent 1265 HCOPy CMAP it DEFault ci 1266 HCOPy CMAP it HSL 1267 HCOPy CMAP it PDEFined 1267 HCOPy DESTination 1 2 1267 HCOPy DEVice COLor 1268 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 1269 HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 1269 HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 NEXT 1269 HCOPy ITEM WINDow 1 2 TEXT 1270 HCOPy PAGE C...

Page 1265: ...ent arg0 This command determines the type of content included in the printout This setting is independent of the printing device Parameters arg0 WINDows HCOPy WINDows Includes only the selected windows in the printout All currently active windows for the current channel or MultiView are avail able for selection How many windows are printed on a each page of the printout is defined by HCOPy PAGE WI...

Page 1266: ... 655 HCOPy CMAP it DEFault ci This command defines the color scheme for print jobs For details see Print Colors on page 698 Suffix it Irrelevant ci See table below Example HCOP CMAP DEF2 Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a print out Manual operation See Print Colors on page 698 Gui setting Description Remote command Screen Colors Print Selects the current screen colors for ...

Page 1267: ...r specific Colors on page 700 HCOPy CMAP it PDEFined Color This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements in print jobs Suffix it 1 n Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined Parameters Color BLACk BLUE BROWn GREen CYAN RED MAGenta YELLow WHITe DGRay LGRay LBLue LGReen LCYan LRED LMAGenta Example HCOP CMAP2 PDEF GRE Manual operation See Predefined Colors on...

Page 1268: ...ds the hardcopy to the clipboard RST SYST COMM CLIP Example To print on a printer Destination printer deactivate print to file HCOP DEST1 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter Define the printer name SYST COMM PRIN SEL myFavoritePrinter Print HCOP IMM Example To print to a PRN file Destination printer HCOP DEV LANG GDI Define the printer name SYST COMM PRIN SEL myFavoritePrinter Redirect the printer output t...

Page 1269: ...nfigured under Windows is used to generate a printer specific file format DOC PDF File type for test reports Available for HCOP MODE REPort Example To print a screenshot to a PNG file Destination PNG file HCOP DEV LANG PNG Define file name MMEM NAME C R_S instr user MeasurementTestReport png Print HCOP IMM Manual operation See Destination File on page 660 See File type on page 671 See File type on...

Page 1270: ...State This command includes or excludes the page number for printouts consisting of multi ple pages HCOPy CONTent on page 1265 Parameters State 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON The page number is printed 0 OFF The page number is not printed RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE COUN STAT ON Manual operation See Print Page Count on page 656 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 BOTTom Bottom This command defines the margin at the bottom of the ...

Page 1271: ...d defines the margin at the right side of the printout page on which no elements are printed The margins are defined according to HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 UNIT on page 1272 Suffix 1 2 1 2 Printing device Parameters Right RST 4 23 mm Example HCOP PAGE MARG2 RIGH 2 Manual operation See Margins on page 662 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 TOP Top This command defines the margin at the top of the printout page on w...

Page 1272: ...of the printout The command is only available if the output device is a printer or a PDF file Suffix 1 2 1 2 Printing device Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait RST PORTrait Example HCOP DEV LANG1 PDF HCOP PAGE ORI2 LAND Manual operation See Orientation on page 662 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe arg0 arg1 This command selects all windows of the specified channel to be included in the pr...

Page 1273: ...irrelevant Parameters arg0 integer RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE WIND2 COUN 2 Manual operation See Windows Per Page on page 662 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 SCALe arg0 This command determines the scaling of the windows in the printout for HCOPy CONTent on page 1265 Suffix 1 2 irrelevant Parameters arg0 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally not regard ing the aspect ratio of the o...

Page 1274: ...a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query arg2 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON The window is included in the printout 0 OFF The window is not included in the printout RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE WIND2 STAT IQ Analyzer 1 1 Manual operation See Print Multiple Windows on page 655 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe 1 2 State This com...

Page 1275: ... page 660 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect 1 2 arg0 This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R S FSV A Use HCOPy DESTination 1 2 to select another output destination Suffix 1 2 1 2 Printing device Parameters arg0 String containing the printer name Use SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt on page 1275and SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT on page 1275 to query ...

Page 1276: ...ge 615 MMEMory STORe n LIST FileName This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a memory limit reached error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store...

Page 1277: ...port Peak List on page 553 MMEMory STORe n SGRam FileName MMEMory STORe n SPECtrogram FileName This command exports spectrogram data to an ASCII file The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded Note that depending on the size of the history buffer th...

Page 1278: ...ecting data using the secure user mode on page 55 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR SPUR test Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat 12 9 6 Test reports Commands to create test reports described elsewhere HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 on page 1269 HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 on page 1269 MMEMory NAME on page 1254 H...

Page 1279: ...asurement report RST SCReen Example HCOP MODE REPort HCOP Creates a file containing the measurement report Manual operation See Save on page 680 HCOPy TREPort APPend This command adds the current measurement results to the test report The saved data depends on the items you have selected with HCOPy TREPort ITEM SELect on page 1282 Example Perform a measurement then HCOP TREP NEW Creates a new test...

Page 1280: ... Manual operation See Visibility on page 676 HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line TEXT Description This command defines a descriptive text for one of the items part of the report header Use HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line TITLe on page 1280 to define custom titles for each item Use HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line CONTrol to select the condition under which each item is shown Parameters Desc...

Page 1281: ...der Test Manual operation See Title on page 676 HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer STATe State This command includes or excludes the complete set of measurement information from the test report Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example HCOP TREP ITEM HEAD STAT ON Includes the measurement information in the test report Manual operation See State on page 676 HCOPy TREPort ITEM LIST ChannelType This command quer...

Page 1282: ...EM SELect This command defines the type of information that a test report is made up out of Parameters Item String containing the information you want to include in the test report Note that the items separated by commas have to be written into one string see example below The available items depend on the application you are using See the tables below for a short description of each item Per defa...

Page 1283: ...late Usage Event Manual operation See Load on page 678 HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlate SAVE Template This command saves a test report template in XML format Parameters Template String containing the name of the template The xml file exten sion is added automatically Example HCOP TREP ITEM TEMP SAVE myTemplate Saves a test report template Usage Event Manual operation See Save on page 678 HCOPy TREPort ...

Page 1284: ... format on page 671 HCOPy TREPort PAGecount STATe State This command includes or excludes page number from the test report Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example HCOP TREP PAG STAT OFF Removes page numbers from the test report Manual operation See Page Count on page 672 HCOPy TREPort PCOLors STATe State This command turns the use of printer friendly colors on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OF...

Page 1285: ...TEST REM 2 Deletes the second dataset from the current test report Manual operation See Selecting items to include in the report on page 680 HCOPy TREPort TEST REMove ALL This command removes all existing datasets from the test report Example HCOP TREP TEST REM ALL Deletes all datasets that are currently in the test report Usage Event Manual operation See Remove All on page 681 HCOPy TREPort TITLe...

Page 1286: ...7 1 Storing data MMEM MSIS C Selects drive C as the default storage device Connecting a network drive MMEM NETW USED Returns a list of all drives in use in the network MMEM NETW UNUS Returns a list of free drive names in the network MMEM NETW MAP Q Server ACLRTest Maps drive Q to the directory Server ACLRTest Saving data on the instrument MMEM MDIR C R_S INSTR USER Results Creates a directory call...

Page 1287: ...t directory MMEM CAT C R_S INSTR USER Results xml or MMEM CAT xml Returns a list of all xml files in the directory C R_S INSTR USER Results MMEM CAT LONG xml Returns additional information about the xml files in the directory C R_S INSTR USER Results 12 9 7 3 Storing instrument settings In this example we will store the instrument settings for the Spectrum channel INST SEL SPECTRUM Selects measure...

Page 1288: ...S INSTR USER Screenshot bmp Select all screen elements for printing HCOP ITEM ALL Add a comment to the printout HCOP ITEM WIND TEXT ACLRResults Store the printout in a file called Screenshot bmp HCOP Store another printout in a file called Screenshot_001 bmp HCOP NEXT 12 9 7 6 Printing on a printer HCOP DEST2 SYST COMM PRIN Prints the data on a printer SYST COMM PRIN ENUM FIRS SYST COMM PRIN ENUM ...

Page 1289: ...ctrum 1 ON HCOP PAGE WIND STAT Spectrum 2 ON HCOP PAGE WIND STAT IQ Analyzer 1 ON HCOP PAGE WIND STAT IQ Analyzer 2 ON Define contents to be printed on each page logo timestamp page count DISP LOGO ON HCOP TDST STAT ON HCOP PAGE COUN STAT ON Define comment to be printed on each page HCOP ITEM WIND TEXT Measurement Test Report Configure page layout landscape 1 display per page margins 2cm on each s...

Page 1290: ... the reference frequency SENSe ROSCillator LBWidth 1290 SENSe ROSCillator O100 1291 SENSe ROSCillator O640 1291 SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal FALLback 1291 SOURce si EXTernal ext ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 1291 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce 1292 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce EAUTo 1292 SENSe ROSCillator TRANge 1293 SENSe ROSCillator LBWidth Bandwidth Defines the loop bandwidth that is the speed of internal...

Page 1291: ... able Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 If no valid external reference signal is available the error mes sage External reference missing is displayed Additionally the flag NO REF is displayed to indicate that no synchronization was performed for the last measurement ON 1 If no external reference is available the instrument automatically switches back to the internal reference Note that you must re...

Page 1292: ...isplayed in the status bar EXTernal2 EXT2 The external reference from the REF Input 2 connector is used requires option R S FSV3 K703 if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar EAUTo The external reference is used as long as it is available then the instrument switches to the internal reference Example ROSC SOUR EXT Manual operation See Reference Frequency Input on page 737 ...

Page 1293: ...hermore the loop requires about 30 seconds to reach a locked state During this locking process NO REF is displayed in the status bar WIDE The larger deviation 6 ppm allows the instrument to syn chronize to less precise external reference input signals Example ROSC TRAN WIDE 12 10 2 Calibration and checks The following commands control calibration and checks on the R S FSV A CALibration ALL 1293 CA...

Page 1294: ...equest is generated Usage Query only Manual operation See Start Self Alignment on page 688 CALibration RESult This command returns the results collected during calibration Return values CalibrationData String containing the calibration data Example CAL RES would return e g Total Calibration Status PASSED Date dd mm yyyy 12 07 2004 Time 16 24 54 Runtime 00 06 Usage Query only Manual operation See A...

Page 1295: ...d MCFRequency Frequency This command sets the calibration frequency for frequencies greater than 7 GHz This command only takes effect if a microwave calibration signal is selected for input DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 1295 Parameters Frequency RST 7 GHz Default unit Hz Example DIAG SERV INP PULS MCFR 7 1 GHz DIAGnostic SERVice INPut RF SPECtrum Bandwidth This command selects the bandwi...

Page 1296: ...d mm yyyy 09 07 2004 TIME 16 24 54 Runtime 00 06 Usage Query only SOURce si TEMPerature FRONtend This command queries the current frontend temperature of the R S FSV A During self alignment the instrument s frontend temperature is also measured as soon as the instrument has warmed up completely This temperature is used as a ref erence for a continuous temperature check during operation If the curr...

Page 1297: ...n TFACtor 1300 MMEMory STORe n TFACtor 1300 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer ADJust RLEVel STATe State This command turns an automatic adjustment of the reference level to the transducer on and off Before you can use the command you have to select and turn on a transducer Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Adjust Ref Level on page 716 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer CATalog This command...

Page 1298: ...ment RST empty comment Manual operation See Comment on page 718 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DATA Frequency Level This command configures transducer factors for specific trace points A set of trans ducer factors defines an interpolated transducer line and can be stored on the instru ment Parameters Frequency The unit for Frequency is Hz which may or may not be omit ted Frequencies have to be sorted...

Page 1299: ... selects a transducer factor Parameters Name String containing the name of the transducer factor If the name does not exist yet the R S FSV A creates a trans ducer factor by that name Example CORR TRAN SEL FACTOR1 Manual operation See Activating Deactivating on page 716 See Create New Line on page 716 See Name on page 718 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer STATe State This command turns the selected tran...

Page 1300: ...Name Loads the transducer factor from the selected file in CSV format Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the CSV import file Example MMEM LOAD TFAC C TEST CSV Manual operation See Import on page 719 MMEMory STORe n TFACtor FileName TransdName This command exports transducer factor data to an ASCII CSV file For details on the file format see Chapter 10 5 ...

Page 1301: ...nd for the required setting SENSe CORRection FRESponse INPut ip USER commands are applied to RF input only SENSe CORRection FRESponse BASeband USER commands are applied to baseband input only SENSe CORRection FRESponse USER commands are applied to all input types queries refer to the currently active input source SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER ADJust RLEVel STATe 1303 SENSe CORRection...

Page 1302: ...Put ip USER LOAD 1309 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER LOAD 1309 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER PRESet 1309 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER PRESet 1309 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER PRESet 1309 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER REFResh 1309 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER REFResh 1309 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SCOPe 1310 SENSe CORRecti...

Page 1303: ...onse si USER SPECtrum DATA FREQuency 1317 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SPECtrum DATA MAGNitude 1317 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SPECtrum DATA PHASe 1317 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER STATe 1317 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER STATe 1317 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER STATe 1317 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER STORe 1318 SENSe CORRection FRESpo...

Page 1304: ...i CLEar SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER FLISt fli CLEar Removes all frequency response fres files in the current configuration for the selected or all input types Suffix si 1 n irrelevant fli 1 n irrelevant Example SENS CORR FRES USER FLIS CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Remove Frequency Response File on page 733 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER FLISt fli DATA FREQuency SENSe CORRection ...

Page 1305: ...er suffix are moved down by one posi tion Suffix si 1 n irrelevant fli 1 n Index in frequency response file list Use SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER FLISt fli SIZE to determine the maximum index number Parameters FilePath string Path and file name The default directory for fres files is C R_S INSTR USER Fresponse Example SENS CORR FRES USER FLIS2 INS C FRes fres Manual operation See Ad...

Page 1306: ... USER FLISt fli PHASe STATe State SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER FLISt fli PHASe STATe State SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER FLISt fli PHASe STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of the correction data in the selected file for magnitude results Suffix si 1 n irrelevant fli 1 n Index in frequency response file list Use SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER FLISt fli SIZ...

Page 1307: ...USER FLISt fli SELect FilePath SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER FLISt fli SELect FilePath SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER FLISt fli SELect FilePath Loads an additional frequency response fres file to the current configuration Suffix si 1 n irrelevant fli 1 n Index in frequency response file list Use SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER FLISt fli SIZE to determine the maximum i...

Page 1308: ...ouch stone files For details see Chapter 10 6 Frequency response correction R S FSV A K544 on page 724 Suffix si 1 n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Activates the files ON 1 Deactivates the files RST 1 Example SENS CORR FRES USER FST ON Manual operation See Frequency Response active on page 732 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER IQ DATA FREQuency SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER IQ ...

Page 1309: ...ge 730 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER PRESet SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER PRESet SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER PRESet Restores the default frequency response correction settings containing only files spe cific to the R S FSV A itself Frequency response correction using fres files is deactivated Suffix si 1 n irrelevant Example SENS CORR FRES USER PRES Usage Event M...

Page 1310: ...STrument SELect For a list of available channels use INSTrument LIST ALL The frequency response correction settings are applied to all active measurement channels Example INST SEL MyIQSpectrum SENS CORR FRES USER SCOP CHAN The filter is applied only to the channel named MyIQSpectrum Manual operation See Apply to on page 730 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SCOVered Indicates whether the frequenc...

Page 1311: ...SER SLIS CAT C R_S INSTR USER MyS7p s7p C R_S INSTR USER MyS2p s2p Usage Query only SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER SLISt sli CLEar SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER SLISt sli CLEar SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli CLEar Removes all touchstone files from the current configuration for the selected or all input types Suffix si 1 n irrelevant sli irrelevant Example S...

Page 1312: ...ESponse si BASeband USER SLISt sli INSert FilePath SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER SLISt sli INSert FilePath SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli INSert FilePath Loads a new Touchstone file for the current configuration The maximum number of files per configuration is 15 The new file is added below the entry specified by the sli index All other entries with a higher suffix are ...

Page 1313: ...file one position up or down in the list of files changing the order in which the correction data is applied Suffix si 1 n irrelevant sli 1 n Index in Touchstone file list Use SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli SIZE to determine the maximum index number If an index outside the available range is specified an error occurs Setting parameters Direction UP DOWN Example SENS CORR FRES USER SL...

Page 1314: ...nse si USER SLISt sli PORTs TO PortTo SnP files can be defined for a varying number of input and output ports You must define the ports from the touchstone file whose data is to be applied Suffix si 1 n irrelevant sli 1 n Index in Touchstone file list Use SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli SIZE to determine the maximum index number Parameters PortTo RST 1 Example SENS CORR FRES USER SLIS...

Page 1315: ...ffix si 1 n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 1 Example SENS CORR FRES USER PST ON Manual operation See Preview on page 733 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER SLISt sli SELect FilePath SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER SLISt sli SELect FilePath SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli SELect FilePath Sele...

Page 1316: ...ction FRESponse si BASeband USER SLISt sli SIZE SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER SLISt sli SIZE SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli SIZE Queries the number of entries in the list of touchstone files for the current configura tion Suffix si 1 n irrelevant sli irrelevant Return values Size integer Range 1 to 15 RST 1 Example SENS CORR FRES USER SLIS SIZE Usage Query only SENSe CO...

Page 1317: ...CORRection FRESponse si USER SPECtrum DATA PHASe Queries the trace values for the combined user correction files snp fres in Spec trum mode Suffix si 1 n irrelevant Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Mode on page 735 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si BASeband USER STATe State SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER STATe State SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER STATe State Activates or...

Page 1318: ...saveset is stored in the C R_S INSTR USER FResponse directory Suffix si 1 n irrelevant Setting parameters FilePath string Example SENS CORR FRES USER STOR FRes1 Stores the current frequency response correction configuration to a file named C R_S INSTR USER FResponse FRes1 dfl Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Settings on page 731 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER VALid This command que...

Page 1319: ...MHz FREQ CENT 500MHz Activate S2P file SENSe CORRection FRESponse Input1 USER PRESet SENSe CORRection FRESponse Input1 USER SLISt1 SELect c BP_40MHz s2p SENSe CORRection FRESponse Input1 USER STATe ON INIT IMM WAI LOC 12 10 5 Customizing the screen layout The remote commands required to set up the display of the R S FSV A are described here General display settings and items 1319 Colors and themes...

Page 1320: ...R State This command hides or displays the channel bar information Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP ANN CBAR OFF Manual operation See Channel Bar on page 694 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency State This command turns the label of the x axis on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP ANN FREQ OFF Manual operation See Diagram Footer Annotation on page 694 DISPlay SBAR STATe S...

Page 1321: ...reen functionality Parameters State ON FRAMe OFF ON 1 Touch screen is active for entire screen OFF 0 Touch screen is inactivate for entire screen FRAMe Touch screen is inactivate for the diagram area of the screen but active for softkeys toolbars and menus RST 1 Example DISP TOUC STAT ON Manual operation See Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen on page 692 DISPlay WINDow n TIME State This c...

Page 1322: ... on DISP TIME FORM US Switches the date and time format to US Manual operation See Date and Time Format on page 693 SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe State This command includes or excludes the front panel keys when working with the remote desktop Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Front Panel on page 694 See Mini Front Panel on page 695 SYSTem DATE Year Month Day Configures the date...

Page 1323: ...rs if the display shows the printing colors HCOPy CMAP it DEFault ci on page 1266 HCOPy CMAP it HSL on page 1267 HCOPy CMAP it PDEFined on page 1267 Remote commands exclusive to customize the display colors and themes DISPlay CMAP it DEFault ci 1323 DISPlay CMAP it HSL 1324 DISPlay CMAP it PDEFined 1324 DISPlay THEMe CATalog 1325 DISPlay THEMe SELect 1325 DISPlay CMAP it DEFault ci This command se...

Page 1324: ...isplay Suffix it 1 n Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined Parameters hue tint Range 0 to 1 sat saturation Range 0 to 1 lum brightness Range 0 to 1 Example DISP CMAP2 HSL 0 3 0 8 1 0 Changes the grid color DISPlay CMAP it PDEFined Color This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements Suffix it 1 n Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defin...

Page 1325: ...l operation See Theme on page 697 12 10 5 3 CMAP suffix assignment Several commands to change the color settings of individual items of the display or printout are available Which item is to be configured is defined using a CMAP suffix The following assignment applies Suffix Description CMAP1 Background CMAP2 Grid CMAP3 Common Text CMAP4 Check Status OK CMAP5 Check Status Error CMAP6 Text Special ...

Page 1326: ...isplay Lines CMAP29 Sweepcount Text CMAP30 Limit and Margin Check Text CMAP31 Limit and Margin Check Margin CMAP32 Table Overall Title Text CMAP33 Table Overall Title Background CMAP34 Table Overall Text CMAP35 Table Overall Background CMAP36 Table Value Title Text CMAP37 Table Value Title Background CMAP38 Table Value Text CMAP39 Table Value Background CMAP40 Trace 5 CMAP41 Trace 6 these settings...

Page 1327: ...ol described elsewhere SYSTem LANGuage on page 1375 Remote commands exclusive to configuring a network and remote control SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1327 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator 1328 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate 1328 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay 1328 SYSTem IDENtify FACTory 1329 SYSTem IDENtify STRing 1329 SYSTem KLOCk 1329 SYSTem LXI LANReset 1329 SYSTem LXI MDEScription 1329 SYSTem L...

Page 1328: ...ceive terminator EOI RST LFEOI Example SYST COMM GPIB RTER EOI Manual operation See GPIB Terminator on page 809 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate State This command turns the display during remote operation on and off If on the R S FSV A updates the diagrams traces and display fields only The best performance is obtained if the display is off during remote control operation Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 E...

Page 1329: ...ckout remote control or returns to the local mode Parameters State ON LLO local lockout OFF GTL go to local RST OFF Example SYST KLOC ON Activates LLO remote control Manual operation See Local on page 823 SYSTem LXI LANReset This command resets the LAN configuration as well as the LAN password and instrument description Manual operation See LAN Reset on page 815 SYSTem LXI MDEScription Description...

Page 1330: ...ing the Factory Revision on page 813 SYSTem SHIMmediate ONCE Executes any received remote commands that cause changes to the hardware and have not been executed yet due to a SYST SHIM STAT OFF command Example SYST SHIM STAT ON SYST SHIM ONCE Usage Event Manual operation See Set Hardware Immediately on page 810 SYSTem SHIMmediate STATe State Determines when the remote commands that change hardware ...

Page 1331: ... SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RO 1334 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RW 1334 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP CONTact 1334 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP LOCation 1335 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP USM USER 1335 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP USM USER ALL 1336 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP USM USER DELete 1336 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP USM USER DELete ALL 1336 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion 1336 DIAGnostic HUMS DELete ALL Th...

Page 1332: ...ate on page 816 DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS ALL This command returns all key value tags that you have assigend to the instrument Depending on the set data format the queried data is either displayed in XML or JSON format For more information about setting the data format see DIAGnostic HUMS FORMat on page 1331 Return values ID ID number of the defined tag Key String containing key name of the defined tag...

Page 1333: ...821 DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS VALue ID Key Value DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS VALue ID This command adds or modifies a key value pair device tag The query returns the key value pair for a given ID or an empty string if the ID is unknown Parameters Key String containing key name of the queried tag Value String containing value of the queried tag Parameters for setting and query ID 0 31 ID number of the tag you ...

Page 1334: ...YST COMM SNMP COMM RO ABC Usage Setting only Manual operation See Access on page 818 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RW CommunityString This command sets the SNMP community string for read write access Prerequisites for this command Select an SNMP version that supports communities SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion on page 1336 Setting parameters CommunityString String containing the community name...

Page 1335: ...mple Return SNMP location SYST COMM SNMP LOC Manual operation See SNMP Location on page 820 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP USM USER Name Access Level Auth_pwd Priv_pwd This command defines a SNMP user profile Prerequisites for this command Select SNMPv3 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion on page 1336 Setting parameters Name String containing name of the user Access RO RW Defines the access right a user can ...

Page 1336: ...te UserName This command deletes a specific SNMP user profile Setting parameters UserName String containing name of SNMP user profile to be deleted Example Delete SNMP user profile SYST COMM SNMP USM USER DEL Peter Usage Setting only Manual operation See SNMPv3 Configuration on page 819 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP USM USER DELete ALL This command deletes all SNMP user profiles Example Delete all SNMP ...

Page 1337: ...c SERVice CALibration DATE 1338 DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration DUE DATE 1339 DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration INTerval 1339 DIAGnostic SERVice DATE 1339 DEVice INFO HWBand 1339 DIAGnostic SERVice BIOSinfo 1340 DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfo 1340 DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo 1341 SYSTem ERRor CLEar ALL 1341 SYSTem DFPRint 1341 SYSTem ERRor CLEar REMote 1341 SYSTem ERRor EXTended 1342 SYSTem ERRor LIST 1342...

Page 1338: ...TTINPUT2 INP Preselector 1 INPUT2 EXT_ Preselector 2 EXT_RELAIS Return values Cycles Number of switching cycles Example DIAG INFO CCO CAL Usage Query only Manual operation See Relays Cycle Counter on page 759 DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration DATE CalibrationDate This command sets last date and time the instrument was calibrated in ISO 8601 for mat Parameters CalibrationDate String containing calibra...

Page 1339: ...on interval Example Query calibration interval DIAG SERV CAL INT would return for example one year interval P1Y Usage Query only Manual operation See Next Calibration Due on page 753 DIAGnostic SERVice DATE ServiceDate This command sets the last date and time the instrument was serviced ISO 8601 for mat Parameters ServiceDate String containing last service date Example Return last service date DIA...

Page 1340: ...000000000 Hz to 3999999999 4000000000 Hz to 5199999999 5200000000 Hz to Usage Query only DIAGnostic SERVice BIOSinfo This command queries the BIOS version of the CPU board Return values BiosInformation String containing the BIOS version Example DIAG SERV BIOS Returns the BIOS version Usage Query only DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfo This command queries hardware information Return values Hardware String ...

Page 1341: ...STem ERRor CLEar ALL This command deletes all contents of the System Messages table Example SYST ERR CLE ALL SYSTem DFPRint Creates an xml file with information on installed hardware software image and FPGA versions The xml file is stored under C R_S INSTR devicedata xml DeviceFootprint_ on the instrument It is also output to the remote interface as binary data Return values InfoFile Contents of t...

Page 1342: ...e channel Return values Messages String containing all messages of the selected type for the speci fied channel Each message is separated by a comma and inserted in parentheses If no messages are available empty parentheses are returned Example SYST ERR EXT ALL Returns all messages for the currently active application e g Message 1 Message 2 Example SYST ERR EXT FAT Spectrum2 Queries fatal errors ...

Page 1343: ... only SYSTem FIRMware UPDate Directory This command starts a firmware update using the msi files in the selected directory The default path is D FW_UPDATE The path is changed via the MMEMory COMMent command To store the update files the MMEMory DATA command is used Only user accounts with administrator rights can perform a firmware update Setting parameters Directory Example SYST FIRM UPD D FW_UPD...

Page 1344: ...t unit days Example Disable floating license for K102 SYST OPT LIC K102 OFF Example Configure occupied license for K100 for 5 days SYST OPT LIC K100 OCC 5 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Enabling disabling floating licenses on page 743 SYSTem OPTion LICense LIST Option Queries the availability of floating licenses on all license servers configured on the R S FSV A Query parameters Option s...

Page 1345: ...ttings that are required beyond the current session such as predefined instrument settings trans ducer files or self alignment data Note Initially after installation of the R S FSV A K33 option secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible This is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords For details on the secure user mode see Chapter 3 2 15 Protecting data ...

Page 1346: ...n established NCONnected connection could not be established possibly due to an incom patible instrument or invalid IP address Example CONFigure GENerator CONNection CSTate Usage Query only Manual operation See Test Connection on page 751 See Connect Disconnect on page 751 CONFigure GENerator CONNection STATe State Connects or disconnects the signal generator specified by CONFigure GENerator IPCon...

Page 1347: ...Nction RESults SAVE 1348 DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo 1348 SYSTem PASSword CENable 1349 SYSTem PASSword RESet 1349 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction ServiceFunction This command starts a service function The service functions are available after you have entered the level 1 or level 2 system password Parameters for setting and query ServiceFunction String containing the ID of the service function The ID of...

Page 1348: ... This command creates a zip file with important support information The zip file con tains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display if available As a result of this command the created file name including the drive and path is returned You can use the resulting file name information as a parameter for the MMEM COPY command...

Page 1349: ... Provides a password for subsequent service functions Parameters arg0 string Example SYST PASS CEN 894129 Manual operation See Password on page 758 SYSTem PASSword RESet Clears any previously provided password and returns to the most restrictive service level Manual operation See Password on page 758 12 10 12 Remote commands for synchronizing parameters The commands for manual operation are descri...

Page 1350: ...mplitude baseband impedance configura tion between measurement channels on and off Parameters State ALL NONE ALL Turns on synchronization NONE Turns off synchronization RST NONE Example INST COUP ABIM ALL Manual operation See Synchronizing parameters across all measurement chan nels on page 760 INSTrument COUPle ACDC State This command turns synchronization of the AC DC Coupling state between meas...

Page 1351: ...rument COUPle AUNit State This command turns synchronization of the amplitude unit configuration between mea surement channels on and off Parameters State ALL NONE ALL Turns on synchronization NONE Turns off synchronization RST NONE Example INST COUP AUN ALL Manual operation See Synchronizing parameters across all measurement chan nels on page 760 INSTrument COUPle BANDwidth State INSTrument COUPl...

Page 1352: ...ee Synchronizing parameters across all measurement chan nels on page 760 INSTrument COUPle DEMod State This command turns synchronization of the audio demodulator configuration between measurement channels on and off Parameters State ALL NONE ALL Turns on synchronization NONE Turns off synchronization RST NONE Example INST COUP DEM ALL Synchronizes the audio demodulator configuration INSTrument CO...

Page 1353: ... Turns off synchronization RST NONE Example INST COUP IMP ALL Manual operation See Synchronizing parameters across all measurement chan nels on page 760 INSTrument COUPle LIMit State This command turns synchronization of limit results between measurement channels on and off Parameters State ALL NONE ALL Turns on synchronization Limit lines have to be compatible to the x axis and y axis config urat...

Page 1354: ...the marker frequency between measurement channels on and off Parameters State ALL NONE ALL Turns on synchronization NONE Turns off synchronization RST NONE Example INST COUP MARK ALL Synchronizes the receiver frequency and the marker frequency INSTrument COUPle PRESel State This command turns synchronization of the preselector state between measurement channels on and off Parameters State ALL NONE...

Page 1355: ... COUPle SPAN State This command turns synchronization of the start and stop frequency between mea surement channels on and off Parameters State ALL NONE ALL Turns on synchronization NONE Turns off synchronization RST NONE Example INST COUP SPAN ALL Synchronizes the start and stop frequency Manual operation See Synchronizing parameters across all measurement chan nels on page 760 INSTrument COUPle ...

Page 1356: ...ate This command edits an existing user defined coupling definition The parameters for this command are identical to INSTrument COUPle USER uc NEW Note however that for INSTrument COUPling USER uc the last two parameters Direction and State are not optional Note Make sure to specify the right index number via the USER suffix Suffix uc Index of a user defined parameter coupling To obtain the list o...

Page 1357: ... the name of a synchronizable parameter The second parameter name is only necessary for synchroniza tion between two specific channels If you synchronize all chan nels of the same type or all channels the string has to be empty arg6 LTOR RTOL BIDir Selects the direction in which synchronization works BIDir Changes of a parameter are applied both ways from channel 1 to channel 2 and vice versa LTOR...

Page 1358: ...t can be synchronized Suffix uc irrelevant Query parameters ChannelName Optional SCPI parameter String containing the name of a measurement channel Parameter Optional SCPI parameter String containing the name of a parameter that you can syn chronize Return values SynchronizableParameter Comma separated list of parameters No parameters provided Parameters that can be synchronized for all channels C...

Page 1359: ...ined parame ter coupling Suffix uc Index of a user defined parameter coupling To obtain the list of indexes for currently defined coupling see INSTrument COUPle USER uc NUMBers LIST Return values Information String containing the message as displayed in the coupling man ager If the coupling message contains no message an empty string is returned Example INST COUP USER2 INFO Queries possible inform...

Page 1360: ...channel or chan nel type The second channel name is only necessary for synchronization between two specific channels If you synchronize all channels of the same type or all channels the string has to be empty Window String containing the name of a measurement window The second window name is only necessary for synchronization between two specific channels If you synchronize all channels of the sam...

Page 1361: ...izes the attenuation between the channels named Spectrum1 and Spectrum2 in both directions and turns on the coupling Also returns the index number of the user defined cou pling Example INST COUP USER NEW All Spectrum All Windows Attenuation BID ON Result 3 Synchronizes the attenuation between all Spectrum channels in both directions and turns on the coupling Also returns the index number of the us...

Page 1362: ...ynchronize over all channels or all channels of the same application Suffix uc Index of a user defined parameter coupling To obtain the list of indexes for currently defined coupling see INSTrument COUPle USER uc NUMBers LIST Parameters Direction LTOR RTOL BIDir BIDir Changes of a parameter are applied both ways from channel 1 to channel 2 and vice versa LTOR Changes of a parameter are applied fro...

Page 1363: ...ling Suffix uc Index of a user defined parameter coupling To obtain the list of indexes for currently defined coupling see INSTrument COUPle USER uc NUMBers LIST Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Example INST COUP USER2 STAT ON Turns on the coupling with the index number 2 Manual operation See State on page 763 INSTrument COUPle USER uc...

Page 1364: ...Demod Frequency Marker 1 Result All Windows 1 2 3 4 5 6 Usage Query only Manual operation See Specifics for Window on page 765 12 10 12 3 Generator coupling INSTrument COUPle GENerator CENTer OFFSet 1364 INSTrument COUPle GENerator CENTer STATe 1365 INSTrument COUPle GENerator RLEVel OFFSet 1365 INSTrument COUPle GENerator RLEVel STATe 1365 INSTrument COUPle GENerator STATe 1366 INSTrument COUPle ...

Page 1365: ...to the reference level of the R S FSV A for the coupled signal generator This command requires the INSTrument COUPle GENerator STATe and the INSTrument COUPle GENerator RLEVel STATe to be ON Parameters Level Default unit DB Example INST COUP GEN STAT ON INST COUP GEN RLEV STAT ON INST COUP GEN RLEV OFFS 5 Manual operation See Generator Reference Level Offset on page 768 INSTrument COUPle GENerator...

Page 1366: ...ual operation are described in Chapter 10 3 Application starter on page 704 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter ADD 1366 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter DELete 1367 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter DIRectory 1367 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter ICON 1367 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter NAME 1368 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter PARams 1368 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter PATH 1368 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter SELect 1368 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter ADD Appli...

Page 1367: ...ernal External Applications User User Applications DisplayName Name of the application in the Application Starter Example SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter DELete External Notepad Usage Setting only Manual operation See Delete Link on page 709 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter DIRectory WorkingDir Defines the working directory used by the selected application Parameters WorkingDir Example SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter D...

Page 1368: ...r PARams D Simulation Log txt Manual operation See Parameters on page 708 SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter PATH FileSpec Defines a new path to the selected application Parameters FileSpec Path file name and extension of the application Example SYSTem PLUGin APPStarter PATH D MyProject ProjectDocument docx Manual operation See Drive Path File Name on page 707 See Application on page 708 SYSTem PLUGin APPSt...

Page 1369: ... STATus QUEStionable POWer register on page 787 Chapter 11 2 2 13 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register on page 788 Chapter 11 2 2 14 STATus QUEStionable TIMe register on page 788 General status register commands 1369 Reading out the CONDition part 1370 Reading out the EVENt part 1370 Controlling the ENABle part 1371 Controlling the negative transition part 1371 Controlling the positive transit...

Page 1370: ...e STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDition ChannelName These commands read out the CONDition section of the status register The commands do not delete the contents of the CONDition section Suffix n Window Query parameters ChannelName String containing ...

Page 1371: ...FREQuency ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable LIMit n ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable TIME ENABle SumBit ChannelName These commands control the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions i...

Page 1372: ...e String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 12 11 6 Controlling the positive transition part STATus OPERation PTRansition SumBit STATus QUEStionable PTRansition SumBit STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable ...

Page 1373: ... and off Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Writes all remote commands that have been sent to a file The destination is C R_S INSTR ScpiLogging ScpiLog no where no is a sequential number A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is restarted OFF 0 RST 0 Manual operation See I O Logging on page 809 SYSTem REBoot This command reboots the instrument including the operating system SYST...

Page 1374: ...Tem LANGuage 1375 SYSTem PREamp 1375 SYSTem PSA WIDeband 1376 SYSTem REVision STRing 1376 SYSTem RSWeep 1376 SYSTem HPCoupling CouplingType Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for span and resolution bandwidth Span RBW and resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth RBW VBW This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem LANGuage on page 1375 Paramet...

Page 1375: ...meters State ON OFF 1 0 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Manual operation See Language on page 811 See HP Additional on page 813 SYSTem LANGuage Language This command selects the system language Example SYST LANG PSA Emulates the PSA Manual operation See Language on page 811 SYSTem PREamp Option This setting defines which option is returned when the OPT query is ...

Page 1376: ...eband on page 813 SYSTem REVision STRing Name Sets the response to the REV query to the defined string HP emulation only see SYSTem LANGuage on page 1375 Parameters Name Example Define the system language SYST LANG 8563E Query the revision REV Response 920528 Set the response to NewRevision SYST REV STR NewRevision Query the response SYST REV STR Response NewRevision Manual operation See Revision ...

Page 1377: ...ily as well In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R S FSV A is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation After the introduction this section includes the following topics Command set of models 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A B 8568A B 8591E 8594E 71100C 71200C and 71209A 1377 Special features of the syntax parsing algorithms for 8566A and 8568A mode...

Page 1378: ...66B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ADJALL ADJALL Adjust all HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ADJCRT 2 ADJCRT Adjust CRT HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ADJIF 2 ADJIF Auto adjust IF HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AMB AMB ON OFF AMB 1 0 AMB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8594E available AMBPL AMBPL ON OFF AMBPL 1 0 AMBPL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E avail...

Page 1379: ...e APB APB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AT AT numeric_value DB DM AT DN AT UP AT AUTO AT Attenuation HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AUNITS AUNITS DBM DBMV DBUV AUNITS Amplitude Units HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AUTOCPL AUTOCPL Coupling default HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AXB AXB Exchange trace A ...

Page 1380: ... HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available C1 C1 A B off HP 8566A HP 8568A available C2 C2 A B A HP 8566A HP 8568A available CA CA Couple Attenuation HP 8566A HP 8568A available CAL 1 CAL ALL CAL ON CAL OFF Start analyzer self align ment HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CF CF numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ CF UP CF DN CF Center Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B ...

Page 1381: ...8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CR CR Couple RBW HP 8566A HP 8568A available CS CS Couple Step Size HP 8566A HP 8568A available CT CT Couple SWT HP 8566A HP 8568A available CTA Convert to absolute units HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CV CV Couple VBW HP 8566A HP 8568A available D1 2 D1 Display Size normal HP 8566A HP 8568A available DA 2 DA Display address available DEMOD 1 DEMOD ON OFF AM...

Page 1382: ...umeric_value DB DM DL DN DL UP DL ON DL OFF DL Display Line HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DLE DLE ON OFF Display Line enable HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DONE DONE DONE Done query HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DW 2 DW Write to display and increment address available E1 E1 Peak Search HP 8566A HP 8568A available E2 E2 Marker to Center Freq HP 8566A H...

Page 1383: ...not yet availa ble ERR ERR Error queue query HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not yet availa ble EX EX Exchange trace A and B HP 8566A HP 8568A available FA FA numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ FA UP FA DN FA Start Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available FB FB numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ FB UP FB DN FB Stop Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP ...

Page 1384: ...GATE ON OFF GATE 1 0 HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GATECTL 1 GATECTL EDGE LEVEL GATECTL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GD 1 GD numeric_value US MS SC GD DN GD UP GD HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GL 1 GL numeric_value US MS SC GL DN GL UP GL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GP 1 GP POS NEG GP HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available G...

Page 1385: ...e KS KS numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ KS DN KS UP KS Marker Frequency Coun ter Resolution HP 8566A HP 8568A available KS KS Manual Peaking HP 8566A HP 8568A available KS KS Lock register HP 8566A HP 8568A available KS KS Unlock register HP 8566A HP 8568A available KS91 KS91 Read Amplitude Error HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSA KSA Amplitude Units in dBm HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSB KSB Amplitude ...

Page 1386: ...c_value HPIB address HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSQ 2 KSQ Band lock off HP 8566A HP 8568A available KST KST Fast Preset HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSV KSV numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ KSV Frequency Offset HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSW KSW Error Correction Routine HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSX KSX Correction Values On HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSY KSY Correction Values Off HP 8566A HP 8568A...

Page 1387: ...A HP 8568A available KSp KSp Character display on HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSr KSr Create service request HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSt 2 KSt Band lock on HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSv 2 KSv Signal ident on HP 8566A HP 8568A available L0 L0 Display line off HP 8566A HP 8568A available LB LB numeric_value char data Label HP 8566A HP 8568A available LF LF Low frequency band pre set HP 8566A H...

Page 1388: ...LG LG numeric_value DB DM LG Amplitude Scale Log HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available LL 2 LL Plot command HP 8566A HP 8568A available LN LN Amplitude Scale Lin HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available M1 M1 Marker Off HP 8566A HP 8568A available M2 M2 M2 numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ M2 DN M2 UP M2 Marker Normal HP 8566A HP 8568A available M3 M3 M3 numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ M3 DN ...

Page 1389: ...66B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKA MKA numeric_value MKA Marker Amplitude HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKACT MKACT 1 MKACT Select the active marker HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available MKBW 1 MKBW numeric_value MKBW ON MKBW OFF N dB Down HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKD MKD MKD numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKD DN MKD UP MKD ON MKD OFF MKD Delta Marke...

Page 1390: ... MKFCR DN MKFCR UP MKFCR Frequency Counter Res olution HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKMIN MKMIN Marker Min HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKN MKN MKN numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKN DN MKN UP MKN ON MKN OFF MKN Normal Marker HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKNOISE MKNOISE ON OFF MKNOISE 1 0 MKNOISE Noise Measurement HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E...

Page 1391: ...rsion HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKRL MKRL Ref Level Marker Level HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKSP MKSP Deltamarker to span HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKSS MKSS CF Stepsize Marker Freq HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKT MKT numeric_value S MS US SC MKT MKF fstart MKT SWT Span HP 856xE HP 8594E available MKTRACE MKTRACE TRA TRB ...

Page 1392: ...ailable MT1 MT1 Marker Track On HP 8566A HP 8568A available MXMH MXMH TRA TRB Maximum Hold HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available NORMALIZE NORMALIZE Normalize trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available available NRL 1 NRL numeric_value DB DM NRL Normalized Reference Level HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available NRPOS NRPOS numeric_value NRL Normalize position HP 856xE HP...

Page 1393: ...56xE available PH_MKA Queries amplitude at the spot frequency HP 856xE available PH_DRIFT 0 for stable signals 1 for drifty HP 856xE available PH_RLVL Reference level for the log plot HP 856xE available PH_SMTHV Trace smoothing HP 856xE available PH_VBR Filtering HP 856xE available PH_RMSPT Amount of data points to skip when doing the inte gration HP 856xE available PH_RMSFL Lower integration fre ...

Page 1394: ... PLOTSRC ANNT GRT TRB TRA ALLDSP GRT Plot command HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available PP PP Preselector Peaking HP 8566A HP 8568A available PRINT 1 PRINT PRINT 1 0 Hardcopy HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available PSDAC 2 PSDAC numeric_value PSDAC UP DN Preselector DAC value HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available PSTATE 2 PSTATE ON OFF 1 0 Protect State HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8...

Page 1395: ...HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RC1 6 RC1 6 Recall Last State HP 8566A HP 8568A available RCLS RCLS numeric_value Recall State Register HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RCLT RCLT TRA TRB num ber Recall Trace HP856xE HP8594E available RESET RESET Instrument preset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available REV REV REV Firmware revision HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E availa...

Page 1396: ... Request Bit mask HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available S1 S1 Continuous Sweep HP 8566A HP 8568A available S2 S2 Single Sweep HP 8566A HP 8568A available SADD add a limit line segment HP 856xE available SAVES SAVES numeric_value Save State Register HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SAVET SAVET TRA TRB num ber Save Trace HP856xE HP8594E available SDEL delete limit line segment H...

Page 1397: ...HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available SRCPOFS 1 SRCPOFS numeric_value DB DM SRCPOFS DN SRCPOFS UP SRCPOFS Source Power Offset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available SRCPWR 1 SRCPWR numeric_value DB DM SRCPWR DN SRCPWR UP SRCPWR ON SRCPWR OFF SRCPWR Source Power HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available SS SS numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ SS DN SS UP SS AUTO SS CF Step...

Page 1398: ...available SUM sum of trace amplitudes HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SV1 6 SV1 6 Save State HP 8566A HP 8568A available SWPCPL 2 SWPCPL SA SR SWPCPL Sweep Couple HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SWPOUT 2 SWPOUT FAV FAVA RAMP SWPOUT Sweep Output HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available T0 T0 Threshold off HP 8566A HP 8568A available T1 T1 Free Run Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A a...

Page 1399: ...B Transfer B HP 8566A HP 8568A available TDF TDF P TDF M TDF B TDF A TDF I Trace Data Format HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TH TH numeric_value DB DM TH DN TH UP TH ON TH OFF TH AUTO TH Threshold HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available THE THE ON OFF Threshold Line enable HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TIMEDSP 1 TIMEDSP ON OFF TIMEDSP 1 0 TIMEDSP Time Display HP...

Page 1400: ...566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available UR 2 UR Plot Command HP 8566A HP 8568A available VARDEF VARDEF Variable definition arrays are not supported HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VAVG VAVG VAVG TRA TRB TRC Video Averaging HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VB VB numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ VB DN VB UP VB AUTO VB Video Bandwidth HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VBR 1 VBR num...

Page 1401: ...rs considerably between models A and models B The command structure for models A is as follows command command code SPC data step SPC delimiter command code delimiter data Value SPC units code SPC delimiter SPC data step UP DN where command code see Table Supported Commands Value integer or floating point numerical value units code DM DM DB HZ KZ MZ GZ MV UV SC MS US delimiter CR LF ETX SPC 3210 E...

Page 1402: ...es the error bit in the status register but always returns a 0 in response FA Default value range step size FB Default value range step size ID Query of instrument ID The instrument ID defined in SETUP Network Remote GPIB Identification String is returned M2 Default value range step size M3 Default value range step size MKACT Only marker 1 is supported as the active marker MKBW Default value MKPT ...

Page 1403: ...ed The following table shows the default settings obtained after a change of the GPIB lan guage and for the commands IP KST and RESET Model of Trace Points Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Input Coupling 8566A B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC 8568A B 1001 0 Hz 1 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8560E 601 0 Hz 2 9 GHz 0 dBm AC 8561E 601 0 Hz 6 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8562E 601 0 Hz 13 2 GHz 0 dBm AC 8563E 601 0 Hz 26 5 GHz 0 dBm A...

Page 1404: ...ed such that the number of test points trace points corre sponds to that of the 85xx families 1001 for 8566A B and 8568A B 601 for 8560E to 8565E 401 for 8594E 12 13 2 6 Trace data output formats All formats are supported for trace data output display units command O1 display units in two byte binary data command O2 or TDF B and MDS W display units in one byte binary data command O4 or TDF B and M...

Page 1405: ...s is not possible Therefore this bit is set as soon as one of the bits 1 to 5 is set It won t be reset by performing a serial poll 12 13 3 Reference command set of emulated PSA models The R S FSV A analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of PSA89600 and ESA instruments Despite the differences in system architecture and device features the supported com mands have been implemented in...

Page 1406: ... numeric DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet numeric FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat DATA ASCii REAL UINT MATLAB numeric INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON INITiate IMMediate INSTrument CATalog INSTrument NSELect numeric MMEMory CATalog dir_name MMEMory COPY file_name1 file_name2 MMEMory DATA file_name definite_length_block MMEMory DELete file_name MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 file_name MMEMory LOAD TR...

Page 1407: ... IFGain numeric SENSe WAVeform IFPath NARRow WIDE SENSe WAVeform NCPTrace ON OFF SENSe WAVeform PDIT ON OFF SENSe WAVeform SRATe numeric SENSe WAVeform SWEep TIME numeric SENSe WAVeform TRIGger EOFFset SENSe WAVeform TRIGger INTerpolation ON OFF SENSe WAVeform TRIGger SOURce EXTernal 1 2 IF IMMediate STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle number STATus QUEStionable NTRansition nu...

Page 1408: ...nsition integer STATus OPERation PTRansition integer STATus OPERation EVENt SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess integer SYSTem DATE year month day SYSTem ERRor NEXT SYSTem KLOCK SYSTem MESSage string SYSTem PRESet SYSTem TIME hour minute second SYSTem VERSion TRACe COPY src_trace dest_trace TRACe DATA TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 definite_length_block comma_separated_ASCII_data TRACe...

Page 1409: ...ginal In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R S FSV A is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation Table 12 7 Supported PXA commands ABORt CALCulate MARKer AOFF CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum LEFT CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum NEXT CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 MAXimum RIGHt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 MINimum CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 ...

Page 1410: ...ng MMEMory DATA file_name data MMEMory DELete file_name directory_name MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 filename MMEMory MDIRectory directory_name MMEMory MOVE string string string string MMEMory RDIRectory directory_name MMEMory STORe STATe 1 filename SENSe AVERage COUNt integer SENSe AVERage STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe AVERage TYPE RMS LOG SCALar SENSe AVERage TYPE SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution freq SENSe BA...

Page 1411: ...ernal1 LEVel level TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal2 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal1 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence IF LEVel TRIGger SEQuence IF SLOPe NEGative POSitive TRIGger SEQuence SOURCe EXTernal IMMediate VIDeo LINE EXTernal1 EXT1 EXTernal2 EXT2 RFBurst FRAMe TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo DELay time TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel am...

Page 1412: ...to 3 RST 1 Default unit HZ Example ESP2 SCENter 1GHZ SENSe ESPectrum sb SBCount Subblocks This command defines the number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For newer remote control programs use the SENSe ESPectrum sb SCOunt command Suffix sb irrelevant Parameters Subblocks Number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement Range 1 to ...

Page 1413: ...lay on page 1026 Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on DISPlay WINDow n TYPE WindowType This command selects the results displayed in a measurement window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see Chapter 12 6 2 Working with win dows in the displ...

Page 1414: ...e function on Example SOUR EXT FREQ SWE ON Activates the frequency sweep for the external generator SYSTem COMPatible Mode This command enables compatibility to other spectrum and signal analyzers by R S Compatibility is necessary for example regarding the number of sweep points Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the SYST LANG command for new remote control pro...

Page 1415: ...the harmonic distortion on page 1000 Chapter 12 5 11 2 Programming example measuring the TOI on page 1003 Chapter 12 5 12 2 Example measuring the AM modulation depth on page 1005 Chapter 12 5 15 2 Example performing a pulse power measurement on page 1024 Chapter 12 8 2 7 Programming example configuring a spectrogram on page 1167 Programming example working with an external mixer on page 1068 Progr...

Page 1416: ...uring Attenuation Only if electronic attenuator is available INP EATT STAT ON Switches on the electronic attenuator INP EATT 5dB Sets the electronic attenuation to 5 dB INP ATT 0dB Sets the mechanical attenuation to 0 dB makes a total of 5 dB attenuation otherwise INP ATT 5 dB Sets the mechanical attenuation to 5 dB and couples the reference level to the attenuation instead of vice versa Configuri...

Page 1417: ... Configures a high trigger signal with a pulse length of 100 us to be output at the front TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector once Configuring the Trace DISP TRAC2 MODE AVER DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Configures 3 traces 1 default clear write 2 average 3 max hold SENS DET1 POS SENS DET2 RMS SENS DET3 POS Configures traces 1 and 3 to use the positive peak detector trace 2 uses the RMS detector TRAC COPY TRACE...

Page 1418: ...enabled in the VISA session 12 15 2 1 Initiate service request REM Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case of errors PUBLIC SUB SetupSRQ CALL InstrWrite analyzer CLS Reset status reporting system CALL InstrWrite analyzer SRE 168 Enable service request for STAT OPER STAT QUES and ESR register CALL InstrWrite analyzer ESE 60 Set event enable bit for command execution device dependent and qu...

Page 1419: ...ession Write SRE 168 Enable service request for STAT OPER STAT QUES and ESR register mbSession Write ESE 60 Set event enable bit for command execution device dependent and query error mbSession Write STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set OPERation enable bit for all events mbSession Write STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits mbSession Write STAT QUES ENAB 32767 Set questionable enable...

Page 1420: ...than the selected timeout if no response to user inputs is required during the waiting time and if as the main criterion the event is absolutely certain to occur Reason From the time the viWaitOnEvent function is called until the occurrence of the expec ted event it does not allow the program to respond to mouse clicks or key entries dur ing the waiting time Moreover it returns an error if the SRQ...

Page 1421: ...eturns control to the operating system during the time the expected event has not yet occurred In this way the system can respond to user inputs mouse clicks key entries during the waiting time It is advisable to employ the Hold auxiliary function which returns control to the oper ating system for a selectable waiting time see section Waiting without blocking the keyboard and mouse so enabling use...

Page 1422: ...mouse remain Rem operative during the waiting period thus allowing desired elements Rem to be controlled Rem Public Sub Hold delayTime As Single Start Timer Save timer count on calling the function Do While Timer Start delayTime 1000 Check timer count DoEvents Return control to operating system to enable control of desired elements as long as timer has not elapsed Loop End Sub Rem The waiting proc...

Page 1423: ...erationstatus If mySTB And 32 0 Then Call Esrread End If Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub End of SRQ routine Reading out the status event registers the output buffer and the error event queue is effected in subroutines 12 15 2 5 Reading out the output buffer REM Subroutine for the individual STB bits Public SUB Outputqueue Reading the output buffer result SPACE ...

Page 1424: ...ring result Split If parts 0 0 Then hasErr False Console WriteLine result Else Console WriteLine result End If Loop While hasErr End Sub 12 15 2 7 Evaluation of SCPI status registers REM Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register Public SUB Questionablestatus Ques SPACE 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer STATus QUEStionable EVENt CALL InstrRead analyzer Que...

Page 1425: ...n of event status register REM Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register Public SUB Esrread Esr SPACE 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer ESR Read ESR CALL InstrRead analyzer Esr IF VAL Esr AND 1 0 THEN Debug Print Operation complete IF VAL Esr AND 2 0 THEN Debug Print Request Control IF VAL Esr AND 4 0 THEN Debug Print Query Error IF VAL Esr AND 8 0 THEN Debu...

Page 1426: ...If myESR And 8 0 Then Console WriteLine Device dependent error If myESR And 16 0 Then Console WriteLine Execution Error Program aborted Output error message Stop Stop software End If If myESR And 32 0 Then Console WriteLine Command Error Program aborted Output error message Stop Stop software End If If myESR And 64 0 Then Console WriteLine User request If myESR And 128 0 Then Console WriteLine Pow...

Page 1427: ...tarted or com pleted correctly Orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement e g the settings no lon ger match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily Gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps No color No errors No message displayed normal operation Green Measurement successful Some applications v...

Page 1428: ...s been switched off No correction values are available for example after a firmware update Record the correction data by performing a self alignment For details refer to Chapter 3 2 13 Performing a self alignment on page 54 OLD CAL Calibration data outdated Perform a new self alignment Also displayed if Reuse Old Alignment Data is enabled For details refer to Chapter 3 2 13 Performing a self align...

Page 1429: ...he local oscillator fails on the external generator module 2028 Hardcopy not possible during measurement sequence This message is displayed when a printout is started during scan sequences that cannot be interrupted Such sequences are for example Recording the system error correction data alignment Instrument self test In such cases synchronization to the end of the scan sequence should be perform...

Page 1430: ...r RSIB RSDLLibclr The remote channel currently processing the incompleted command is then ready to receive further commands again 3 On the remote channel performing the measurement send the SCPI command ABORt to abort the current measurement and reset the trigger system 4 If the R S FSV A still does not react to the remote commands switch it off and back on Ignored commands When a remote command a...

Page 1431: ... the setting select INPUT OUPUT Input Source Config Radio Frequency Input Coupling DC Invalid trace display If output to the IF 2 GHz OUT connector is activated the measured values are no longer sent to the display thus the trace data currently displayed on the R S FSV A becomes invalid A message in the status bar indicates this situation Data capturing takes too long Particularly for FFT sweeps t...

Page 1432: ... the transducer file is changed and the original save set file is recalled later the originally stored transducer values are recal led and applied to the measurement In the Transducer dialog box however the changed transducer file values are displayed as no updated transducer file was loa ded The same applies to limit line settings If you want to apply the changed transducer values after recalling...

Page 1433: ...in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R S FSV A We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below Windows Event Log Files Windows records important actions of applications and the operating system in event logs You can create event log files to summarize and save the existing event logs see To create windows event log files ...

Page 1434: ...Service R S Support and then Create R S Support Information The file is stored as C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSV3000 version user inst_model _ serial no _ date_and_time zip For example C Program Files Rohde Schwarz FSV3000 version user FSV3000 26_1330 50 To create windows event log files 1 Select the Windows Start Button in the bottom left corner 2 Enter Event Viewer and select Enter 3 Select a...

Page 1435: ...es described in Chapter 14 Transporting on page 1436 13 7 Contacting customer support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde Schwarz product contact our customer sup port center A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applica tions of Rohde Schw...

Page 1436: ...tatic pro tection and packing material designed for the product If you do not have the original packaging use similar materials that provide the same level of protection Securing When moving the product in a vehicle or using transporting equipment make sure that the product is properly secured Only use items intended for securing objects Transport altitude Unless otherwise specified in the data sh...

Page 1437: ...l conditions e g tem perature range and climatic load meet the values specified in the data sheet 15 3 Transporting Lifting and carrying See Lifting and carrying the product on page 33 Chapter 3 2 1 Lifting and carrying on page 44 Packing Use the original packaging material It consists of antistatic wrap for electrostatic pro tection and packing material designed for the product If you do not have...

Page 1438: ... that is labeled as follows cannot be disposed of in normal household waste after it has come to the end of its service life Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted Figure 15 1 Labeling in line with EU directive WEEE Rohde Schwarz has developed a disposal concept for the eco friendly disposal or recycling of waste material As...

Page 1439: ...ESolution RATio 1108 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE 1109 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo 1110 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo AUTO 1110 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo RATio 1110 SENSe BWIDth RESolution 1108 SENSe BWIDth RESolution AUTO 1108 SENSe BWIDth RESolution FFT 1115 SENSe BWIDth RESolution RATio 1108 SENSe BWIDth RESolution TYPE 1109 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire 1082 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND 1064 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS...

Page 1440: ...ut ip USER FLISt fli CLEar 1304 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER FLISt fli INSert 1305 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER FLISt fli MAGNitude STATe 1305 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER FLISt fli PHASe STATe 1306 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER FLISt fli REMove 1307 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si INPut ip USER FLISt fli SELect 1307 SENSe CORRection FRESpon...

Page 1441: ...li DATA PHASe spi 1311 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli INSert 1312 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli MOVE 1313 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli PORTs FROM 1313 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli PORTs TO 1314 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli REMove 1314 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si USER SLISt sli SELect 1315 SENSe CORRection FRESponse si U...

Page 1442: ...SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BAND 952 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BCATegory 953 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR CLASs 954 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR GSM CARRier 954 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR GSM CPResent 955 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR LTE CPResent 956 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR MPOWer 956 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR RFBWidth 957 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet RESTore 928 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STORe 928 SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STANdard ...

Page 1443: ... 1101 SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1102 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP 1103 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO 1103 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK 1103 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor 1104 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet 1104 SENSe FREQuency SPAN 1104 SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL 1105 SENSe FREQuency STARt 1105 SENSe FREQuency STOP 1105 SENSe LIST POWer RESult 1016 SENSe LIST POWer SET 1018 SENSe LIST POWer ST...

Page 1444: ... 1062 SENSe MIXer x LOSS TABLe LOW 1062 SENSe MIXer x LOSS LOW 1063 SENSe MIXer x PORTs 1063 SENSe MIXer x RFOVerrange STATe 1063 SENSe MIXer x SIGNal 1056 SENSe MIXer x THReshold 1057 SENSe MIXer x STATe 1055 SENSe MPOWer FTYPe 1022 SENSe MPOWer RESult MIN 1024 SENSe MPOWer RESult LIST 1022 SENSe MPOWer SEQuence 1022 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue 1090 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle STATe 1089 SENSe PMETer p...

Page 1445: ...ILTer ALPHa GAP gap AUTO 895 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa SBLock sb CHANnel ch 883 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa UACHannel 889 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa UALTernate ch 889 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALL 872 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel 873 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch 873 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch 874 SENSe POWer ACHannel FI...

Page 1446: ...ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing UACHannel 887 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing UALTernate ch 888 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 870 SENSe POWer ACHannel SSETup 888 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt 871 SENSe POWer BANDwidth 926 SENSe POWer BWIDth 926 SENSe POWer HSPeed 882 SENSe POWer NCORrection 1117 SENSe POWer TRACe 866 SENSe PROBe pb ID PARTnumber 1070 SENSe PROBe pb ID SRNumber 1071 SENSe P...

Page 1447: ...SENSe SWEep TYPE USED 1114 SENSe SWEep WINDow n POINts 1113 CAL 846 CLS 846 ESE 846 ESR 846 IDN 847 IST 847 OPC 847 OPT 847 PCB 848 PRE 848 PSC 848 RST 848 SRE 848 STB 849 TRG 849 TST 849 WAI 849 ABORt 859 CALCulate n DELTamarker m AOFF 1170 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE 1212 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult 1212 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN 1213 ...

Page 1448: ...rker m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK 1197 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MINimum PEAK 1197 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe 1197 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum BELow 1198 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT 1198 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK 1198 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe 1199 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum BELow 11...

Page 1449: ... gap ACLR RESult 913 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual LOWer ABSolute 897 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual LOWer ABSolute STATe 898 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual LOWer ACLR RELative 899 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual LOWer ACLR RELative STATe 899 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap MANual LOWer CACLr RELative 900 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower GAP gap...

Page 1450: ... li LOWer SHIFt 1237 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer SPACing 1237 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer STATe 1238 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer THReshold 1238 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer DATA 1236 CALCulate n LIMit li NAME 1239 CALCulate n LIMit li STATe 1244 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t 1412 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk 1244 CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT 1239 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MARGin 1240 CALCulate n LIM...

Page 1451: ...e n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST 999 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics 998 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet 998 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics STATe 997 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth RESult t 1005 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE 1005 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe 1004 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmary 1021 ...

Page 1452: ...UNCtion SUMMary RMS PHOLd RESult 994 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESult 994 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe 990 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation AVERage RESult 994 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation PHOLd RESult 995 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation RESult 995 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe 990 CALCu...

Page 1453: ...XT 1195 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK 1195 CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe 1176 CALCulate n MARKer m X 1177 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits LEFT 1180 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits RIGHt 1181 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe 1181 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe 1180 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe 1178 CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent 978 CALCulate n MARKer m Y 1190 CALCulate ...

Page 1454: ...CALCulate n STATistics CCDF STATe 977 CALCulate n STATistics NSAMples 978 CALCulate n STATistics PRESet 981 CALCulate n STATistics RESult res 985 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE 982 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe 982 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel 982 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer 983 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT 983 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer 983 CALCul...

Page 1455: ...ESt RESult 1296 DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo 1341 DISPlay ANNotation CBAR 1320 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 1320 DISPlay ATAB 850 DISPlay CMAP it DEFault ci 1323 DISPlay CMAP it HSL 1324 DISPlay CMAP it PDEFined 1324 DISPlay FORMat 1025 DISPlay LOGO 1265 DISPlay SBAR STATe 1320 DISPlay SKEYs STATe 1320 DISPlay TBAR STATe 1321 DISPlay THEMe CATalog 1325 DISPlay THEMe SELect 1325 DISPlay TOUChscreen ...

Page 1456: ...LEVel OFFSet 1117 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition 1124 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue 1081 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t STATe 1147 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM AREA 1140 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn AREA 1142 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn STATe 1143 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM STATe 1141 FETCh PMETer p ...

Page 1457: ...DELete 1283 HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlate LOAD 1283 HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlate SAVE 1283 HCOPy TREPort NEW 1283 HCOPy TREPort PAGecount STATe 1284 HCOPy TREPort PAGesize 1284 HCOPy TREPort PCOLors STATe 1284 HCOPy TREPort TDSTamp STATe 1284 HCOPy TREPort TEST REMove 1285 HCOPy TREPort TEST REMove ALL 1285 HCOPy TREPort TITLe 1285 HCOPy TREPort TITLe STATe 1285 HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 1269 HCOPy IMMedia...

Page 1458: ...1365 INSTrument COUPle GENerator RLEVel STATe 1365 INSTrument COUPle GENerator STATe 1366 INSTrument COUPle IMPedance 1353 INSTrument COUPle LIMit 1353 INSTrument COUPle LLINes 1354 INSTrument COUPle MARKer 1354 INSTrument COUPle PRESel 1354 INSTrument COUPle RLEVel 1355 INSTrument COUPle SPAN 1355 INSTrument COUPle USER uc 1356 INSTrument COUPle USER uc CHANnel LIST 1358 INSTrument COUPle USER uc...

Page 1459: ...AD n TFACtor 1300 MMEMory LOAD n TRACe 1166 MMEMory MDIRectory 1253 MMEMory MOVE 1254 MMEMory MSIS 1254 MMEMory NAME 1254 MMEMory NETWork DISConnect 1254 MMEMory NETWork MAP 1255 MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives 1255 MMEMory NETWork USEDdrives 1255 MMEMory RAW 1286 MMEMory RDIRectory 1256 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL 1256 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault 1257 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettin...

Page 1460: ...ORt STATe 1098 OUTPut up UPORt VALue 1098 OUTPut up VIDeo STATe 1099 READ PMETer p 1089 SOURce si EXTernal ext ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 1291 SOURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency 1076 SOURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency COUPling STATe 1076 SOURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency OFFSet 1078 SOURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency SWEep STATe 1414 SOURce si EXTernal gen FREQuency FACTor DENominator 1077 SOURce si ...

Page 1461: ...n PTRansition 1372 STATus QUEStionable LIMit n EVENt 1370 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n CONDition 1370 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n ENABle 1371 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n NTRansition 1372 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n PTRansition 1372 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n EVENt 1370 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 1371 STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition 1370 STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle 1371 STAT...

Page 1462: ...SM USER DELete ALL 1336 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion 1336 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator gen ADDRess 1081 SYSTem COMPatible 1414 SYSTem DATE 1322 SYSTem DFPRint 1341 SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe 1322 SYSTem DISPlay LANGuage 1327 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate 1328 SYSTem ERRor CLEar ALL 1341 SYSTem ERRor CLEar REMote 1341 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay 1328 SYSTem ERRor EXTended 1342 SYSTem ERRor LIST ...

Page 1463: ...SHIMmediate STATe 1330 SYSTem SHUTdown 1373 SYSTem SPEaker MAXVolume 1100 SYSTem SPEaker MUTE 1100 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume 1100 SYSTem SPEaker STATe 1099 SYSTem TIME 1323 TRACe n COPY 1151 TRACe n DATA 1162 TRACe n DATA MEMory 1162 TRACe n DATA X 1163 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe 1126 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 1126 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff 1126 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis 1127 TRIGger ...

Page 1464: ...meric parameters 108 AM modulation Measurement example 148 149 AM modulation depth 320 About 320 Configuring 321 Determining 323 Markers 322 Markers remote control 1004 Measurement remote control 1004 Programming example 1005 Results 321 Results remote control 1004 Search signals 322 Search signals remote control 1004 Amplifier Measurement Application 123 Amplitude Configuration 455 Distribution w...

Page 1465: ...Port Connector 69 AV trace information 99 Average count 469 474 589 Power sensor 367 Average detector 577 EMI 328 Average mode Traces 589 Averaging Continuous sweep 583 Single sweep 583 Sweep count 583 Traces 584 Traces algorithm 583 Traces remote control 1149 B Band Conversion loss table 416 External Mixer 409 External Mixer remote 1059 Band power markers Programming example 1227 Band power measu...

Page 1466: ...nt 220 Channel Creating remote 851 853 Deleting remote 852 Duplicating remote 850 Querying remote 852 Renaming remote 853 Replacing remote 851 Selecting remote 853 Channel bandwidth C N 217 CP ACLR 180 MSR Tx channel 190 MSR adjacent channels 192 MSR gap channels 197 Channel Bandwidth OBW 222 Softkey 222 Channel bar Changing names 98 Hiding restoring 694 Information 95 Information external generat...

Page 1467: ...Conventions SCPI commands 844 Conversion loss External Mixer remote 1062 1063 Conversion loss tables 414 Available remote 1065 Band remote 1064 Bias remote 1064 Configuring 414 Creating 415 Deleting remote 1065 External Mixer 400 410 External Mixer remote 1062 Harmonic order remote 1066 Importing External Mixer 414 Managing 413 Mixer type remote 1067 Saving External Mixer 418 Selecting remote 1067...

Page 1468: ...13 Date Format 693 Hiding restoring 694 Instrument setting 692 Date and Time Printing 656 DC channel bar 97 Debugging Remote control programs 1430 Decimal separator Trace export 616 618 652 Default Restoring settings 634 Default coupling 474 Default values Remote 848 Deleting Limit line values 571 Settings files 255 Standards 255 Transducer factors 719 Delta markers 337 521 Defining 337 521 537 Fi...

Page 1469: ...D 787 WRONG_FW 685 746 1428 ESE event status enable register 780 ESR event status register 780 Evaluation Lists SEM 255 Lists Spurious 278 Modes 502 Modes adding 117 507 Trying out 73 Evaluation bar Using 117 507 Evaluation list Details Spurious Emissions 280 Peaks Spurious Emissions 280 Spurious Emissions 271 Evaluation methods Remote 1026 Event status enable register ESE 780 Remote 846 Event sta...

Page 1470: ...sage 101 External trigger 486 Configuring power sensor 370 Level power sensor 367 Level remote 1127 Power sensor 367 ExtMix channel bar 98 F Falling Slope Power sensor 368 Fast ACLR Activating Deactivating 177 Measurement method 161 Fast SEM 234 Consequences 234 Example 235 Multi SEM 234 236 Prerequisites 234 SEM 242 FFT filters Mode 475 FFT sweep 466 475 File format Export Files 621 SEM export fi...

Page 1471: ...SR configuring 195 MSR weighting filters 197 GAT channel bar 97 Gate Delay 495 Length 495 Measurements 492 Mode 495 Ranges statistics 286 Settings 494 Gate ranges Activating statistics 291 Comment statistics 291 Period statistics 291 Start Stop statistics 291 Statistics 290 Gated trigger Activating 495 Configuring statistics 290 294 Delay 495 Example 295 Length 495 Mode 495 Softkey 289 Statistics ...

Page 1472: ...5 I Q data Exporting 652 I Q Power Trigger 487 Trigger level remote 1128 IBW method CP ACLR measurements 160 ID String User 790 Identification Remote 847 String R S FSV A 808 String resetting R S FSV A 809 IECWIN 792 IF frequency Output 356 IF Gain GPIB 812 GPIB remote control 1374 IF Out Frequency 441 IF OVLD Error 1428 IF Power Trigger 487 Trigger level remote 1128 IF Video DEMOD Connector 69 IF...

Page 1473: ...ion Multi SEM 237 245 Comment 569 Compatibility 561 567 Compatible 572 Copying 568 573 Creating 568 574 Data points 570 Deactivating 568 Defining 572 Deleting 568 573 Deleting values 571 Details 568 Editing 568 573 Inserting values 571 Managing 565 Margin 570 Margins 562 Name 569 OBW 222 527 531 Offsets 563 Peak search 222 527 531 Recalling 638 Remote control 1233 Saving 571 638 642 Selecting 567 ...

Page 1474: ...guration remote control 1170 Deactivating 522 Delta markers 337 521 537 Demodulation 547 555 Demodulation remote control 1218 Fixed reference remote control 1177 1200 Function configuration 533 Linking 337 521 Minimum 532 Minimum remote control 1179 1183 n dB down 543 n dB down remote control 1213 Next minimum 532 Next minimum remote control 1179 1183 Next peak 532 Next peak remote control 1179 11...

Page 1475: ...nel setting 96 Modes see Operating mode 122 Modulation Marker Demodulation 442 549 Monitor External 701 Settings 701 MSR ACLR Adjacent channel bandwidths 192 Adjacent channel definition 192 Adjacent channel setup 190 Adjacent channel spacing 192 Adjacent channel weighting filters 192 Adjacent channels 170 CACLR 169 Channel definition 169 Channel display 171 Configuration 182 Gap channel bandwidths...

Page 1476: ...0 NOR channel bar 98 Normalization Approximate external generator 376 External generator 375 387 Number of Readings Power sensor 367 Numerator Frequencies external generator 378 385 Numeric parameters 107 O OBW 218 Power remote control 925 Power Bandwidth 222 Adjust Settings 222 Channel Bandwidth 222 Channel bandwidth remote control 925 Configuring 221 Deactivating limits 223 528 531 Determining 2...

Page 1477: ...t 551 Mode 526 529 Mode spectrograms 528 529 Reference marker 524 Threshold 527 531 Type spectrograms 529 Zoom limits 527 531 Peaks Displaying SEM 256 Displaying Spurious Emissions 279 Margin SEM 256 Margin Spurious Emissions 279 Marker positioning 531 Next 532 per range Spurious Emissions 280 SEM results 227 Softkey 531 Spurious Emissions 271 Percent marker CCDF 286 Softkey CCDF 289 Performing EM...

Page 1478: ...r 409 Key 634 Recalling settings 649 Presetting Channels 351 Pretrigger 490 Preview Trigger Gate settings 485 Print Screen Softkey 658 Printer Selecting 660 Printers Installing 661 Printing Colors 696 698 702 Colors remote 1323 Medium 660 Screenshots 658 664 Trying out 92 Probability range Statistics 293 Probe Connector 64 Probes Microbutton 362 Settings 360 Programming examples ACLR 916 AM Modula...

Page 1479: ...nal 736 Marker 524 543 Phase noise measurement 541 Power SEM 248 Range SEM 230 247 Softkey 736 Reference channel CP ACLR 176 185 Reference frequency Default 739 External generator 374 383 Input 737 Output 738 Reference level 453 456 Adjusting to transducer factors 716 Auto level 458 500 CP ACLR 167 External generator 377 External Mixer 401 Offset 457 Offset Power sensor 367 Position 461 Power sens...

Page 1480: ...ng 113 Exporting 615 Managing 634 OBW 220 SEM 226 SEM remote 229 Storing remote 1275 Reverse sweep External generator 379 385 Revision string GPIB 813 1376 GPIB remote control 1330 Resetting 813 RF attenuation Auto 458 Impact 454 Manual 458 Mode SEM range 243 Mode Spurious Emissions range 277 Noise floor 454 SEM range 243 Spurious Emissions range 277 RF input 356 Overload protection remote 1037 Re...

Page 1481: ...rting 688 Self test Performing 690 754 Remote 849 Results 754 1296 Settings 754 Temperature 690 Selftest Remote 1347 SEM 225 About 225 Adding power classes 250 Alpha value RRC filter 249 Applications 225 Channel power settings 248 Configuring 239 257 Deleting ranges 245 Displaying peaks 256 Exporting results 261 Fast mode 234 242 Filter type 242 Format description of export files 269 Format descri...

Page 1482: ...63 Results 513 Short circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator 387 Show SCPI command 794 Close 795 Copy 795 Shutdown Automatic 689 Remote control 1373 Signal capturing Duration remote 1111 1113 Signal count Marker 535 Remote control 1217 Resolution 535 Signal count markers Programming example 1229 Signal counter Measurement example 140 Signal generator Address 750 767 799 Conne...

Page 1483: ...2 MSR Configuration 250 Next Min 532 Next Mode X 529 Next Mode Y 529 Next Peak 532 No of Harmonics 309 Noise cancellation 176 185 460 Norm Delta 337 521 537 Outputs Config 440 Peak 531 Percent Marker 289 Power classes 249 Power Mode 178 187 Power Sensor 488 Power Sensor Config 364 Power Unit 177 186 Preamp 459 Print Screen 658 R S Support 752 Recall 642 Recall File 641 645 Ref Level 456 Ref Level ...

Page 1484: ...imit check 278 Limit lines 273 List details 280 List evaluation 278 List evaluation state 279 Measurement remote control 962 Measurement result list 278 Peak margins 279 Peaks 271 Peaks per range 280 Performing 274 280 Preamplifier 277 Programming example 974 Range start stop 275 Ranges 272 RBW 276 Reference level 277 Result files 281 Results 271 RF attenuation 277 RF attenuation mode 277 Saving l...

Page 1485: ...port 1433 Information 752 Information remote 1347 Suppressing File name dialog 660 Sweep Aborting 476 477 603 604 Behavior Spurious Emissions 277 Configuration Softkey 470 Continuous 136 Count 469 Count Spectrograms 595 Default settings 463 Mode 136 469 Performing 136 Points 469 577 Points SEM range 245 Points Spurious Emissions range 277 Settings Spectrogram 477 Single 136 Time remote 1111 1113 T...

Page 1486: ...er 298 About 298 Configuring 300 Limit lines 299 301 302 Measurement remote control 987 Measurement example 302 Measuring 302 Restricting range 299 Results 298 301 Time frames Configuring 477 Continuing 477 Navigating 477 595 per sweep 478 Selecting 477 603 Spectrograms 594 Time trigger Repetition interval 489 Softkey 489 Timestamps Softkey Spectrogram 603 Spectrograms 595 603 TOI 310 About the me...

Page 1487: ...ication 125 Transmission measurement Calibration external generator 387 External generator 373 How to external generator 389 TRG channel bar 97 Trigger Configuration preview 485 Connector 68 Drop out time 489 Drop Out Time 482 Drop out time Power sensor 368 Event remote 849 External remote 1129 External power 367 External errors 1430 Holdoff 483 490 Holdoff Power sensor 368 Hysteresis 481 490 Hyst...

Page 1488: ...ines 567 Transducer lines 716 VISA 774 Resource string 774 Visible Limit lines 567 Volatile memory Secure user mode 56 635 Volume Headphones 65 Remote control 1099 1100 VSA Vector Signal Analysis Application 125 W W CDMA signals CP ACLR 207 Wait Remote 849 Waiting for trigger Status register 781 Warmup time 689 Web browser Configuration interface 828 Weighting filters CP ACLR 182 MSR ACLR 190 MSR ...

Page 1489: ...vating Deactivating remote 1038 Z Zero span Measurement 136 Measurement examples 151 Softkey 449 Zeroing Power sensor 365 Zoom Graphical 112 Measurement 112 Zoom limits Search range 510 Using for searches 527 531 Zooming 509 513 Activating remote 1141 Area Multiple mode remote 1142 Area remote 1140 Multiple mode 509 511 Multiple mode remote 1142 1143 Remote 1140 Restoring original display 512 Sing...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands